Golden Software Didger v5.x - User's Guide (Didger5FullGuide-eBook)

Full User’s Guide
The Ultimate Digitizing, Coordinate

Conversion & Georeferencing Toolbox
Golden Software, Inc.
Didger® Registration Information
Your Didger serial number is located on the CD cover or in the email

download instructions, depending on how you purchased Didger.
Register your Didger serial number online at

www.GoldenSoftware.com. Or, complete the Registration Form.PDF,
located in the main directory of the installation CD. Return the Registration
Form.PDF by mail or fax. This information will not be redistributed.
Registration entitles you to free technical support, free minor updates,

and upgrade pricing on future Didger releases. The serial number is
required when you run Didger the first time, contact technical support,
or purchase Didger upgrades.
For future reference, write your serial number on the line below.
_________________________________
Didger® User’s Guide


809 14th Street, Golden, Colorado 80401-1866, U.S.A.
Phone: 303-279-1021 Fax: 303-279-0909
www.GoldenSoftware.com
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
Copyright Golden Software, Inc. 2013
The Didger® User’s Guide is furnished under a single user license agreement. Only a
single user may use a single user’s guide. With the purchase of the Didger User’s
Guide, the user is entitled to download the user’s guide content to one (1) electronic
medium and print one (1) hardcopy. No part of this document or the related files may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by any means (electronic, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise) thereafter. Contents are subject to change without notice.
Didger is a registered trademark of Golden Software, Inc. All other trademarks are
the property of their respective owners.
September 2013
Contents
Chapter 1 - Introducing Didger
Welcome to Didger.........................................................................................1
Examples of Didger Uses..............................................................................2
What is Digitizing? ......................................................................................2
New Features ................................................................................................3
User Friendly..............................................................................................3
Image Registration and Processing ................................................................3
Projections and Coordinate Systems ..............................................................3
Import and Export Improvements .................................................................6
System Requirements ....................................................................................7
Installation Directions .....................................................................................8
Updating Didger .........................................................................................8
Uninstalling Didger ......................................................................................8
A Note about the Documentation......................................................................9
Three-Minute Tour ....................................................................................... 10
Sample Didger Files .................................................................................. 10
Using Didger ............................................................................................ 11
Getting Base Information into Didger .............................................................. 11
Paper Documents ..................................................................................... 11
Image Files .............................................................................................. 11
Data Files ................................................................................................ 12
Vector Files .............................................................................................. 12
Tablets vs. Scanners .................................................................................... 12
What is a Digitizing Tablet? ........................................................................ 12
Scanners ................................................................................................. 12
Didger User Interface ................................................................................... 13
Didger Layout .......................................................................................... 14
Opening Windows ..................................................................................... 15
Toolbars .................................................................................................. 15
i
Didger
Status Bar ............................................................................................... 17

Change Plot Color ..................................................................................... 18
Changing the Window Layout ..................................................................... 18
Layer Manager ......................................................................................... 22
Data Manager .......................................................................................... 25
Selecting Objects ......................................................................................... 26
Property Manager ..................................................................................... 26
Coordinate Manager .................................................................................. 29
Getting Didger Help...................................................................................... 29
Navigating the Help................................................................................... 30
Obtaining Information on Dialogs and Commands .......................................... 30
Internet Help Resources ............................................................................ 30
Complete the Didger Tutorial ...................................................................... 31
Technical Support ........................................................................................ 31
Register Serial Number ................................................................................. 32
Suggestions ................................................................................................ 32
Golden Software Contact Information ............................................................. 32
Chapter 2 - Tutorial
Tutorial Overview ........................................................................................ 33
A Note About the Documentation ................................................................ 34
Using the Tutorial with the Demo Version ..................................................... 34
Starting Didger ............................................................................................ 34
Lesson 1 - Tablet Calibration ......................................................................... 35
Opening and Printing the Tutorial Map ......................................................... 35
Calibrating a Digitizing Tablet ..................................................................... 36
Tablet Calibration Wizard Coordinate System Settings .................................... 36
Create Calibration Points ............................................................................ 37
RMS Calibration Settings ............................................................................ 38
Calibration Settings ................................................................................... 40
Specify Project Limits and Scale .................................................................. 41
ii
Table of Contents
Next Steps ............................................................................................... 41

Lesson 2 - Image Calibration ......................................................................... 42
Importing an Image .................................................................................. 42
Entering Reference Information .................................................................. 42
Locating the Calibration Points .................................................................... 43
Setting the Options and Finishing the Calibration ........................................... 44
Lesson 3 - Creating and Editing Objects .......................................................... 45
Creating Symbols ..................................................................................... 45
Drawing the Monitoring Wells ..................................................................... 46
Drawing the Recovery Wells ....................................................................... 48
Assigning Labels ....................................................................................... 49
Drawing Polylines ..................................................................................... 50
Editing Polylines ....................................................................................... 51
Lesson 4 - Converting Coordinates .............................................................. 52
Lesson 5 - Assigning and Changing the Projection............................................. 53
Opening an Existing Project ........................................................................ 53
Assigning the Projection............................................................................. 55
Changing the Projection ............................................................................. 56
Lesson 6 - Downloading Online Maps .............................................................. 57
Create New Project ................................................................................... 57
Download the Online Map........................................................................... 58
Lesson 7 - Vectorizing an Image .................................................................... 60
Opening an Existing Project File .................................................................. 60
Automatically Creating Vector Contour Lines ................................................. 61
Turning Off the Image Display .................................................................... 61
Assigning Elevations .................................................................................. 62
Preprocessing Note ................................................................................... 63
Advanced Tutorial Lesson 8 - Saving and Exporting Data ................................... 64
Saving a Didger Project ............................................................................. 64
Exporting Data to a File ............................................................................. 64
Advanced Tutorial Lesson 9 - Digitizing Objects with Shared Borders ................... 66
iii
Didger
Downloading an Image Outlining the Areas ................................................... 66

Setting the Snap Tolerance ........................................................................ 67
Digitizing the Non-Shared Polylines ............................................................. 68
Digitizing the Shared Polylines .................................................................... 70
Combining the Polylines into Multiple Polygons .............................................. 72
Chapter 3 - Managing the Project

Getting Base Information into Didger .............................................................. 75
Paper Documents ..................................................................................... 75
Image Files .............................................................................................. 75
Data Files ................................................................................................ 75
Vector Files .............................................................................................. 75
Introduction to Layers .................................................................................. 76
Tips on Using Layers ................................................................................. 76
Layer Manager ......................................................................................... 77
Move to Another Layer .............................................................................. 77
Layer Formatter Dialog .............................................................................. 78
Tablet Calibration ........................................................................................ 80
Tablets vs. Scanners ................................................................................. 80
Rotation .................................................................................................. 81
Scaling .................................................................................................... 81
Calibration Marker .................................................................................... 82
Activate Tablet ......................................................................................... 82
Troubleshooting Digitizing Tablets ............................................................... 83
Digitizing Accuracy and Acceptable Error - RMS Values ...................................... 83
RMS Error Value ....................................................................................... 85
Calculating Allowable or Acceptable RMS Error .............................................. 87
An Example of Allowable Error Based on Map Scale ........................................ 89
An Example of Allowable Error Based on a Percentage Value ........................... 90
Spatial Transformation Methods ..................................................................... 90
Spatial Transformation Methods References .................................................. 98
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 - Drawing Objects

Draw Menu Commands ............................................................................... 101
Text ......................................................................................................... 101
Drawing Text ......................................................................................... 101
Editing Text Properties ............................................................................ 102
Text Properties ....................................................................................... 102
Default Properties ................................................................................... 102
Text Editor ............................................................................................. 102
Polygon .................................................................................................... 117
Drawing a Polygon .................................................................................. 117
Editing Polygon Properties ........................................................................ 118
Using a Digitizing Tablet .......................................................................... 118
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 118
Polyline .................................................................................................... 119
Drawing a Polyline .................................................................................. 120
Editing Polyline Properties ........................................................................ 120
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 121
Symbol .................................................................................................... 122
Drawing a Symbol................................................................................... 122
Editing Symbol Properties ........................................................................ 122
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 123
Rectangle ................................................................................................. 123
Drawing a Rectangle ............................................................................... 123
v
Didger
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 124

Circle ....................................................................................................... 125
Drawing a Circle ..................................................................................... 125
Editing Circle Properties ........................................................................... 126
Spline Polyline ........................................................................................... 126
Drawing a Spline Polyline ......................................................................... 126
Editing Polyline Properties ........................................................................ 127
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 127
Spline Polygon........................................................................................... 128
Drawing a Spline Polygon ......................................................................... 128
Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 129
Wrapped Polyline ....................................................................................... 130
Drawing a Wrapped Polyline ..................................................................... 130
Construct Wrapped Polyline Dialog ............................................................ 131
Polygon Marker ......................................................................................... 133
Introduction to Complex Polygons ................................................................ 133
Create Several Objects ............................................................................... 134
Create Several Objects ............................................................................ 134
IDs ....................................................................................................... 134
Enter Data After Creation ......................................................................... 134
Creating Several Objects with Different IDs ................................................ 135
Creating Several Objects with Sequential IDs .............................................. 136
Tips on Drawing Several Objects ............................................................... 137
Drawing Several Objects Example ............................................................. 137
vi
Table of Contents
Chapter 5 - Editing Objects

Object Types ............................................................................................. 139
Symbols ................................................................................................ 139
Editing Point Properties ............................................................................ 140
Polylines ................................................................................................ 140
Polygons ............................................................................................... 141
Text ...................................................................................................... 142
Images ................................................................................................. 142
Property Manager ...................................................................................... 143
Object Properties ....................................................................................... 143
Item Properties ...................................................................................... 143
Data Attributes Properties ........................................................................ 145
Increment Settings Properties................................................................... 146
Symbol Properties ................................................................................... 147
Line Properties ....................................................................................... 149
Fill Properties ......................................................................................... 153
Label Properties ...................................................................................... 156
Introduction to Colors ................................................................................. 158
Colors Dialog.......................................................................................... 158
Editting Attribute Fields .............................................................................. 160
Field Names ........................................................................................... 160
Adding Fields ......................................................................................... 161
Removing Fields ..................................................................................... 161
Loading Field Definitions .......................................................................... 161
Saving Field Definitions............................................................................ 161
Specialty Fields ...................................................................................... 161
Reshaping Objects ..................................................................................... 162
Thinning and Smoothing Polylines ................................................................ 163
Keep Every nth Point ............................................................................... 163
Deviation Distance .................................................................................. 163
Vertex Averaging .................................................................................... 164
vii
Didger
Spline Smooth ........................................................................................ 164

Resampling Polylines .................................................................................. 165
Removing Duplicate Objects ........................................................................ 166
Removing Polylines by Length...................................................................... 166
Changing Polygons to Polylines .................................................................... 167
Changing Polylines to Polygons .................................................................... 167
Changing Points to Polylines ........................................................................ 167
Changing Polylines to Points ........................................................................ 167
Connecting Polylines .................................................................................. 168
Breaking Polylines ...................................................................................... 168
Trimming Polylines ..................................................................................... 169
Creating Line Intersections .......................................................................... 170
Snapping Polyline Segments ........................................................................ 170
Snapping Undershoot Polylines .................................................................... 171
Trimming Overshoot Polylines ...................................................................... 171
Creating Polygons by Locator....................................................................... 172
Creating Polygons by IDs ............................................................................ 173
Changing a Polyline to a Polygon with a Shared Border.................................... 176
Combining Polygons ................................................................................... 176
Combining Islands/Lakes or Union Polygons................................................ 177
Intersecting Polygons ................................................................................. 177
Difference of Polygons ................................................................................ 178
Dividing Polygons ...................................................................................... 178
Creating a Convex Hull ............................................................................... 179
Creating Intersection Points ........................................................................ 179
Islands/Lakes ............................................................................................ 180
Splitting Islands/Lakes ............................................................................ 180
Reverse Direction ................................................................................... 180
viii
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 - Downloading and Processing Images

Image ...................................................................................................... 181
Image Properties ....................................................................................... 181
Georeferenced Images ............................................................................... 181
Georeferenced Images in Didger Projects ................................................... 181
Rectified Georeferenced Images ................................................................ 181
Images with Unknown Georeferencing ....................................................... 182
Image Scaling ........................................................................................ 182
Image Menu Commands ............................................................................. 182
Download Online Maps................................................................................ 182
Data Source ........................................................................................... 184
Select Area to Download .......................................................................... 185
Select Image Resolution to Download ........................................................ 187
Image Preview ....................................................................................... 187
Log ....................................................................................................... 188
OK, Cancel and Help ............................................................................... 188
Add Data Source Dialog ........................................................................... 188
Edit Data Source Dialog ........................................................................... 190
View Data Source Dialog .......................................................................... 192
Server Information Dialog ........................................................................ 194
Layer Information Dialog ......................................................................... 195
Vectorize Image ........................................................................................ 196
Vectorization Scheme .............................................................................. 196
Colors to Vectorize .................................................................................. 197
Color Tolerance ...................................................................................... 197
Edge Detection Method ............................................................................ 198
Canny Edge Options ................................................................................ 199
Gaussian Standard Deviation .................................................................... 199
Hysteresis High Value and Hysteresis Low Value .......................................... 199
Post Processing Options ........................................................................... 200
Smooth Lines ......................................................................................... 200
ix
Didger
Minimum Pixel Length ............................................................................. 200

Auto Generate Polygons ........................................................................... 200
Retain Processed Image........................................................................... 201
Create Results on New Layers................................................................... 201
OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 201
Image Registration and Warping Dialog......................................................... 201
Image Display ........................................................................................ 202
Zooming and Panning the Image ............................................................... 203
Entering Calibration Mode ........................................................................ 203
Calibration Points .................................................................................... 203
Calibration Points Table ........................................................................... 204
Auto Advance Row .................................................................................. 204
Adding Calibration Points ......................................................................... 205
Deleting Calibration Points ....................................................................... 205
Loading Calibration Points ........................................................................ 205
Saving Calibration Points ......................................................................... 205
Creating a Calibration Report .................................................................... 206
Setting the Calibration Marker .................................................................. 206
Total RMS .............................................................................................. 206
Warp Method ......................................................................................... 206
Resample Method ................................................................................... 206
Specify Coordinate System ....................................................................... 207
Specify Image Extents ............................................................................. 207
Preview ................................................................................................. 208
Import without Referencing and Warping.................................................... 208
Resizing the Dialog ................................................................................. 208
OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 208
Example 1: Calibrating an Image by Entering Coordinates ............................ 209
Example 2: Calibrating an Image by Selecting Reference Points in an Existing
Project .................................................................................................. 209
Change Output Limits Dialog .................................................................... 210
Image Processing Filters ............................................................................. 211
x
Table of Contents
Edge Detection ....................................................................................... 212

Image Thinning ...................................................................................... 215
Spatial Filters ......................................................................................... 217
Sharpen ................................................................................................ 218
Median Filter .......................................................................................... 219
Adjust Contrast ...................................................................................... 220
Adjust Brightness ................................................................................... 221
Adjust Saturation .................................................................................... 222
Color Reduction ...................................................................................... 223
Image Erosion and Dilation ...................................................................... 224
Convert to Black and White ...................................................................... 227
Convert to Grayscale ............................................................................... 229
Clipping Images......................................................................................... 229
Clip Image with Current Polygon ............................................................... 229
Map Collar ............................................................................................. 230
Remove Clipping ..................................................................................... 231
Remove All Clipping ................................................................................ 231
Cropping Images ....................................................................................... 232
Resizing Images ........................................................................................ 233
Pixel Dimensions .................................................................................... 233
Document Size ....................................................................................... 233
Resolution ............................................................................................. 234
Constrain Proportions .............................................................................. 234
Retain Document Size ............................................................................. 234
Resample Method ................................................................................... 234
Reset Image .......................................................................................... 235
OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 235
Mosaicking Images..................................................................................... 235
Changing Image Color Formats .................................................................... 236
Select New Format .................................................................................. 236
OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 236
xi
Didger
Modifying Image Colors .............................................................................. 237

Current Color ......................................................................................... 237
Color Tolerance ...................................................................................... 238
Transparent ........................................................................................... 238
New Color .............................................................................................. 238
Set All Transparent Pixels to Opaque ......................................................... 239
OK, Close, Apply, or Cancel ...................................................................... 239
Chapter 7 - Tablet Digitizing

Tablets vs. Scanners .................................................................................. 241
What is a Digitizing Tablet? ...................................................................... 241
Scanners ............................................................................................... 241
What is Digitizing? ..................................................................................... 242
Tablet Digitizing ........................................................................................ 242
Activate Tablet .......................................................................................... 244
Why Calibrate the Tablet? ........................................................................... 244
Selecting Calibration Points ......................................................................... 244
Tablet Calibration ...................................................................................... 245
Rotation ................................................................................................ 245
Scaling .................................................................................................. 245
Tablet Calibration Wizard ............................................................................ 245
Tablet Calibration Wizard Coordinate System Dialog..................................... 245
Create Calibration Points Dialog ................................................................ 247
RMS Calibration Settings Dialog ................................................................ 251
Calibration Settings Dialog ....................................................................... 253
Specify Project Limits and Scale ................................................................ 255
Setting the Calibration Marker ..................................................................... 257
Load Calibration Points Dialog ...................................................................... 258
Point ID................................................................................................. 259
Source X and Y ....................................................................................... 259
World X and Y ........................................................................................ 259
xii
Table of Contents
Skip Rows.............................................................................................. 259

OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 259
Recalibrating an Existing Didger Project with a Tablet...................................... 260
Recalibrating when the Document has not Moved ........................................ 260
Recalibrating when the Document has Moved .............................................. 260
Large Documents ....................................................................................... 261
Calibrating Large Documents .................................................................... 261
Digitizing Large Documents ...................................................................... 261
Wintab Info ............................................................................................... 262
Project Settings - Digitizing Settings Page ..................................................... 263
Setting Puck Buttons ............................................................................... 264
Button Settings ...................................................................................... 264
Beep on Object Completion ...................................................................... 265
Stream Mode ......................................................................................... 265
Beep on Vertex Creation .......................................................................... 265
Digitizing Cursor ..................................................................................... 265
Troubleshooting Digitizing Tablets ................................................................ 266
Chapter 8 - Map Properties

Map Menu Commands ................................................................................ 277
Create Surfer Base Map .............................................................................. 277
Single Raster Base Map ........................................................................... 277
Individual Objects ................................................................................... 278
Create Surfer Grid ..................................................................................... 278
Gridding Method ..................................................................................... 278
Select Data Source ................................................................................. 279
Create Surfer Map................................................................................... 279
Gridding Options ..................................................................................... 280
Output Grid File ...................................................................................... 281
OK or Cancel .......................................................................................... 281
Gridding Methods....................................................................................... 282
xiii
Didger
Inverse Distance to a Power ..................................................................... 282

Minimum Curvature ................................................................................ 283
Nearest Neighbor .................................................................................... 283
Radial Basis Function ............................................................................... 284
Triangulation with Linear Interpolation ....................................................... 284
Coordinate Conversion................................................................................ 285
Input Data Units ..................................................................................... 285
Coordinate System.................................................................................. 286
Math Operations and Georeferencing ......................................................... 286
Math Operation ...................................................................................... 286
Georeference ......................................................................................... 286
Example 1: Offsetting Value ..................................................................... 289
Example 2: Georeferencing the Project ...................................................... 289
Project Limits ............................................................................................ 291
Specify Project Limits .............................................................................. 292
Set Limits Based Upon ............................................................................. 292
Specify Lat/Long Limits............................................................................ 293
X and Y Axis Scaling ................................................................................ 294
Map Units Per In (cm) ............................................................................. 294
Length .................................................................................................. 294
Set Proportional XY Scaling ...................................................................... 294
Preserve Project Limits During Import ........................................................ 294
Clip Map Objects During Export ................................................................. 295
OK and Cancel........................................................................................ 295
Setting the Projection ................................................................................. 295
Changing the Projection .............................................................................. 295
Graticules and Grids ................................................................................... 296
Display Lines .......................................................................................... 298
Display Units .......................................................................................... 298
Range ................................................................................................... 298
Increment ............................................................................................. 298
xiv
Table of Contents
Line Style .............................................................................................. 298

Show Ticks ............................................................................................ 299
Tick Size and Label Offset ........................................................................ 299
Label Frequency ..................................................................................... 299
Label Font ............................................................................................. 299
Show Labels........................................................................................... 299
Numeric Display Format ........................................................................... 299
Label Angle ............................................................................................ 300
Label Prefix ............................................................................................ 300
Label Suffix............................................................................................ 300
Default Values ........................................................................................ 300
OK, Cancel, and Apply ............................................................................. 301
Making Reports ......................................................................................... 301
Editing Attribute Fields ............................................................................... 301
Field Names ........................................................................................... 302
Adding Fields ......................................................................................... 302
Removing Fields ..................................................................................... 303
Loading Field Definitions .......................................................................... 303
Saving Field Definitions............................................................................ 303
Specialty Fields ...................................................................................... 303
Assigning Attributes ................................................................................... 303
Assigning Elevations ................................................................................... 305
Chapter 9 - Selecting and Arranging Objects

Edit Menu Commands ................................................................................. 307
Undo..................................................................................................... 307
Redo ..................................................................................................... 307
Cut ....................................................................................................... 307
Copy ..................................................................................................... 308
Paste .................................................................................................... 308
Delete ................................................................................................... 308
xv
Didger
Selecting Objects ....................................................................................... 309

Selecting Objects and Digitizing Tablets ..................................................... 309
Selecting Objects with the Data Manager.................................................... 309
Selecting Objects in the Plot Window ......................................................... 309
Select ................................................................................................... 310
Select All ............................................................................................... 310
Invert Selection ...................................................................................... 310
Block Select ........................................................................................... 310
Deselect All ............................................................................................ 311
Selected Object Appearance ..................................................................... 311
Arranging Objects ...................................................................................... 314
Moving an Object to Another Layer ............................................................ 316
Replicating an Object ................................................................................. 316
Aligning Objects ........................................................................................ 317
Rotating Objects ........................................................................................ 318
Chapter 10 - Changing the View

View Menu Commands................................................................................ 319
Zoom Full Extents ................................................................................... 319
Zoom In ................................................................................................ 319
Zoom Out .............................................................................................. 319
Zoom with A Wheel Mouse ....................................................................... 320
Zoom with the Keyboard .......................................................................... 320
Zoom Selected ....................................................................................... 320
Zoom Rectangle ..................................................................................... 320
Zoom Realtime ....................................................................................... 321
Pan ....................................................................................................... 321
Redraw ................................................................................................. 322
Changing the Plot Color .............................................................................. 322
Select Color Dialog .................................................................................. 322
User Interface Style ................................................................................... 323
xvi
Table of Contents
Changing the Window Layout....................................................................... 323

Visibility ................................................................................................ 323
Auto-Hiding Managers ............................................................................. 323
Size ...................................................................................................... 324
Position ................................................................................................. 324
Docking Mechanism ................................................................................ 324
Tabbed Managers ................................................................................... 325
Floating Managers ................................................................................... 326
Restoring the Managers and Windows to Their Original Locations ................... 326
Chapter 11 - Importing, Exporting, Saving, and Printing

Introduction to Importing and Exporting........................................................ 327
Importing .............................................................................................. 327
Exporting............................................................................................... 334
Create Base Map........................................................................................ 337
Single Raster Base Map ........................................................................... 337
Individual Objects ................................................................................... 338
Saving Didger Files .................................................................................... 338
Save As ................................................................................................. 338
The Save As Dialog ................................................................................. 338
Print Setup ............................................................................................... 340
Printer .................................................................................................. 340
Printer Properties .................................................................................... 340
Paper .................................................................................................... 341
Orientation ............................................................................................ 341
Print ........................................................................................................ 341
Printer .................................................................................................. 342
Printer Properties .................................................................................... 342
Print Method .......................................................................................... 342
Print Range ............................................................................................ 342
Copies................................................................................................... 342
xvii
Didger
Overlap ................................................................................................. 342

Scale .................................................................................................... 342
Chapter 12 - Options, Defaults, and Customizations

Introduction to Options and Defaults ............................................................ 345
Project Settings Dialog ............................................................................... 345
Project Settings - General Page................................................................. 345
Project Settings - Tolerance Page .............................................................. 348
Project Settings - Digitizing Settings Page .................................................. 350
Project Settings - Line Properties Page ....................................................... 352
Project Settings - Fill Properties Page......................................................... 354
Project Settings - Text Properties Page ...................................................... 356
Project Settings - Symbol Properties Page .................................................. 358
Customizing Toolbars and Menus ................................................................. 359
Customize Dialog - Menu Page .................................................................. 363
Customize Dialog - Options Page ............................................................... 364
Customize Dialog - Button Appearance Dialog ............................................. 365
Additional Customization .......................................................................... 366
Chapter 13 - Coordinate Systems and Map Projections

Introduction to Coordinate Systems .............................................................. 369
Map Coordinate System Overview ................................................................ 369
Projecting Maps in Didger............................................................................ 370
Changing the Projection ........................................................................... 370
Displaying Data with Different Coordinate Systems in a Single Project ............ 371
Assign Coordinate System Dialog ................................................................. 372
Coordinate Space Type ............................................................................ 372
Cartesian Settings................................................................................... 373
Calibration Units ..................................................................................... 373
Projection Categories .............................................................................. 373
xviii
Table of Contents
Modify Coordinate System........................................................................ 374

New Custom Coordinate System ............................................................... 374
Add to Favorites ..................................................................................... 375
Remove................................................................................................. 375
Example 1: Select a Predefined Coordinate System (i.e. UTM) ....................... 375
Example 2: Create and Select a Custom Coordinate System (i.e. Lambert
Conformal Conic) .................................................................................... 375
Example 3: Saving a Custom Coordinate System ......................................... 376
Define Coordinate System Dialog ................................................................. 376
Example 1: Defining a Custom Coordinate System ....................................... 377
Example 2: Saving a Custom Coordinate System ......................................... 378
Introduction to Map Projections.................................................................... 378
Geometric Forms of Projections................................................................. 379
Characteristics of Projections .................................................................... 381
Ellipsoids ............................................................................................... 384
Datums ................................................................................................. 385
Custom Datum Definition ......................................................................... 386
Understanding Local Datums .................................................................... 388
Types of Predefined Coordinate Systems ....................................................... 389
Geographic (lat/long) Coordinate Systems .................................................. 389
Polar/Arctic/Antarctic Projection Systems ................................................... 389
Regional/National Projection Systems ........................................................ 389
State Plane Coordinate Systems................................................................ 390
UTM Coordinate Systems ......................................................................... 390
World Projection Systems ........................................................................ 390
Templates ............................................................................................. 390
Supported Projections ................................................................................ 391
Albers Equal Area Conic Projection ............................................................ 391
Azimuthal Equidistant Projection ............................................................... 392
Bonne Projection .................................................................................... 394
Cassini Projection ................................................................................... 395
Eckert IV Projection ................................................................................ 396
xix
Didger
Eckert VI Projection ................................................................................ 397

Equidistant Conic Projection ..................................................................... 398
Equidistant Cylindrical Projection ............................................................... 400
Geographic Coordinate System ................................................................. 401
Gnomonic Projection ............................................................................... 402
Hotine Oblique Mercator Projection ............................................................ 403
Hotine Oblique Mercator 2-Point Projection ................................................. 405
Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Projection ................................................... 407
Lambert Conformal Conic Projection .......................................................... 408
Mercator Projection ................................................................................. 410
Miller Cylindrical Projection....................................................................... 411
Mollweide Projection ................................................................................ 412
New Zealand Map Grid............................................................................. 414
Oblique Mercator Projection ...................................................................... 415
Orthographic Projection ........................................................................... 416
Polyconic Projection ................................................................................ 417
Robinson and Robinson-Sterling Projections ................................................ 419
Sinusoidal Projection ............................................................................... 420
State Plane Coordinate System Projections ................................................. 421
Stereographic Projection .......................................................................... 422
Transverse Mercator Projection ................................................................. 424
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Projections ........................................ 425
Van der Grinten Projection ....................................................................... 426
Golden Software Reference Files .................................................................. 427
Latitude/Longitude Coordinates.................................................................... 428
Latitude................................................................................................. 428
Longitude .............................................................................................. 429
Latitude/Longitude in Decimal Degrees ...................................................... 429
Example ................................................................................................ 429
Using Scaling to Minimize Distortion in Latitude/Longitude Projects ................ 430
World Reference File .................................................................................. 432
xx
Table of Contents
GeoTIFF File (*.tif, *.tiff) ......................................................................... 432

Blue Marble Reference File (*.rsf).............................................................. 432
ESRI World File (*.tfw) ............................................................................ 433
ESRI Projection File (.prj)......................................................................... 433
Golden Software Reference File (.gsr2) ...................................................... 433
Projection References ................................................................................. 433
Coordinate System Frequently Asked Questions ............................................. 434
Index ....................................................................................................... 436
xxi
Didger
xxii
Chapter 1
Introducing Didger
Welcome to Didger
Didger® is a digitizing and coordinate conversion software. You can digitize maps,
aerial photographs, graphs, or any other data with Didger. When working with your
project, you can digitize onscreen with your computer's mouse, or digitize directly
from a paper copy using a digitizing tablet.
Didger provides extensive flexibility in working with your data. You can import image
files, data files, or vector files directly into Didger. Didger supports multiple layers to
help organize your project, georeferencing images, image warping (rubber sheeting),
combining georeferenced images into a new image, overlaying vector, data, and
georeferenced images on each other, easily adding graticule or grid lines to your
project, and associating many different attritubtes to each object. Didger also
includes comprehensive editing tools for creating and editing objects and images.
Data transformation and coordinate conversion capabilities, in addition to Golden

Software's comprehensive map projection library, easily permits reprojection or
recalibration of data into almost any coordinate system. You can assign or change the
projection of any imported vector map, imported image, or objects drawn on the
project page. Then, change the projection, coordinate system, or datum. Or, create
your own custom datum. Didger 5 is fully compatible with other software. It imports
and exports data, vector, and raster files in the most popular formats.
With Didger, you can easily draw objects

with a mouse or a digitizing tablet.
1
Didger
Examples of Didger Uses

The following are a few examples of ways to use Didger.
• Digitize contour maps from topographic sheets or hand drawn maps
• Obtain data from graphs, such as well logs, when you do not have the original
data
• Digitize sample locations, such as oil and gas wells, and associate it with data
• Digitize boundaries such as township and range lines or property boundaries
• Georeference aerial photographs, satellite images, or paper documents
• Warp images to show their true scaling
• Digitize points, polylines, or polygons from aerial or satellite photographs
• Digitize radiation dose calculations from patient films in the medical industry
• Map archeological sample sites from field maps
• Digitize geological information from paper maps, aerial photos, or hand-drawn
cross sections
• Digitize road and street maps to obtain route length information
• Digitize wildlife study information such as migratory areas for birds and other
animals
• Digitize vegetation boundaries, burn areas, restoration projects, and lumbering
areas
• Determine the area under a curve of a printed graph
• Resample well log data on regular intervals
• Digitize seismic section lines with shot point locations
• Create spreadsheet files for data analysis
• Create Surfer base maps in one step
• Merge vector files, georeferenced images, and data files from various data
sources into one project
What is Digitizing?
Digitizing is the process of transferring paper document information, image file
information, or data to your computer. This is accomplished with the use of a digitizing
tablet or by importing an image or vector file. Software such as Didger converts the
information from the file or paper document to digital information.
By providing the computer with the coordinates necessary to define object locations in
relation to other objects, you can create a file of object locations. Object locations are
defined by XY coordinates, such as latitude/longitude, UTM (Universal Transverse
2
Mercator), State Plane, or any type of coordinate system. In addition, with Didger you
can associate text and data with the objects that you digitize.
New Features
The following is an overview of some of Didger's new features.
User Friendly
• Install 32-bit or 64-bit version of Didger.
• Updated to a modern Windows look.
• Added the Text Editor, making font properties for individual characters
easier.
• Created a text template library, for easily inserting math equations in a text
box.
• Full Unicode integration to allow international fonts and characters in all
aspects of the program.
• Copy and paste text directly in the plot window, creating a new text object.
• Zoom in, out, pan, and zoom realtime with a mouse wheel.
• All drawing tools are now persistent by default, making it easier than ever to
create multiple items at once.
• Set the symbol line color and fill color separately.
• Use opacity for all objects.
Image Registration and Processing

• Resize the Image Registration and Warping dialog to make assigning
calibration points easier
• Set the image calibration marker to any symbol from any TrueType font
• Use the mouse wheel to zoom in, zoom out, and pan the image in the Image
Registration and Warping
• The Coordinate System section of the Image Registration and Warping
dialog has been moved to an easier to use location
• Import images from any web mapping server
Projections and Coordinate Systems

• Updated all predefined projections and coordinate systems
• Use any datum with any State Plane Coordinate System
3
Didger
• Make datum transformations using Molodensky, NADCON, or Inverse NADCON

conversions
• New Projections
• New Zealand Map Grid Projection
• Updated Hotine Oblique Mercator
• Updated Hotine Oblique Mercator 2-Point
• New Coordinate Systems
• Albany Grid 1984 (Australia)
• Albany Grid 1994 (Australia)
• Australia MGA
• Australia New South Wales ISG
• Barrow Island and Onslow Grid 1994
• Broome Grid 1984
• Broome Grid 1994
• Busselton Coastal Grid 1984
• Busselton Coastal Grid 1994
• Carnarvon Grid 1984
• Carnarvon Grid 1994
• Christmas Island Grid 1984
• Christmas Island Grid 1994
• Cocos (Keeling) Islands Grid 1992
• Cocos (Keeling) Islands Grid 1994
• Collie Grid 1994 (Australia)
• Esperance Grid 1984
• Esperance Grid 1994
• European 1950 (Portugal/Spain variant) - UTM Zone 29N
• Exmouth Grid 1984
• Exmouth Grid 1994
• Geraldton Coastal Grid 1984
• Geraldton Coastal Grid 1994
• Goldfields Grid 1984
• Goldfields Grid 1994
• Hungarian National Grid EOV
• Irish National Grid
4
• Irish Transverse Mercator (ITM)

• Italy Zone 1 Gauss-Boaga (EPSG 3003)
• Italy Zone 2 Gauss-Boaga (EPSG 3004)
• ITRF90 (Bursa-Wolf)
• Japan Plane Rectangular CS IX
• Jurien Coastal Grid 1984
• Jurien Coastal Grid 1994
• Kalbarri Grid 1994
• Karratha Grid 1984
• Karratha Grid 1994
• Kununurra Grid 1984
• Kununurra Grid 1994
• Lancelin Coastal Grid 1984
• Lancelin Coastal Grid 1994
• Margaret River Coastal Grid 1984
• Margaret River Coastal Grid 1994
• Michigan Oblique Mercator 1-point
• Michigan Oblique Mercator 2-point
• Mount Eden Circuit 2000
• Mount Eden Circuit 1949
• New Zealand Map Grid
• New Zealand Transverse Mercator 2000 (NZTM2000)
• Perth Coastal Grid 1984
• Perth Coastal Grid 1994
• Port Hedland Grid 1984
• Port Hedland Grid 1994
• Portuguese National Grid
• POSGAR 94 - Argentina
• POSGAR 98 - Argentina
• Sardinia - Gauss-Boaga
• Sicily - Gauss-Boaga
• State Plane 1983 Kentucky Single Zone
• State Plane 1983 Kentucky Single Zone (Feet)
• SVY21 / Singapore TM
5
Didger
• Sweden - SWEREF99 TM
• SWEREF99 local zones
• SWEREF99 / RT90 emulation zones
• Switzerland - CH1903+LV95
• Switzerland - CH1903 LV03
• Taiwan TWD67 and TWD97
• New Datums
• CH 1903 - Switzerland (Bursa-Wolf)
• CH 1903+ - SwitzerlandHungarian Datum 1972
• GDA94
• IRENET95
• ITRF90 (Bursa-Wolf)
• ITRF94 (WGS84)
• Japanese Geodetic Datum 2000 JGD2000 (WGS84)
• New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949 (Bursa-Wolf)
• New Zealand Geodetic Datum 2000 (NZGD2000)
• NWS-84
• Posiciones Geodesicas Argentinas 1994 (WGS84 base)
• Posiciones Geodesicas Argentinas 1998 (WGS84 base)
• Rome 1940 - Italian Peninsula
• Rome 1940 - Sardinia
• Rome 1940 - Sicily
• SVY21 (WGS84 base)pie
• Sweden - SWEREF99
Import and Export Improvements

• Import Access MDB Database and Access ACCDB 97-2003 Database
• Import and Export Adobe PDF Raster Files
• Export Adobe PDF Vector Files
• Import and Export GeoPDF format in vector PDF files
• Export Adobe PDF Raster and Vector Files with compression
• Import Arc/Info Binary Grid and Arc/Info ASCII Grid Formats
• Import AVS X-Image
6
• Import Banded Lattice Files

• Import CPS-3 Grid Format
• Improved Import of DBF Database so that all attributes are imported
• Import ESRI Float Grid Format
• Import and Export Excel XLS and XLSX Files
• Import Excel XLSM Files
• Import GLOBE DEM Files
• Import GPS GPX Exchange Format Files
• Import HDF Hierarchical Data Format
• Import and Export JPEG-2000 Bitmap Files
• Import Metamorph STK Format Files
• Import and Export Portable Anymap Bitmap Image Files
• Import Raw Binary Lattice Files
• Import RGB SGI Image Files
• Import Nasa SRTM Elevation Data Files
• Import SUN Raster Image
• Import SEG-P1 Exchange Format
• Import ZIP and USGS SDTS topological and grid files in .TAR.GZ, .TAR, .ZIP,
and .TGZ format directly without unzipping.
• Improved LAS Import so that NULL values are ignored and not imported
• Improved MIF Import
• Export Comma Separated Variables CSV Files
• Export TXT Files
• Export Google Earth KML and KMZ Files
• Export SVG Scalable Vector Graphics
• Improved exporting bitmap images so DPI and image size are independent
• Improved TIF Export, so that images are exported with compression
• Improved exporting data files to allow all attributes to be exported
System Requirements
The minimum system requirements for Didger are:
• Windows XP SP2 or higher, Vista, 7, 8 (except RT), or higher
• Minimum 1024x768 or higher monitor resolution with 16-bit color depth
7
Didger
• At least 500 MB of free disk space, 10 GB for advanced image processing

• At least 512 MB RAM above the Windows system requirements for simple data
sets, 2 GB recommended for advanced image processing
Digitizing tablets are optional hardware items that can be used with Didger.
Installation Directions
Installing Didger 5 requires logging onto the computer with an account that has
Administrator rights. Golden Software does not recommend installing Didger 5 over
any previous version of Didger. Didger 5 can coexist with older versions (i.e. Didger
4) as long as they are in different directories. By default, the program directories are
different. For detailed installation directions, refer to the Readme.rtf file.
To install Didger from a CD:

1. Insert the Didger CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program
automatically begins on most computers. If the installation does not begin
automatically, double-click on the Autorun.exe file located on the Didger CD.
2. Choose Install Didger from the Didger Auto Setup dialog to begin the
installation.
To install Didger from a download:

1. Download Didger according to the emailed directions you received.
2. Double-click on the downloaded file to begin the installation process.
Updating Didger
To update Didger, open the program and click the Help | Check for Update
command. The Internet Update program will check Golden Software’s servers for any
free updates. If there is an update for your version of Didger (i.e. Didger 5.0 to
Didger 5.1), you will be prompted to download the update.
Uninstalling Didger
Windows XP: To uninstall Didger, go to the Windows Control Panel and double-click
Add/Remove Programs. Select Didger 5 from the list of installed applications. Click
the Remove button to uninstall Didger 5.
8
Windows Vista: To uninstall Didger when using the Regular Control Panel Home,
click the Uninstall a program link. Select Didger 5 from the list of installed
applications. Click the Uninstall button to uninstall Didger 5.
To uninstall Didger when using the Classic View Control Panel, double-click Programs
and Features. Select Didger 5 from the list of installed applications. Click the Uninstall
button to uninstall Didger 5.
Windows 7: To uninstall Didger, go to the Windows Control Panel and click the
Uninstall a program link. Select Didger 5 from the list of installed applications. Click
the Uninstall button to uninstall Didger 5.
Windows 8: From the Start screen, right-click the Didger 5 tile and click the
Uninstall button at the bottom of the screen. Alternatively, right-click anywhere on the
Start screen and click All apps at the bottom of the screen. Right-click the Didger 5
tile and click Uninstall at the bottom of the screen.
A Note about the Documentation

The Didger documentation includes the online help and the quick start guide. Use the
Help | Contents command in the program to access the detailed online help.
Information about each command and feature in Didger is included in the online help.
In the event the information cannot be located in the online help, other sources of
Didger help include our support forum, FAQs, knowledge base, and contacting our
technical support engineers.
Various font styles are used throughout the Didger documentation. Bold text
indicates menu commands, dialog names, and page names. Italic text indicates items
within a dialog such as group names, options, and field names. For example, the Save
As dialog contains a Save as type list. Bold and italic text occasionally may be used for
emphasis.
In addition, menu commands appear as File | Open. This means, "click on the File
menu at the top of the document, then click on the Open command within the File
menu list." The first word is always the menu name, followed by the commands within
the menu list.
9
Didger
Three-Minute Tour
We have included several example files with Didger so that you can quickly see some
of Didger’s capabilities. Only a few example files are discussed here, and these
examples do not include all of Didger’s many features. The Layer Manager and
Data Manager are a good source of information as to what is included in each file.
Sample Didger Files

To view the sample Didger files:
1. Open Didger.
2. Click the File | Open command.
3. Click on the .PJT file located in the Samples
directory. By default, the Didger Samples directory
is located in C:\Program Files\Golden
Software\Didger 5\Samples.
4. Click Open and the file opens.
5. Click on the various objects in the .PJT file. View the
object properties in the Property Manager.
The Golden.PJT file
contains an image layer
and an SDTS Layer that
Golden.PJT contains roads around the
The Golden.PJT sample file contains a background image Golden area.
of the Golden, CO surrounding area and several lines
and polygons representing the roads in and around the
Golden, Colorado area. The image is georeferenced in
NAD83 UTM Zone 13N. The projection of the entire
project, including the image, can be changed by using
the Map | Change Projection command.
USGS DRG Contour Extraction.PJT

The USGS DRG Contour Extraction.PJT sample file
contains an image of contours from a USGS DRG file.
Using the Image | Vectorize Image command, the contours
can be automatically digitized. The contour values can The USGS DRG Contour
be assigned with the Map | Data | Assign Elevations Extraction.PJT file contains
a georeferenced image
command. The digitized lines can then be exported to a
that can be vectorized.
data or vector file for use in other programs.
10
Using Didger
Didger can be used for a variety of purposes, but is primarily used to convert images
to digitized data. The general steps to progress from an image to a data file are as
follows:
1. Open Didger.
2. Click the File | Import command to import an existing image or the Image |
Download Online Maps command to search for an image on a web server.
3. Once the image is imported, use the Image | Vectorize Image command to
automatically convert the image to a series of lines and points.
4. Click the commands under the Draw menu to draw lines, polygons, text, and
symbols on the image.
5. Once all of the information appears as lines, polygons, text, and symbols, the
image can be deleted.
6. The digitized polylines and polygons can be refined with the Draw | Edit
Boundaries commands, if necessary.
7. When the digitized information is correct, click the File | Export command to
export to a variety of formats, including .DXF, .DAT, .SHP, .XLSX, or .KML for use
in other programs.
Getting Base Information into Didger

There are several ways to get base information into Didger, depending on the type of
information you have and the type of hardware you own. Base information can include
paper reference maps, paper graphs, images, vector files (such as .DXF), an aerial
photograph, a Mylar map, data files, etc.
Paper Documents
If you have a paper document, such as a field map or a well log, you can digitize this
information with a digitizing tablet. If you scan a paper document into other software
to create an image, import the image into Didger using the File | Import command.
Image Files
If you have an image file, such as a .TIF or .BMP, you can import it into Didger with
the File | Import command. The image file can be imported into Didger whether it is
georeferenced or not. If the file does not have georeferencing information, you can
assign the georeferencing information to it when you import the file.
11
Didger
Data Files
If you have a data file containing XY coordinates and additional information such as
IDs, elevation, etc. you can import the file into Didger with the File | Import
command.
Vector Files
If you have a vector file, such as a .DXF or .SHP, the file can be imported into Didger
with the File | Import command.
Tablets vs. Scanners

To accurately digitize points from a paper source document, you need a digitizing
tablet. If you do not have a tablet, you can use a scanner and import an image into
Didger instead.
What is a Digitizing Tablet?

A digitizing tablet consists of a flat drawing area and a pointing device that can be
either a mouse-type pointer (puck) or a pen-type pointer (stylus). Tablets use a high-
resolution internal coordinate system over which you place your paper document. You
position the pointer on the paper document and digitize information directly. When you
click the pointer, Didger converts the coordinates from tablet coordinates to project
coordinates. In this way, you can obtain a precise and accurate representation of your
data on the computer.
There are 32-bit and 64-bit WINTAB drivers available for most digitizing tablets. If you
do not have a driver for your tablet, contact the tablet manufacturer to see if they
have the drivers available. Tablet and driver installation can vary depending on the
manufacturer and model of your tablet. Refer to the users guide for your tablet to
determine the correct installation procedures. The bit version (32-bit or 64-bit) of your
tablet must match the bit version of Didger. If you have a 64-bit version of Didger,
you must have a 64-bit version of the tablet driver for the tablet to communicate
effectively with Didger.
The advantage to using a tablet is that large paper documents are easier to
manipulate on large tablets. Tablets also require less memory than large images.
Scanners
A scanner converts a paper document into an image. Once the image is imported into
Didger, you can calibrate it and then you can digitize information using your
computer's mouse. Scanners use their own software to scan the document into an
12
image file. The advantage of using a scanner over a tablet is that once the image is
scanned, the external hardware is no longer needed to digitize the information off the
paper document.
Didger User Interface

Didger contains a single plot document window. Images and drawn objects are
imported, referenced, displayed, and edited in the plot document.
This is the Didger plot window with the Layer Manager, Coordinate Manager,
and Property Manager on the left and the Data Manager on the bottom.
13
Didger
Didger Layout
The following table summarizes the function of each component of the Didger layout.
Component
Component Function
Name
The title bar lists the program icon, program name, and the saved
Title Bar Didger file name, if any. An asterisk (*) after the file name
indicates the file has been modified since it was last saved.
Menu Bar The menu bar contains the commands used to run Didger.
The toolbars contain Didger tool buttons, which are shortcuts to
menu commands. Move the cursor over each button to display a
Toolbars tool tip describing the command. Toolbars can be customized with
the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command. Toolbars
can be docked or floating.
The plot window contains the images and drawn objects in the
Plot Window
current project.
The status bar shows information about the activity in Didger. The
status bar is divided into four sections. The left section displays the
number of selected objects or a brief description of menu
Status Bar
commands under the cursor. The second section shows the cursor
coordinates. The third section displays the current layer name. The
last section contains the projection information.
The Layer Manager controls all aspects of layers, such as the
Layer Manager addition and removal of layers. The Layer Manager is initially
docked on the left side above the Property Manager.
The Property Manager allows you to edit any of the properties of

Property Manager
a selected object.
The Coordinate Manager contains the vertex coordinates of a

Coordinate
selected object. The project’s Display Units are set in the
Manager
Coordinate Manager.
The Data Manager displays information about the objects in the
Data Manager current project such as object type, visibility, IDs, attributes, layer,
point count, perimeter length, area, and polygon direction.
14
Opening Windows
Selecting the File | Open command opens any Didger project file. The File | New
command creates a new plot window.
Toolbars
The Didger project window includes toolbars that contain buttons for many of the
common commands. The toolbars are initially docked, but they can be dragged and
placed anywhere on the screen.
Show or Hide Toolbars

Use the View | Toolbars/Managers command to show or hide the Standard, View,
Drawing, Image, Arrange, and Boundary Tools toolbars. A check mark is displayed
next to visible toolbars. To show a toolbar, click on the toolbar name to place a check
mark next to the toolbar and make the toolbar visible. Uncheck the toolbar to hide it.
Tool Tip Display of Button Function

Hold the cursor over any tool button on the toolbar to display the function of the
button. Tool tips cannot be customized.
If tool tips do not display, click the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize

command. Click on the Options tab. Check the box next to Show ScreenTips on
toolbars. Click OK.
Customize Toolbars
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command to open the
Customize dialog and customize toolbars, menus, and keyboard shortcuts.
Toolbar Positions
Didger toolbars can be docked to any side of the window or they can be displayed as
a floating window. To dock the toolbar in a new location, click the "grip" bar along the
edge of the toolbar, hold the left mouse button, and then drag the toolbar to a new
location. Drag the toolbar away from a window edge or hold down the CTRL key while
dragging to display the toolbar as a floating window. Alternatively, you can double-
click the toolbar to display it as a floating window. To quickly dock a floating toolbar,
double-click on the title bar. Hold the pointer over any button on the toolbar to display
the function of the button.
15
Didger
Types of Toolbars
Menu Bar
The Menu toolbar displays the Didger Menu commands.
Use the Menu Bar toolbar to see menu commands like File | Save.
Standard
The Standard toolbar displays commonly used File and Edit menu commands.
The Standard toolbar has buttons for many of

the File and Edit menu commands.
View
The View toolbar displays commonly used View menu commands.
The View toolbar has buttons for changing the zoom level,
changing the projection, and adding a grid or graticule to the map.
Arrange
The Arrange toolbar displays commonly used Arrange menu commands.
The Arrange toolbar has buttons for many of the Arrange menu commands.
Drawing
The Drawing toolbar displays commonly used Draw menu commands.
The Drawing toolbar has buttons

for the Draw menu commands.
16
Image
The Image toolbar displays commonly used Image menu commands.
The Image toolbar contains buttons to

vectorize, download, register, or convert images.
Boundary Tools
The Boundary Tools toolbar contains commands to edit objects in Didger.
The Boundary Tools toolbar contains commands to

edit lines, polygons, and other objects in Didger.
Custom
You can create custom toolbars using the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize
command. You can specify a custom toolbar name and add any command that you
commonly use to your custom toolbar.
Custom toolbars can be created for frequently

used menu commands with the
View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command.
Status Bar
Click View | Status Bar command to show or hide the status bar. A check mark next
to Status Bar indicates that the status bar is displayed. The status bar displays
information about the current command or activity in Didger.
Status Bar Sections

The status bar is divided into four sections.
17
Didger
The left section displays the number of selected objects or a brief description of menu
commands under the cursor. The second section shows the cursor coordinates. The
third section displays the current layer name. The right section contains the projection
information for the project.
Changing the Display Units in the Status Bar

The status bar displays the X and Y coordinates of the project. You can change the
display units (not the stored project coordinates) by clicking View |
Toolbars/Managers | Coordinate Manager and select from the Display Units list.
For example, you can change a project's display units from latitude/longitude to feet.
Change Plot Color

Click the View | Change Plot Color command to open the Select Color dialog. In
the dialog, change the background plot window color. The background is the area
behind all objects in the plot. The background is not exported and is for display only.
The default color is white.
In the Select Color dialog, set the color for the plot window background and click OK.
Set the background Color

in the Select Color dialog.
Changing the Window Layout

The windows, toolbars, managers, and menu bar display in a docked view by default;
however, they can also be displayed as floating windows. The visibility, size, and
position of each item may also be changed.
Visibility
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers commands to toggle the display of the
toolbars. Alternatively, use the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command
to open the Customize dialog. The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog displays
18
all of the toolbars. A check mark indicates the toolbar is currently visible. Reset
toolbars with the Customize dialog.
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers commands to toggle the display of the Layer
Manager, Coordinate Manager, Property Manager, and Data Manager.
Alternatively, you can click the button in the title bar of the Layer Manager,
Coordinate Manager, Property Manager, or Data Manager to close the manager
window. The Property Manager can also be opened by double-clicking on an object.
Auto-Hiding Managers
Click the button to hide a docked manager. The manager slides to the side or
bottom of the main Didger window and a tab appears with the window name.
The Layer Manager appears

as a tab on the side of the window.
Position the mouse pointer over the tab to view the manager. Move your mouse away
from the manager and the manager "hides" again. You can also click inside the
manager to anchor it at its current position. Click in another manager to release the
anchor and hide the manager. Click the button to disable the auto-hide feature.
Size
Drag the sides of floating plot window, manager, toolbar, or menu bar to change its
size. If a manager is docked, its upper and lower bounds are indicated by a or
cursor. Move the cursor to change the size.
Position
To change the position of a docked manager, click the title bar and drag it to a new
location. The entire manager appears in the location it will be displayed when the
manager is floating. To dock the manager, use the docking mechanism. You can also
double-click the manager's title bar to toggle between floating and docked modes. A
tabbed manager view is also an option.
19
Didger
Docking Mechanism
Left-click the title bar of a manager and drag it to a new location while holding the left
mouse button. The docking mechanism displays with arrow indicators as you move the
manager.
The docking indicator

can lock the location of
the manager windows.
When the cursor touches one of the docking indicators in the docking mechanism, a
blue rectangle shows the window docking position. Release the left mouse button to
allow the manager to be docked in the specified location.
This image displays the Property Manager being

docked to the right side of the Didger window.
20
Tabbed Managers
To create tabbed managers:
1. Drag one manager on top of another window.
2. Hover over the center section of the docking mechanism. The blue area shows
where the tabbed manager will display.
3. Release the mouse button.
To return to individual managers from the tabbed view:

1. Click on the manager's name on the tab.
2. Drag the tab to a new position.
Click on a manager's tab and drag it to a

new position to separate the managers.
Floating Managers
The toolbars and menu bar can also be moved or displayed in floating windows.
To dock the toolbar or menu bar in a new location, click the "grip" bar along the
toolbar or menu bar edge, hold the left mouse button, and then drag the toolbar or
menu bar to a new location. Drag the toolbar or menu bar away from the window edge
to display the toolbar as a floating window. Double-click the manager title bar to
switch between floating and docked.
Restoring the Managers and Windows to Their Original Locations

If the managers have moved or become invisible, or if they are in undesired locations,
click the View | Reset Windows command to move the managers and windows back
to the original locations. Note that you must restart Didger for the changes to take
effect.
21
Didger
Layer Manager
The Layer Manager contains information on plot layers. Layers can be selected,
replicated, arranged, added, deleted, activated, renamed, made visible/invisible, made
editable/uneditable, and locked/unlocked in the Layer Manager. Changes made in
the Layer Manager are reflected in the plot window. The layer each object exists on
is listed in the Data Manager.
The Layer Manager contains a list of

all of the layers in the document.
Show or Hide Manager

Use the View | Toolbars/Managers command to show or hide the Layer Manager.
A check mark is displayed next to visible managers. To show a manager, click on the
manager name to place a check mark next to the manager and make the manager
visible. Uncheck the manager to hide it.
Adding a Layer
To add a layer, right-click in the Layer Manager and select Add Layer or click the
button on the Layer Manager toolbar.
Deleting a Layer
To delete a layer, right-click on the layer and select Delete Layer or click the button
on the Layer Manager toolbar. A project must contain at least one layer. If the last
layer is deleted, a warning message appears. Click OK and the layer will remain.
22
Changing the Active Layer

To set the active layer, click the button next to the layer name or click the layer
name. The active layer is displayed with a red triangle next to the layer name. The
layer order does not matter when making a layer active as the top, bottom, or any
layer in the middle of the layer list can be active. You can use the ARROW keys on
your keyboard to move between layers but this does not make the layer active.
Renaming a Layer
To change the name associated with a layer, right-click on the layer and select the
Rename Layer command or click the button on the Layer Manager toolbar.
Duplicating a Layer
To make a copy of an entire layer, right-click on the layer and select Replicate Layer or
click the button on the Layer Manager toolbar. A new layer is created with all of
the objects and properties of the original layer. The new layer is named Copy of and
the original layer name.
Selecting All Items on a Layer

To select all objects on a layer, right-click on the layer and select Select All Items on
Layer or click the button on the Layer Manager toolbar.
Showing or Hiding a Layer
All layers have a light bulb button to indicate if the layer is visible. The yellow light
bulb indicates that the layer is visible. The gray light bulb indicates the layer is not
visible. To change the visible status of a layer, click on the light bulb. Invisible layers
do not appear in the plot window and do not appear on printed output.
Locking and Unlocking a Layer

An editable layer is indicated by an open lock to the right of the visibility light
bulb. You may need to resize the window if you cannot see the lock. If you do not
want the objects on the layer to be editable, click on the open lock. The lock changes
to a closed lock , indicating that the objects on that layer can no longer be edited.
You can add objects to an uneditable layer, but you cannot select, delete, or change
properties of objects on an uneditable layer. To unlock a locked layer, click on the
closed lock icon next to the layer name.
23
Didger
Formatting Objects on the Active Layer

To format active layer objects, right-click on the layer and select Format Active Layer
Objects or click the button on the Layer Manager toolbar. The Layer Formatter
dialog is displayed, allowing object properties, such as line or fill style, to be changed
for objects that share a common attribute, such as keyword name.
Arranging Layers
To change the display order of the layers with the mouse, click on a layer name to
select it and drag it to a new position in the list above or below a layer. Release the
mouse button and the layer moves to the desired location.
Introduction to Layers
Layers partition a project into one or more overlays.
Layers are like transparencies in that you can see
all layers at the same time, but they let you isolate
objects by placing them on separate layers. Layers
are created and manipulated using Layer
Manager.
Tips on Using Layers

You can accomplish several things when you use
layers in Didger. There are a few tips and tricks we
can share that might help you use layers.
This project is divided into
• Use "NONE" for the fill pattern on polygons in three layers, Base Map,
top layers. Otherwise, objects on lower layers Reference Lines, and
can be obscured. Contours. The layers can be
made invisible or uneditable
• Use layer names to easily keep track of what to aid in the editing process.
you have included on each layer.
• Use layers to isolate different types of objects. It is easier to select and modify
objects when you do not have too many objects on a single layer.
• Make a layer uneditable when you are not working with it to avoid accidentally
selecting, moving, or editing objects.
• Show various approaches to your project by creating several layers and
making some visible and invisible.
24
Data Manager
The View | Toolbars/Managers | Data Manager command displays information
about the objects in the current project such as row number, object type,visibility, IDs
layer, point count, perimeter length, area, and polygon direction.

Use the View | Toolbars/Managers command to show or hide the Data Manager.
A check mark is displayed next to visible managers. To show a manager, click on the
manager name to place a check mark next to the manager and make the manager
visible. Uncheck the manager to hide it.
Data Manager Contents

The Data Manager contains various information about the objects. The table below
lists the columns and the information contained in each column.
Object This column displays the object type polygons, polylines,

Type
symbols, text, post maps, and images as an icon. To the left
of the object type icon, the on or off icons display the visibility of
the object types. Visibility can also be changed through the Property
Manager.
Primary This column displays the Primary ID for an object. See Editing IDs section
on the next page.
Secondary This column displays the Secondary ID for an object. See Editing IDs
section on the next page.
Tertiary This column displays the Third ID for an object. See Editing IDs section on
the next page.
Quaternary This column displays the Fourth ID for an object. See Editing IDs section
on the next page.
Layer This column displays the layer on which the object exists. You can also
move objects to other layers through the Property Manager.
Point This column displays the number of vertices in a polygon or polyline.
Count
Length This column displays the length of a polyline or the perimeter length of a
polygon. The units of the length measurement are set during calibration
or in Tools | Project Settings on the General tab. The units are listed
next to Length in the header.
25
Didger
Area This column displays the area of a polygon. The units of the area
calculation are set during calibration or in Tools | Project Settings on
the General tab. Area is not reported when the project is in the
Unprojected Lat/Long projection. The units are listed next to Area in the
header.
Direction This column displays the direction of the polygon vertices. Reverse is
counterclockwise and Forward is clockwise. Polygon direction can be
reversed with Draw | Reverse Direction.
Editing IDs
To edit or add an ID, click in that cell with the mouse, or use the arrow keys on the
keyboard to navigate through the Data Manager and type the new information into
the cell.
Adding IDs
To add an ID column to the Data Manager, use the Map | Data | Edit Attributes
Fields command.
Selecting Objects
To select an object, click anywhere in that object's row in the Data Manager. If you
select an object in the Data Manager, it is also selected in the plot window, and vice
versa.
You can use CTRL+click to select multiple objects and SHIFT+click to select multiple
contiguous objects.
Property Manager
The Property Manager allows you to edit the properties of a selected object. The
Property Manager contains a list of all properties of the selected object. The
Property Manager can be left open so that the properties of the selected object are
always visible.
When the Property Manager is hidden or closed, double-clicking on an object opens

the Property Manager with the properties for the selected object displayed.
For information on a specific feature or property that is shown in the Property

Manager, refer to the help page for that feature. For instance, if you are interested in
26
determining how to set the fill opacity for a rectangle or how to assign a primary ID to
an object, refer to the specific pages for fill properties or data attributes.

Use the View | Toolbars/Managers command to show or hide the Property
Manager. A check mark is displayed next to visible managers. To show a manager,
click on the manager name to place a checkmark next to the manager and make the
manager visible. Uncheck the manager to hide it.
This is an example of polygon properties

displayed in the Property Manager.
Expand and Collapse Features

Features with multiple options appear with a plus (+) or minus (-) to the left of the
name. To expand a group, click on the icon. To collapse the group, click on the
icon. For example, the expanded Fill Properties section contains several options,
including Pattern.
Object Properties
The Property Manager is divided into property sections based on the object type. For
example, if the object type is a polygon, Polygon Item Properties, Data
Attributes, Line Properties, Fill Properties and Label Properties are the names
displayed for each section.
27
Didger
Changing Properties
The Property Manager displays the properties for selected objects. To change a
property, click the property's value and select a new property from the popup box,
scroll to a new number using the buttons, select a new value from a list or palette,
or type a property value. The property access depends on the property type. For
example, a selected polyline would use line properties and has Style, Color, Width,
Opacity, Start Style, End Style, and Scale properties. Changing the Color requires
clicking the current color and selecting a new color from the color palette. Changing
the Width requires typing a new number or scrolling to a new number and then
pressing ENTER on your keyboard or clicking somewhere in the Property Manager to
make the change permanent.
Occasionally, properties are dependent on other selections. For example, in the fill
properties there is a Scale option. This option is disabled (grayed out) unless you have
selected a vector or picture fill type as the Pattern.
Note: if multiple objects are selected, only features common to all objects appear in
the Property Manager.
Applying Property Changes

Didger makes changes instantaneously to some object properties like Color and Style,
while input fields like Primary ID or Width require pressing ENTER on your keyboard or
clicking somewhere else in the Property Manager to make a change. Click the ESC
key while a field is still active to cancel a change.
Keyboard Commands
When working with the Property Manager, the up and down ARROW keys move up
and down in the Property Manager list. The ENTER key activates the highlighted
property. The right arrow key expands collapsed sections (i.e. Fill Properties) and
the left arrow collapses the section.
Property Defaults
Use the Tools | Project Settings command to change the default settings. Default
settings for line, fill, text, and symbols controlling each object type can be set from the
Project Settings dialog.
28
Coordinate Manager
The Coordinate Manager contains the vertex coordinates of selected objects.

Use the View | Toolbars/Managers command to show or hide the Coordinate
Manager. A check mark is displayed next to visible managers. To show a manager,
click on the manager name to place a checkmark next to the manager and make the
manager visible. Uncheck the manager to hide it.
Viewing Coordinates
To view an object's coordinates, select a single object. The coordinates appear in the
selected Display Units or in Cartesian units, if no projection is defined. When a
coordinate pair is clicked on in the Coordinate Manager, the vertex is highlighted as
a black hatched square in the plot window. If you have more than one object selected,
no coordinates are displayed in the Coordinate Manager.
Changing the Display Units in the Coordinate Manager

The Display Units control the coordinate units seen in the status bar, the Coordinate
Manager, and when you export your file to any georeferenced file type. You can
change the display units of the project to a number of choices such as, centimeters,
inches, feet, miles, yards, kilometers, etc.
Modifying an Object's Coordinates

You can edit a selected object's coordinates in a project by double-clicking the cell of
the X or Y field for the coordinate, type the new number, and press ENTER on the
keyboard. The vertex or point moves automatically to the new location in the plot
window.
Getting Didger Help

Within Didger, the online help file is opened by clicking the Help | Contents or Help
| Tutorial command. Alternatively, press F1 at anytime to open the help. You can
navigate help using the Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites pages in the
navigation pane to the left of the topic page.
• The Contents page allows you to search the predefined table of contents. The
table of contents has a variety of help books and help topic pages.
• The Index page allows you to search index words to find a help topic. If you
do not find a topic with an index word, try a search on the Search page.
29
Didger
• The Search page offers advanced search options including phrases, wildcards,
boolean, and nested searching.
• The Favorites page allows you add help pages to a custom list. This allows
you to quickly find favorite help topics that you reference frequently.
Navigating the Help

The navigation pane shows the Contents, Index, Search, and Favorites pages. The
navigation page is displayed by default. The navigation pane can be displayed by
clicking the button and hidden by clicking the button.
Obtaining Information on Dialogs and Commands

To obtain information about dialogs or highlighted commands:
• Press F1 at anytime to open help.
• Click the button in dialogs to open the help topic pertaining to that dialog.
• Find out the function of highlighted menu commands or open dialogs by
pressing F1.
• Click the button, or press SHIFT+F1 on your keyboard, then click a

menu command, toolbar button, or screen region to view information
regarding that item.
Internet Help Resources

There are several Internet help resources.
• Click the button or the button at the top of the online

help to post a question on the forum or search the knowledge base.
• Use the Help | Feedback commands to send a problem report, suggestion, or
information request by email.
• Search our website at www.GoldenSoftware.com or use the Help | Golden
Software on the Web commands for additional help, including the Golden
Software Home Page, Didger Product Page, Frequently Asked Questions, and
the Knowledge Base.
• The Golden Software website has a variety of resources including training
videos, a support forum, a newsletter, a user image gallery, and a variety of
downloads.
30
Complete the Didger Tutorial

The Didger tutorial is a great way to get started in Didger. Tutorial lessons will teach
you how to calibrate a tablet, calibrate an image, digitize points and polylines, save
and export your projects, convert coordinates to another coordinate system, download
online images, and use the automatic vectorization on images. If you are using the
demo version of Didger, you will not be able to complete some of the tutorial steps
that require saving or exporting. The demo version is a fully functional read-only
version of the program. When this is a factor it is noted in the text and you are
directed to proceed to the next step that can be accomplished with the demo.
Technical Support
Golden Software’s technical support is free to registered users of our products. Our
technical support staff is trained to help you find answers to your questions quickly
and accurately. We are happy to answer any of your questions about any of our
products, both before and after your purchase. We also welcome suggestions for
improvements to our software and encourage you to contact us with any ideas you
may have for adding new features and capabilities to our programs. To allow us to
support all customers equitably, an individual user’s daily support time may be limited.
Technical support is available Monday through Friday 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Mountain

Time, excluding major United States holidays. We respond to email and fax technical
questions within one business day. When contacting us with your question please have
the following information available:
• Your Didger serial number, found in the Help | About Didger dialog, on the
CD cover, or in the email received with the download directions
• Your Didger version number, found in the Help | About Didger dialog
• The operating system you are using (Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, or higher)
• The steps taken prior to experiencing the issue
• The exact wording of the first error message (if any) that appeared
If you cannot find the answer to your question in the online help, the frequently asked
questions, the knowledge base, or in the support forums, please do not hesitate to
contact us.
31
Didger
Register Serial Number

Your Didger serial number is located on the CD cover or in the email received with the
download directions. You may also access your serial number at any time by clicking
the Help | About Didger command in the Didger program.
Please remember to register your serial number by filling out the registration form
online. Registering your serial number entitles you to free technical support,
announcements, and Didger upgrade pricing. Our database is confidential so we do
not share it with third parties. Please take a minute to register your copy of Didger
with us.
Suggestions
We welcome suggestions for improvements to our software and encourage you to
contact us with any ideas you may have for adding new features and capabilities to
our programs. If you have a suggestion you would like to share with us, please send it
to us by clicking Help | Feedback | Suggestions.
Golden Software Contact Information

The Golden Software mailing address, sales phone number, and technical support
phone number are listed by clicking the Help | About command. You can also use the
Help | Feedback command to contact technical support.
Email: DidgerSupport@GoldenSoftware.com
Web: www.GoldenSoftware.com
Phone: 303-279-1021
Fax: 303-279-0909
Mail: Golden Software, Inc., 809 14th Street, Golden, Colorado, 80401-1866, USA
32
Chapter 2
Tutorial
This tutorial is designed to introduce you to some of Didger's features. After you have
completed the tutorial, you should be able to begin to use Didger with your own data,
creating and editing your own objects, and importing vector and image files. We
strongly encourage completion of the tutorial before proceeding with Didger. The
lessons should be completed in order; however, they do not need to be completed in
one session. The tutorial should take approximately one hour to complete.
Tutorial Overview
The following is an overview of lessons included in the tutorial.
• Starting Didger shows you how to begin a new Didger session and open a new
plot window.
• Lesson 1 - Tablet Calibration calibrates a map on a digitizing tablet.
• Lesson 2 - Image Calibration calibrates a map that is imported from an image
file.
• Lesson 3 - Creating and Editing Objects draws and edits various drawing
objects.
• Lesson 4 - Converting Coordinates demonstrates how to convert all
coordinates in a project at once.
• Lesson 5 - Assigning and Changing the Projection assigns a map projection to
a project and changes the coordinate system.
• Lesson 6 - Downloading Online Maps steps through downloading a map fro a
web map server.
• Lesson 7 - Vectorizing an Image opens an existing file that contains an image
and automatically converts the image to polylines.
• Advanced Tutorial Lesson 8 - Saving and Exporting Data shows how to save
your Didger project and export data for use in other programs.
• Advanced Tutorial Lesson 9 - Digitizing Objects with Shared Borders shows
how to draw polylines and use a single polyline for multiple polygons.
The lessons should be completed in order; however, they do not need to be completed
in one session.
33
Didger
A Note About the Documentation

Various font styles are used throughout the Didger quick start guide and online help.
Bold text indicates menu commands, dialog names, and page names. Italic text
indicates items within a dialog such as group box names, options, and field names. For
example, the Import dialog contains a Look in list. Bold and italic text may
occasionally be used for emphasis.
Also, menu commands appear as Draw | Text. This means, "click on the Draw menu
at the top of the plot window and then click on Text within the Draw menu list." The
first word is always the menu name, followed by the commands within the menu list.
Using the Tutorial with the Demo Version

If you are using the demo version of Didger, you will not be able to complete some of
the steps due to disabled features. When this is a factor it is noted in the text and you
are directed to proceed to the next step that can be accomplished with the demo.
Starting Didger
To begin a Didger session:
1. Navigate to the installation folder, which is C:\Program Files\Golden
Software\Didger 5 by default.
2. Double-click on the Didger.exe application file.
3. A new empty project is created with an empty plot window.
If this is the first time that you have opened Didger, you will be prompted for your
serial number. Your serial number is located on the CD cover or in the email received
with the download directions, depending on how you purchased Didger. You may also
access your serial number at any time by clicking Help | About Didger in the Didger
window.
If you have already been working with Didger, open a new plot window by clicking
File | New or click the button. You are prompted to save changes to your
existing work before the new plot window opens.
34
Lesson 1 - Tablet Calibration

If you own a digitizing tablet, it can be used to transform paper documents into digital
documents. A tablet is calibrated to create a relationship between the tablet
coordinates and your project coordinates. The first step in calibration is selecting
between three and 255 calibration points and determining the map XY coordinates for
these calibration points. The calibration points cannot fall into a straight line and
should be spread out around the document as much as possible. Four calibration
points are selected on the tutorial map and labeled CP1 through CP4.
If you do not have a digitizing tablet, go to Lesson 2 - Image Calibration.
Opening and Printing the Tutorial Map

To print the tutorial map for tablet calibration and digitizing:
1. Click the File | Import command or click the button.

2. In the Import dialog, browse to the Samples directory. By default, this is
c:\Program Files\Golden Software\Didger 5\Samples. Click on the Tutorial
Map.jpg and click Open.
3. In the Image Registration and Warping dialog, click the Un-referenced button
near the bottom right corner to import the map in an unreferenced format.
4. Click the File | Print command or click the button.

5. In the Print dialog, select Fit to Page as the Print Method and click OK.
6. After the map is printed, click the File | New command or click the button to
open a new plot window.
7. Click No when asked if you want to save changes to the plot.
35
Didger
The tutorial map can be printed for tablet calibration and digitizing.
Calibrating a Digitizing Tablet

Didger uses a series of dialogs to guide you through the tablet calibration process.
Before beginning, place the tutorial map on your digitizing tablet so that it cannot
easily be moved. Locate the four calibration points , labeled CP1 through CP4. To
begin, click the Draw | Tablet | Tablet Calibration command. The calibration
process begins with the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog.
Tablet Calibration Wizard Coordinate System Settings

The Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog is used to set up the coordinates, axes, and
projection of the printed map. The settings in this dialog must match the original
document settings.
To set the initial coordinate system settings:

1. In the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog, verify that Cartesian Coordinate
System is listed in the Coordinate System Details section since we are not using
projections in the tutorial.
2. The X Axis Type and Y Axis Type should both be set to Linear. If they are not, click
the Coordinate System button and select the proper settings in the Assign
Coordinate System dialog.
3. Click Next to open the Create Calibration Points dialog.
36
Set the Coordinate System in the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog.
Create Calibration Points

The Create Calibration Points dialog is used to enter the coordinates for the
calibration points.
To create the calibration points:

1. With the mouse, click in the Point ID column in row one and type CP1; the ID for
the first calibration point.
2. Click in the World X cell with the mouse. Enter the X coordinate for CP1 (1200).
3. Click in the World Y cell and enter the Y coordinate for CP1 (4000).
4. Move your puck on the tablet to the CP1 location (cross) in the lower left corner of
the map. Click your digitizing button on the puck to enter the Tablet X and Tablet
Y coordinates into the calibration table. Try to be as precise as possible when
clicking on the calibration points as your resulting data are only as good as your
calibration.
5. Click the Add Point button in the Create Calibration Points dialog.
6. Repeat these steps until you have entered all four calibration points and
coordinates. You should see four black + symbols in the graphic in the lower right
corner of the dialog when you have clicked on all four calibration points. Each
point has a number beside it, indicating the row in the calibration table. If you
make a mistake, you can click the row number and then redigitize the point.
37
Didger
Point ID World X World Y

CP1 1200 4000
CP2 8500 14500
CP3 16300 7100
CP4 19600 12600
The calibration points should look like these table values.
7. Once you are satisfied with the calibration points, click Next to open the RMS
Calibration Settings dialog.
The Create Calibration Points dialog contains the X, Y values you input in the
World X and World Y columns and the values you click on in the Tablet X and Tablet Y columns.
RMS Calibration Settings

The RMS Calibration Settings dialog provides you with information about each
calibration point and the RMS error value calculated for your calibration points. The
coordinate positions of the points in the digitizer's grid referencing system are
determined when you digitize calibration points. Didger uses the selected
Georeference Method to compute the error between the tablet coordinates and the
digitized coordinates. This allows Didger to orient and scale the project.
38
For the tutorial example, the RMS value is not critical, but you might want to watch
this value closely when you are working on an actual project. For further information
on RMS errors, refer to the RMS Calibration Settings topic and the online help book,
RMS Error.
To select the georeference method:

1. In the RMS Calibration Settings dialog, verify that Affine Polynomial is set for
the Georeference Method.
2. Click Next to open the Calibration Settings dialog.
The RMS Calibration Settings dialog displays the Total RMS value for the calibration.
If this value is too high, click Back and click on the calibration points on the tablet again.
39
Didger
Calibration Settings
The Calibration Settings dialog contains options for screen display, digitizing
tolerance, and digitizing button options. Note that many of these settings can be set
after calibration by clicking the Tools | Project Settings command.
To set the calibration setting options:

1. Set the Vertex Tolerance to 200.
2. Set the Snap Tolerance to 200.
3. Verify the Tablet Button Settings list to determine which button is the Digitize
button and which button is the Finish button on the puck.
4. Click Next to open the Specify Project Limits and Scale dialog.
Set the Vertex Tolerance and Snap Tolerance, if desired.
40
Specify Project Limits and Scale

The final dialog, Specify Project Limits and Scale, is used to set the project extents
and scale. Leave all the settings in this box at the defaults. Click Finish and the
calibration points are shown in the plot window. The Didger plot window is calibrated.
Set the axis limits and scale, if desired, in the Specify Project Limits and Scale dialog.
Next Steps
If you wish to digitize objects directly off the digitizing tablet map, go to Lesson 3 -
Creating and Editing Objects. Do not go through the image calibration described in the
next lesson at this time. Otherwise, you will need to recalibrate the tablet when you
are ready to digitize the objects on the map.
If you wish to digitize objects off the screen instead of off the digitizing tablet map, go
to Lesson 2 - Image Calibration.
41
Didger
Lesson 2 - Image Calibration

If you do not own a digitizing tablet, scanned or downloaded images can be used to
digitizing information. If the image is not already georeferenced, the image will need
to be calibrated. The map that was printed in Lesson 1 is used as an imported image
in Lesson 2.
Importing an Image
To import an image:
1. Click File | Import or click the button.

2. In the Import dialog, browse to the Samples directory. By default, this is
c:\Program Files\Golden Software\Didger 5\Samples. Click on the Tutorial Map.jpg
and click Open.
Entering Reference Information

The Image Registration and Warping dialog appears.
Calibrate the image in the Image Registration and Warping dialog.
42
The image is calibrated during import using this dialog. To begin, we need to enter the
point ID and known coordinate information in the table in the middle of the Image
Registration and Warping dialog.
To enter the point ID, X, and Y coordinate information:

1. Click in the Point ID box in row 1 and type CP1.
2. Click in the Reference X box in row 1 and type 1200.
3. Click in the Reference Y box in row 1 and type 4000.
4. Move on to row 2 and enter the information for the next point.
5. Continue entering the information into the calibration table as it appears below.
Point ID Reference X Reference Y

CP1 1200 4000
CP2 8500 14500
CP3 16300 7100
CP4 19600 12600
The calibration points should look like these table values.
Locating the Calibration Points

Once all of the reference information (Point ID, Reference X, and Reference Y) is
added, the calibration points need to be moved to the proper locations on the map.
To move the calibration points:

1. Check the Auto Advance Row Position box, located below the table containing the
reference information.
2. In the table, click in row 1 on the CP1 ID.
3. Click on the Source Image tab at the top of the dialog.
4. Click the button to activate the zoom in mode. Click a few times on the lower
left corner of the map near CP1 to zoom in on the first calibration point.
Alternatively, use the scroll ball on the mouse to zoom in on the CP1 point.
5. Click the button to activate the calibration mode.

6. Center the cursor over the blue cross below CP1 and click the left mouse button. A
small red calibration symbol and the number 1 appear in the location. Try to be as
precise as possible when clicking on the calibration points as the resulting data are
only as good as the calibration.
7. Click the button to zoom out to the entire limits.
43
Didger
8. Follow the steps 4-7 to calibrate the remaining points: CP2, at the top center of
the map; CP3, at the bottom right; and CP4, at the far right. If you make a
mistake, you can click the calibration point name in the calibration table and then
redigitize the point.
Click on the map two or three times to zoom in on CP1.

When you click the calibration point, the red calibration symbol appears.
Setting the Options and Finishing the Calibration

The bottom of the Image Registration and Warping dialog contains the warping
and resampling methods. Typically, you should accept the default Warp Method and
Resample Method unless you are familiar with specific warping or resampling methods.
The Warp Method should be Affine Polynomial and the Resample Method should be
Bilinear Interpolation.
The Coordinate System and Image Extents can also be set for the image. If the image
is in a projected system, select Specify in the Specify Coordinate System section and
click the Coordinate System button. This image is not in a coordinate system, so leave
the Use Current selected. If a smaller portion of the image should be used, uncheck
the Automatic Image Extents box in the Specify Image Extents section. Click the Set
Extents button to set the limits. For this project, leave the Automatic Image Extents
checked.
44
The dialog settings should be similar to the above settings before clicking OK.
For the tutorial example, the Total RMS value is not critical, but you might want to
watch this value closely when you are working on an actual project. The Total RMS
value is located on the right side of the dialog above the Un-referenced button. For
further information on RMS errors, refer to the RMS Calibration Settings topic and the
online help book, RMS Error.
Click OK in the Image Registration and Warping dialog to use the current settings
and finishing importing the image.
Lesson 3 - Creating and Editing Objects

The tutorial map contains several points and polylines. After the map is calibrated in
Lesson 1 - Tablet Calibration or Lesson 2 - Image Calibration, you can begin creating
objects.
Creating Symbols
The tutorial map contains two types of symbols. The symbols represent
monitoring wells that are labeled with well names (MW-3, for example) and
groundwater elevation values (88.12). The symbols represent recovery wells
labeled with well names (RW7b). When creating the symbols in Didger, the
symbol type, size, color, and IDs can be set for each point. Any of these IDs or a
combination of IDs can be used as a label for the point.
45
Didger
Drawing the Monitoring Wells

First, let’s create the monitoring wells . You can associate the well names and the
groundwater elevation values with each point as you create it or select all of the wells
and add the labels later. The names and symbols can also be assigned before or after
the wells are created. Because the monitoring wells use sequential IDs, we can use the
auto increment options to define
the IDs.
To auto increment the well IDs:

1. Click the Draw | Symbol
command or click the
button.
2. In the Property Manager,
click the next to the
Increment Settings section.
3. Check the box next to the
Enter Data After
Creation option, so the
groundwater elevation values
for each point can be added
as the symbol is created.
4. Uncheck the box next to the
Create Several option. This
option is used when IDs are
not automatically
incremented.
5. Check the box next to the
Auto Increment box. This
option is used when IDs are
automatically incremented.
6. Highlight the existing value
next to the Starting Increment The settings should look like the above
Value option. Type 1 and press before starting the digitizing.
ENTER on the keyboard to make
the change.
7. Highlight the existing value next to the Ending Increment Value option. Type 7,
and press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change.
8. The Increment Value should already be 1. If it is not 1, highlight the existing value
and type 1. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change.
9. Highlight the text next to the ID Prefix option. Type MW- for the label prefix.
46
10. Highlight the text next to the ID Suffix option. Press the DELETE key on the
keyboard so that the suffix is empty.
To set the symbol properties before creating the symbols:

1. Click the next to the Symbol Properties section.
2. Make sure the Symbol Set is set to GSI Default Symbols. If the symbol set is not
set to GSI Default Symbols, click on the current symbol set name and click on GSI
Default Symbols in the list.
3. Click on the current Symbol to open the symbol palette and click on the
symbol (symbol 102) to select it.
4. Click on the current Fill Color to open the color palette and click on the color Blue
to select it.
5. To change the outside line color of the symbol, click on the current Line color and
click on the color Blue to select it. Now both the outside and inside of the symbol
will be blue.
Once all the properties are set, you can begin digitizing points. Tablet digitizers use
the puck to digitize and image digitizers use the mouse. Everyone uses the mouse for
dialog actions. If you are digitizing an image and want to zoom in to see the image
more closely, use the mouse scroll bar to zoom in and out.
To digitize the monitoring wells:

1. If you are using a digitizing tablet, move the puck over MW-1 on the tablet and
click the digitizing button. If you are digitizing an image, move your mouse so that
the cross hair cursor is over MW-1 and click the left mouse button.
2. The Enter Object Data dialog appears with the well name automatically included
in the Primary field.
3. Click in the Secondary field and type the groundwater elevation value for this point
(88.36).
4. Click OK. The point is drawn in the plot window.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each additional well.
47
Didger
Drawing the Recovery Wells

The recovery wells shown on the tutorial map do not use sequential IDs, but they do
use the same symbol types. When you want to place several points on the map, you
can choose the Draw | Symbol command or click the button for each point; or
you can create several points without selecting the command or tool each time. By
default, the Create Several option is checked. However, since we unchecked it to
create the monitoring wells, we will need to re-check the option.
To create several points:
1. Click the Draw | Symbol command or click the button.

2. In the Property Manager, in the Increment Settings section, check the box next
to the Create Several option.
3. The box should still be checked next to the Enter Data After Creation option. If it is
not checked, check it.
4. In the Symbol Properties section, click the existing symbol next Symbol and select
the symbol (symbol 21) from the list.
5. Click on the current Fill Color to open the color palette and click on the color Green
to select it.
6. To change the outside line color of the symbol, click on the current Line color and
click on the color Green to select it. Now both the outside and inside of the symbol
will be green.
7. Move the puck or mouse over one of the recovery wells (named with RW#x) on
the map and click the digitizing button or left mouse button.
8. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type the name for the recovery well into the
Primary field and click OK.
9. Continue clicking on the recovery well points and entering the primary IDs into the
Enter Object Data dialog until all four recovery wells are created.
10. After the fourth point, press the ESC key on your keyboard or click the button
to exit drawing mode.
48
Assigning Labels
Labels can be defined before creating the symbols. Or, all of the symbols can be
selected and labels can be added after the symbols are created.
To label all of the symbols:

1. Click the Edit | Criteria Select command.
2. In the Criteria Select dialog,
3. Set the Selection Type to Object Type.
4. Set the Object Type to Point.
5. Click Select and all of the symbols are selected.
6. Click Close to close the dialog.
7. In the Property Manager, click the next to the Label Properties section, if
necessary.
8. Click the <Click here to modify the labels> next to the Modify Labels option.
9. The well names are stored in the primary ID location. In the Label Position
Editor dialog, click on Primary in the Available Fields list and click Add.
10. For the monitoring wells, the elevation is stored in the secondary ID location. Click
the arrow on the Available Fields list, click on Secondary, and click Add.
11. Click Primary in the Label Field Name column and click the Font button.
12. In the Font Attributes dialog, set the Points to 10. Click OK.
13. Click Secondary in the Label Field Name column, and click the Font button.
14. In the Font Attributes dialog, set the Points to 10. Click OK.
15. The IDs appear in the graphic in the lower right corner of the dialog. By default,
the labels are centered over the point. Since we have two labels and a symbol, we
need to move the labels around. Click on Primary in the Label Field Name column
and click the button to move the well name above the symbol.
16. Click on Secondary in the Label Field Name column and click on the button to
move the elevation label below the symbol.
17. Click OK and the label properties are set for the symbols.
49
Didger
Drawing Polylines
You can create polylines by clicking on points along the line or by tracing along the
line. When tracing, a continuous stream of vertices is created as you move the pointer
along the polyline. This makes it easy to digitize curved boundaries. The contours in
this example are curved lines and are best digitized using the tracing method.
If you are using a digitizing tablet, check to see if the tablet is in stream mode before
continuing. Click the Tools | Project Settings command. Click on the Digitizing
Settings tab and make sure Stream Mode is checked. Click OK and you are ready to
begin.
If you are digitizing an image, make sure you can see all the contour lines in the
window before beginning. You can click the View | Full Extents command to zoom
out so everything is visible.
To set the line properties and create the polylines:
1. Click the Draw | Polyline command or click the button.

2. In the Property Manager, in the Increment Settings section, check the box next
to the Enter Data After Creation option, if it is not already checked.
3. Check the box next to the Create Several option, if it is not already checked.
4. Click the next to Line Properties to open the Line Properties section.
5. To set the line style, click on the existing option next to Style. Select the desired
line from the list. For example, select the .1 in. Dash to create a dashed line.
6. Click the next to Label Properties to open the Label Properties section.
7. Click the <Click here to modify the labels> text next to Modify Labels.
8. In the Label Position Editor dialog,
a. Click on Primary in the Available Fields list and click Add.
b. Click the Font button.
i. Set the Points to 10.
ii. Click OK.
c. In the Label Position section, select Position Along Line.
d. Set Label Alignment On to On.
e. Set Label Position Along to Middle.
f. Click OK and the label properties are set for all of the lines being drawn.
9. If you are using a digitizing tablet, move the puck over one end of the 88.30
contour. If you are using an image base map, move the cursor with the mouse
50
over one end of the 88.30 contour. Press and hold the digitize button or left mouse
button and drag the puck or cursor along the contour line from the beginning to
the end. You should see a polyline drawn in the plot window.
10. After the cursor or puck reaches the end of the line, press the ENTER key on the
keyboard, double-click the left mouse button, or press the finish button on the
puck to stop digitizing the line.
11. The Enter Object Data dialog is displayed. Click in the Primary field and type
88.30, the contour level value for the line just digitized.
12. Click OK in the Enter Object Data dialog.
13. Click on the beginning point for the next contour line on the map.
14. Repeat steps 9-13 for all contour lines on the map.
15. Press the ESC key on the keyboard after you are done tracing the last contour
line. This ends digitize mode.
Digitizing polylines and polygons takes a bit of practice. If you are not satisfied with
the way the object looks as you are digitizing it, you can click the right mouse button
to remove the last digitized vertex. If the line is beyond repair, click ESC on your
keyboard to cancel digitizing, delete the line, and start over. These commands apply to
both tablet digitizing and image digitizing, although you can set a puck button to act
like right-clicking the mouse. See Digitizing Settings for more information on puck
button settings.
Editing Polylines
If you have traced lines by holding down the puck digitizing button or the left mouse
button, the lines are most likely a bit jagged. Several tools are available to help you
edit polygons and polylines. Refer to the Draw menu and the associated help topics
for more information on these tools. Hint: if you highlight a command and click F1 on
your keyboard, the specific topic opens.
If you would like to experiment with a smoothing a line:

1. Click on a polyline to select it. If you are having difficulty selecting a line, click on
the line in the Data Manager.
2. Click the Draw | Thin and Smooth command or click the button.
3. Select Vertex Averaging in the Line Thinning and Smoothing dialog.
4. Set the Average Rate to 3.
5. Click OK and the line appears smoother.
51
Didger
If the Vertex Averaging does not produce the desired line, click the Edit | Undo
command and click the Draw | Thin and Smooth command again. Experiment with
the various other smoothing methods until the line appears as desired.
Lesson 4 - Converting Coordinates

A coordinate conversion adjusts the values of the existing coordinate system and
maps the values to new locations. Examples of situations you would use coordinate
conversions include: converting the file coordinates of an imported file or converting a
site-specific coordinate system to a regional coordinate system.
Didger can perform two types of coordinate conversions: Math Operation and
Georeference. Both methods convert coordinates but require different information
about the data. Either method can be selected for converting coordinates. The Math
Operation option is used when a known offset in the project coordinate system exists.
For example, adding, subtracting, multiplying, or dividing every X value by 2. The
Georeference option is used when the exact coordinates of three or more non-linear
points are known and the map will be recalibrated based on those values. This is
useful when you a Didger project file contains either vector data only or both a
georeferenced image and vector data and needs recalibrating. You can select from a
list of many transformation functions when converting the coordinates.
This example will continue with the map from lesson 3 and convert the coordinates
using a math operation. If the map does not exist yet, work through Lesson 2 to
import the map.
Once the map is open, confirm the coordinates of the map.

1. Zoom into the CP1 point, located in the lower left corner of the map using the
View | Zoom | In command.
2. Press ESC on the keyboard to end zooming mode.
3. Click the Draw | Symbol command.
4. In the Property Manager, uncheck the box next to the Enter Data After Creation
option.
5. Click on the CP1 location on the image.
6. Press ESC on the keyboard to end drawing mode.
7. Click on the new symbol to select it.
8. In the Coordinate Manager, the point is recorded with values near X = 1200,
and Y = 4000.
9. Click on other points in the map and confirm the values.
52
Based on new information, it is determined that the X value for this bottom point
should actually be X = 2200. The value that was calibrated is off by 1000 meters. This
is something that is corrected easily in Didger. To adjust the X values by 1000
meters:
1. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion command or click the button.

2. In the Coordinate Conversion dialog, change the Input Data Units to Meters by
clicking on the empty box and select Meters from the list.
3. Select Math Operation as the type of coordinate conversion.
4. In the X Axis Operation section, select + (Add).
5. Highlight the 0.00 and type 1000.
6. In the Y Axis Operation section, select + (Add).
7. Enter 0 into the value box since we are not adjusting the Y values.
Add 1000 to the X coordinates and 0 to the Y

coordinates in the Coordinate Conversion dialog.
8. Click OK to adjust the coordinates.
If you click on the point in the lower left corner of the map, you will see that the
coordinates are now closer to 2200, 4000. All of the X values have been adjusted by
1000 meters.
Lesson 5 - Assigning and Changing the Projection

This tutorial lesson opens an existing file and assigns a projection to it. This is useful if
during calibration or import, the projection is not specified. This is also useful if it is
determined that the projection information was set incorrectly, but the coordinates for
the objects are correct.
Opening an Existing Project

Existing projects may have projections defined or may have been created with
Cartesian coordinate systems.
53
Didger
To open an existing project,
1. Click the File | Close command or click the button if an existing project is
open.
2. Save the changes if desired. If you are using the demo version, you will not be
able to save the file. Close the file without saving.
3. Click the File | Open command or click the button.

4. In the Open dialog, select the USGS DRG Contour Extraction.pjt file and click
Open.
5. To determine if a project uses a projection, refer to the status bar at the bottom of
the plot window. The far right section of the status bar lists the projection.
The current projection information is on the far right side of the status bar.
The projection can also be determined by clicking the Map | Change Projection
command. If the Change Projection command is not available, a projection has not
been previously set for the project. The Change Projection command is not
available, which indicates the project does not have a projection defined.
The file opens and displays the USGS DRG file in the Cartesian coordinates.
54
Assigning the Projection

Once it is determined that the project does not have a projection defined, it is very
easy in Didger to define the projection.
To define the projection,
1. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion command or click the button.

2. In the Coordinate Conversion dialog, click the Destination System button.
3. On the left side of the Assign Coordinate System dialog, select Projected
Coordinates.
4. Click the next to Predefined.
5. Click the next to Projected Systems.
6. Click the next to UTM.
7. Click the next to North America.
8. Click the North America NAD83 UTM zone 13N system.
9. Click OK to close the Assign Coordinate System dialog.
10. Click in the empty box next to the Input Data Units option. Select Meters from the
list.
11. Click OK and the projection is defined for the project.
Select the projection from the list. This is the

projection in which the system is already calibrated.
55
Didger
Changing the Projection

The projection of any Didger project can be changed to any projection system. The
file we currently have open is now in North America NAD83 UTM Zone 13N. If we want
to see the file in another system, such as state plane or latitude and longitude, the
Map | Change Projection command is used. The projection is often changed when
the file needs to be exported for use in another program.
1. Click the Map | Change Projection command.

2. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, select the desired system. Click the
next to Predefined.
3. Click the next to Projected Systems.
4. Click the next to State Plane.
5. Click the next to 1983.
6. Click the State Plane 1983 - Colorado North (Feet) system.
7. Click OK and the project is converted to the new system. In this case, the file is
now in state plane feet coordinates. In some cases, no visual change is apparent,
until you examine the coordinates listed in the Coordinate Manager or in the
status bar. In this case, the image warps and appears at an angle.
The image warps to the new projection, displaying state plane feet.
56
Lesson 6 - Downloading Online Maps

Many web mapping servers exist on the internet that allow direct connection with
Didger. Imported images can be limited by the extents of an existing project or can
be set to any desired values. In this example, an existing file is imported into a new
blank project. The downloaded map is then fit to the existing limits.
Create New Project

To create a new project and import the base layer,
open.
3. Click the File | New

button.
4. Click the File | Import
button.
5. In the Import dialog,
select the
Golden_Roads.shp file and
click Open.
The map is imported into the

blank project. This file
contains the streets in and
around the Golden, Colorado
area.
The SHP file is imported into a new Didger project,

displaying the roads near Golden, CO.
57
Didger
Download the Online Map

To download an online map overlay,
1. Click the Image | Download Online Maps command or click on the button.
2. In the Download Online Maps dialog, click the next to the Imagery section in
the Select Data Source box.
3. Click the next to NAIP Color Imagery for US to open the NAIP group.
4. Click on Orthoimagery/USGS_EDC_Ortho_NAIP to select the NAIP map web
server.
5. In the Select Area to Download section, select the Current map extents to
download the information only from the previously defined map extents. The
image will be limited to the area determined by the Golden_Roads.shp file that
was previously imported.
6. In the Select Image Resolution to Download section, drag the slider to the right to
increase the image resolution. The farther to the right the slider is located, the
better the resolution and the larger the image. Clicking on one of the lines on the
left side of the slider downloads a map of sufficient quality that is smaller in size.
Select the resolution along the slider. This image is approximately

13 MB in size, which should provide sufficient resolution in most cases.
7. After all of the options are set, click OK to download the image.
8. When the progress gauge is finished, a warning message may appear. If the
Would you like to re-project the bitmap to the current projection system? message
appears, click Yes.
The image is added to the project, on top of the other objects. To move the image
behind the other objects,
1. Click on the image to select it.
2. Click the Arrange | Order Objects | Move to Back command or click the
button.
3. In the Layer Manager, click on the WMS-Orthoimagery/USGS_EDC_Ortho_NAIP
layer.
4. Drag the layer to the bottom of the layer list. The roads appear directly on top of
the image.
58
After the image is downloaded, the street lines overlay the image.
59
Didger
Lesson 7 - Vectorizing an Image

The Image | Vectorize Image command converts a raster image into a vectorized
data set of polylines and polygons. In the vectorize image example, we will use an
image containing contours and automatically create vector lines of those contours.
Once the contour lines are created, we will automatically assign elevations to the
polylines.
Opening an Existing Project File

To open a Didger project file .PJT:
open.
3. Click the File | Open command or click the button.

4. In the Open dialog, select the Tutorial VLines.pjt file, located in the Didger
Samples directory.
5. Click Open and the file opens, displaying the contour line image.
Tutorial VLines.pjt contains a

simple contour map from which we
can create vector polylines automatically.
60
Automatically Creating Vector Contour Lines

To have Didger automatically create vector contour lines:
1. Click on the image to select it.
2. Click the Image | Vectorize Image command or click the button to open
the Vectorize Image dialog.
3. Set the Edge Detection Method to Standard Object Thinning.
4. Set the Smooth Lines to Minor.
5. Set the Min Pixel Length to 5.
6. Uncheck the box next to the Auto Generate Polygons if it is checked.
7. Check the box next to the Create results on new layer(s) if it is not already
checked.
8. Click OK and the vector polylines are automatically created from the image.
Turning Off the Image Display

After the vector contour lines are created, you can turn off the image display to see
the lines more clearly. To hide the image display:
1. Open the Data Manager if it is not already open by selecting View |
Toolbars/Managers | Data Manager. The Data Manager is open if it has a
check mark next to it. The Data Manager is typically displayed at the bottom of
the Didger window.
2. Images are displayed in the Data Manager with this symbol: . The image
should be at the bottom of the Object Type list.
3. The light bulb symbol is yellow, indicating the image is displayed. Click on the
light bulb so that it changes to gray. This turns off the image so the vector contour
lines can be seen easily.
Click on the light bulb next to the image to turn the image display off.
61
Didger
Assigning Elevations
Typically, contour lines have elevation numbers associated with them in one of the ID
fields. Technically, you could select each line and type the ID into the Property
Manager's Data Attributes section, but this is time consuming when you have many
polylines. Instead, you can use the Assign Elevations command.
The minimum elevation is at the circle in

the center of the map and the maximum
elevation is at the right-side circle. Begin
the line at the center of the map and
end it just inside the right-side circle.
To automatically assign elevations:

1. Click the Map | Data | Assign Elevations command.
2. The cursor changes to . To assign the elevation data, a line must be drawn
from the minimum contour polyline to the maximum contour polyline. The
minimum elevation is assigned to the first polyline the line crosses and each
successive polyline is assigned an increasing elevation based on the specified
contour interval. The minimum contour level is located at the center circle of this
map and the maximum contour is located at the circle on the right side of the
map. Position the cursor just inside the center circle, hold down the mouse button,
and drag the cursor to the circle on the right side of the map to draw the line.
3. Release the mouse button and the Assign Elevations dialog appears.
4. Type 5460 for the Starting Elevation.
5. Type 60 for the Increment Value.
6. The Assign to Data list contains the fields that can be used for the data. In this
case, select Primary ID.
62
Enter the Starting Elevation and Increment Value to

assign elevations to all the polylines crossing the
line drawn with the Assign Elevations command.
7. Click OK and the elevations are entered into the primary ID. You can see all the
primary IDs in the Data Manager.
The Z level values are listed for the Primary ID in the Data Manager.
Preprocessing Note
The vectorization example above was a simplified example. Typically, you need to use
image pre-processing tools before vectorizing. Pre-processing includes the commands
in Image | Processing Filters. For example, if the pixels are not well defined, you
may need to use Adjust Contrast, Adjust Brightness, etc. If the lines in the image
are not well defined or break apart, you may want to use Image Erosion and
Dilation. Pre-processing and vectorization settings may take some experimentation to
achieve the preferred results.
63
Didger
Advanced Tutorial Lesson 8 - Saving and Exporting Data

After you have digitized points, polylines, or polygons on a map, you can save the
digitized data in a Didger project .PJT file or export your data to a file that can be
used in other applications.
Note: if you are using the demo version of Didger, the files cannot be saved or
exported. Proceed to Lesson 9 - Digitizing Objects with Shared Borders instead.
Saving a Didger Project

Didger project .PJT files save all the calibration information, the XY coordinates for
digitized objects, the projection, the object properties, and the IDs associated with the
objects. Although the .PJT files cannot be used in any other applications, these files
preserve the Didger data so you can recall the file later. This allows you to add
additional data, to edit any existing data, or to export the data to a file that can be
used in other applications.
If you have not done so already, it is recommend that you complete lesson 2 and
lesson 3 to calibrate a project and draw symbols in the project.
To save the existing project in a .PJT file:
1. Click the File | Save command or click the button. Since this is a new
Didger project, the Save As dialog is displayed, allowing you to save the file to
any name.
2. Highlight the File name field contents, type the name Example_Save, and then
click the Save button. The file Example_Save.pjt is saved and the .PJT extension is
placed on the file automatically.
Note: if you are using the demo version of Didger, the files cannot be saved or
exported. Proceed to Lesson 9 - Digitizing Objects with Shared Borders instead.
Exporting Data to a File

The File | Export options allow you to save project information in files that can be
used by other programs. For example, you might want to use the digitized points from
the tutorial example to produce a contour map in Golden Software’s Surfer. Each of
the monitoring wells digitized in Lesson 3 - Drawing the Monitoring Wells had a
groundwater elevation value entered as the secondary ID. With Export, you can
create a data file of this groundwater elevation information.
64
If you have not done so already, it is recommend that you complete lesson 2 and
lesson 3 to calibrate a project and draw symbols in the project.
For this lesson, let’s produce a text file of points. First, we need to select just the
points in the file. This is easily accomplished with Criteria Select.
To select points only:

1. Click the Edit | Criteria Select command.
2. In the Criteria Select dialog, click on the existing option next to Selection Type
and select Object Type from the list.
3. Click on the existing option next to Object Type and select Point from the list. Note
that the Object Type list does not exist until Object Type is selected from the
Selection Type list in step 2.
4. Click the Select button. This selects the all of the symbols that have been
digitized.
5. Click Close to close the dialog. The symbols are still selected.
The Selection Type should be Object Type and the Object

Type should be Point to select all the points in the file.
65
Didger
To export the points:
1. Click the File | Export command or click the button.

2. In the Export dialog,
a. Check the box next to the Selected objects only option.
b. Select the DAT Golden Software Data (*.dat) format from the Save as type
field.
c. Type a name into the File name field, such as Example Export.
d. Click the Save button.
3. The Data Export Options dialog appears allowing you to specify the format of
the .DAT file.
a. In the Delimiter section, select Tab.
b. In the Text Qualifer section, select " (Double quote).
c. Click OK and the Golden Software Data .DAT file is created. This data file can
be used in software that accepts ASCII text files.
Advanced Tutorial Lesson 9 - Digitizing Objects with

Shared Borders
Sometimes it is necessary to have a single line be shared among two areas. This is
easily done in Didger by drawing the shared polyline separately from the rest of the
polyline.
Downloading an Image Outlining the Areas

Rather than import an existing image, we will use Didger's Image | Download
Online Image command to download an image showing the object boundaries.
To download the desired image:
open.
3. Click the File | New command or click the button.

4. Click the Image | Download Online Maps command.
5. In the Download Online Maps dialog, click the next to Worldwide Data.
6. Click the next to the MODIS server.
66
7. Click on the USA State Boundaries (Internal) layer.

8. In the Select Area to Download section, select Specify Latitude/Longitude extents.
9. Type in -112 for West, -94 for East, 45.5 for North, and 36.75 for South.
10. Drag the slider in the Select Image Resolution to Download section to the second
line. The image size should show approximately 2000 x 807 pixels, or a 5 MB
image download.
11. Click OK and the image will appear in the plot window.
The image appears in the Didger plot window.
Setting the Snap Tolerance

To have polylines connect to form polygons, the end points of the polylines must be
within the snap tolerance. Any two polyline nodes that lie within the Snap Tolerance
distance can be "snapped," meaning that the two nodes are coincident (use the
identical XY coordinates).
To change the snap tolerance,

1. Click the Tools | Project Settings command.
2. In the Project Settings dialog, click on the Tolerance Settings tab.
3. The Snap Tolerance should be large enough to get coincident points, but not so
large as to determine that points are coincident when they should be adjacent. For
this project, a Snap Tolerance of 0.075 map units (degrees) would be good.
Highlight the existing value next to Snap Tolerance and type 0.075.
4. To display the snap tolerance as a circle around the first and last point on a
polyline, check the box next to Show Snap Tolerance Circles.
5. Click OK, and the snap tolerance value is set.
67
Didger
Digitizing the Non-Shared Polylines

To create polygons from shared borders, the polygons need to be digitized in sections,
separating the shared borders from the non-shared borders. Starting with the state of
Wyoming in the image, there are three lines that need to be drawn separately. In the
image below, these are marked as 1, 2, and 3. Lines 1 and 3 are shared between
Wyoming and another state that we may be interested in digitizing. Line 2 belongs
only to Wyoming. The other non-shared polyline borders are lines 4, 7, and 9 in the
image below.
The image above shows the nine lines that need to be digitized.
The arrows indicate direction for each line to be digitized.
When assigning IDs to each line, the Primary ID will be used as the object name on
the left side of the polyline. The Secondary ID will be used as the object name on the
right side of the polyline. In these non-shared objects, only a single ID will be entered.
Because of the arrow directions indicated in the image above, all of these non-shared
objects will only have the right side of the object named.
To digitize the outside edge (non-shared) lines:

2. In the Property Manager, click the next to Increment Settings.
3. Check the box next to Enter Data After Creation option, if it is not already
checked.
68
4. Check the box next to Create Several, if it not already checked.

5. On line 2 (the red line on the outside left edge of Wyoming in the image above),
a. Click on the bottom-most point, where lines 1, 2, and 9 meet.
b. For straight-line segments, only points that define direction changes need to
be clicked. Click on the far bottom corner on line 2.
c. Click on the top left corner on line 2.
d. Click on the top right corner on line 2.
e. Double-click on the final point, where lines 2, 3, and 4 meet.
f. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Wyoming in the Secondary box.
g. Click OK.
6. To create line 4 above,
a. Click on the first point, where lines 2, 3, and 4 meet. Try to click inside the
snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized line.
b. Click on the far right straight line edge.
c. Hold down the mouse left button and drag the mouse along the ragged edge
along the rest of the top and far right side of Nebraska.
d. When the end of the state is reached, press ENTER on the keyboard to end
digitizing mode.
e. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Nebraska in the Secondary box.
f. Click OK.
b. Hold down the mouse left button and drag the mouse along the ragged edge
along the far right side of Kansas.
c. When you reach the straight line segment, release the mouse button. Move
the mouse to the bottom right corner of line 7 and click the mouse button.
d. Click on the far left bottom corner on line 7.
e. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Kansas in the Secondary box.
f. Click OK.
b. Click on the far left bottom corner on line 9.
c. Click on the far left top corner on line 9.
d. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Colorado in the Secondary box.
69
Didger
e. Click OK.
9. Press the ESC key on the keyboard to end drawing mode.
Digitizing the Shared Polylines

In the image below, line 1 is shared between Wyoming and Colorado. Line 3 is shared
between Wyoming and Nebraska. The other shared polyline borders are lines 5, 6, and
8 in the image below.
The image above shows the nine lines that need to be digitized.
The arrows indicate direction for each line to be digitized.
When assigning IDs to each line, the Primary ID will be used as the object name on
the left side of the polyline. The Secondary ID will be used as the object name on the
right side of the polyline. Following the arrow direction indicates which side of the
shared polyline is right or left. Pretend you are standing on the line facing in the
direction the arrow points. The object on your left is the left side of the polyline. The
object on the right is the right side of the polyline.
To digitize the shared lines:

2. In the Property Manager, click the next to Increment Settings.
70
3. Check the box next to Enter Data After Creation option, if it is not already
checked.
4. Check the box next to Create Several, if it not already checked.
a. Click on the far right point, where lines 1, 3, and 6 meet. Try to click inside the
snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized lines.
b. Double-click on the far left point, where lines 1, 2, and 9 meet. Try to double-
click inside the snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized lines.
c. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Colorado in the Primary box.
d. Type Wyoming in the Secondary box.
e. Click OK.
a. Click on the bottom-most point, where lines 1, 3, and 6 meet. Try to click
inside the snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized lines.
b. Double-click on the top-most point, where lines 2, 3, and 4 meet. Try to
double-click inside the snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized
lines.
c. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Wyoming in the Primary box.
d. Type Nebraska in the Secondary box.
e. Click OK.
a. Click on the far left point, where lines 5, 6, and 8 meet. Try to click inside the
snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized lines.
b. Double-click on the far right point, where lines 4, 5, and 7 meet. Try to
lines.
c. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Nebraska in the Primary box.
d. Type Kansas in the Secondary box.
e. Click OK.
a. Click the bottom-most point, where lines 5, 6, and 8 meet. Try to click inside
the snap tolerance circle created by the previously digitized lines.
b. Click on the upper right point on line 6.
c. Click on the far left point, where lines 1, 3, and 6 meet. Try to double-click
d. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Colorado in the Primary box.
71
Didger
e. Type Nebraska in the Secondary box.

f. Click OK.
a. Click on the bottom-most point, where lines 7, 8, and 9 meet. Try to click
b. Double-click on the top-most point, where lines 5, 6, and 8 meet. Try to
lines.
c. In the Enter Object Data dialog, type in Colorado in the Primary box.
d. Type Kansas in the Secondary box.
e. Click OK.
10. Press the ESC key on the keyboard to end drawing mode.
Combining the Polylines into Multiple Polygons

Now that all of the polylines are drawn, we can use the Draw | Edit Boundaries |
Create Polygons by IDs command to combine all polylines with the same name into
a new polygon. Each polyline must have a Primary (Left) and Secondary (Right) ID
properly assigned before using this command.
To combine the polylines:

1. To assign the left side to the Primary and the right side to the Secondary ID, click
the Map | Data | Edit Attributes Fields command.
2. In the Data Attributes dialog,
a. Click on Tertiary next to Polygon Left and select Primary from the list.
b. Click on Quaternary next to Polygon Right and select Secondary from the list.
c. Click OK.
3. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by IDs command.
4. In the Create Polygons by ID's dialog,
a. Click on Colorado in the Select Left/Right ID box.
b. Click Create. The polygon is created on the map with the default polygon
properties and the Primary name of Colorado.
c. Click on Kansas in the Select Left/Right ID box.
d. Click Create. The polygon is created on the map with the default polygon
properties and the Primary name of Kansas.
e. Click on Nebraska in the Select Left/Right ID box.
72
f. Click Create. The polygon is created on the map with the default polygon
properties and the Primary name of Nebraska.
g. Click on Wyoming in the Select Left/Right ID box.
h. Click Create. The polygon is created on the map with the default polygon
properties and the Primary name of Wyoming.
i. Click Close to close the dialog.
If a polygon is not created, check the left and right IDs. Usually, troubles with
polygon creation mean the IDs were entered incorrectly. Another common cause of a
polygon not being created is the digitized beginning and ending points not being within
the snap tolerance circle of the other points. in the area.
Congratulations! You have now completed the advanced tutorial for Didger.
73
Didger
74
Chapter 3
Managing the Project
Getting Base Information into Didger
There are several ways to get base information into Didger, depending on the type of
information you have and the type of hardware you own. Base information can include
paper reference maps, paper graphs, images, vector files (such as .DXF), an aerial
photograph, a Mylar map, data files, etc.
Paper Documents
If you have a paper document, such as a field map or a well log, you can digitize this
information with a digitizing tablet. If you scan a paper document into other software
to create an image, import the image into Didger using the File | Import command.
Image Files
If you have an image file, such as a .TIF or .BMP, you can import it into Didger with
the File | Import command. The image file can be imported into Didger whether it is
georeferenced or not. If the file does not have georeferencing information, you can
assign the georeferencing information to it when you import the file.
Data Files
If you have a data file containing XY coordinates and additional information such as
IDs, elevation, etc. you can import the file into Didger with the File | Import
command.
Vector Files
If you have a vector file, such as a .DXF or .SHP, the file can be imported into Didger
with the File | Import command.
75
Didger
Introduction to Layers
Layers partition a project into one or more overlays. Layers are like transparencies in
that you can see all layers at the same time, but they let you isolate objects by placing
them on separate layers. Layers are created and manipulated using Layer Manager.
Tips on Using Layers

You can accomplish several things when you use layers in Didger. There are a few
tips and tricks we can share that might help you use layers.
• Use "NONE" for the fill pattern on polygons in top layers. Otherwise, objects on
lower layers can be obscured.
• Use layer names to easily keep track of what you have included on each layer.
• Use layers to isolate different types of objects. It is easier to select and modify
objects when you do not have too many objects on a single layer.
• Make a layer uneditable when you are not working with it to avoid accidentally
selecting, moving, or editing objects.
• Show various approaches to your project by creating several layers and
making some visible and invisible.
This project is divided into three layers:

Base Map, Reference Lines, and Contours.
The layers can be made invisible or
uneditable to aid in the editing process.
76
Layer Manager
The Layer Manager contains information on plot layers. Layers can be selected,
replicated, arranged, added, deleted, activated, renamed, made visible/invisible, made
editable/uneditable, and locked/unlocked in the Layer Manager. Changes made in
the Layer Manager are reflected in the plot window. The layer each object exists on
is listed in the Data Manager. Refer to the Layer Manager section in Chapter 1 for
additional information.
The Layer Manager contains a list of

all of the layers in the document.
Move to Another Layer

Click the Arrange | Move to Another Layer command or press CTRL+K on the
keyboard to move all selected objects from the current layer to another layer in the
project. The objects are copied to the same position in the destination layer as they
are in the existing layer. At least two layers must exist to use this command. After the
command is selected, the Select Layer dialog appears, allowing you to choose the
destination layer.
Select the new layer name and click OK.
77
Didger
To use the Move to Another Layer command:

1. Make sure both the original layer and the layer you want to move the objects to
are editable.
2. Select the objects to be copied or moved.
3. Click the Arrange | Move to Another Layer command.
4. The Select Layer dialog appears. Choose the layer to move the objects.
5. Click OK and the objects are moved to the selected layer.
Layer Formatter Dialog

Click on the button in the Layer Manager to open the Layer Formatter dialog.
Set the properties for an object in the Layer Formatter dialog.
The Layer Formatter is a thematic mapping tool used to classify common data with
symbols and colors. You can apply drawing properties to items that share a common
attribute or keyword. For example, you can import a polygon layer representing
geologic formations across the country. The formation field may have many records
but only three possible formations: Granite, Schist, and Sandstone. The Layer
Formatter uses the formation field as the keyword and adds all available values to a
78
list in the data view. You can then select a value from the list and apply fill and line
properties to all records that share a common name. In this example, fill properties
could be blue for Granite, green for Schist, and red for Sandstone.
Format Type
The Format Type determines how objects are selected. To change the Format Type,
click on the existing option and select the desired option from the list. Select Keyword
if you want to classify your data on items of a certain type, like surface and bottom
hole well locations. Select Range if you want to categorize your data based on ranges
within a data field. Range data are typically numeric data fields such as well depths,
production cost, or population data.
Use Data Field

The Use Data Field lists all ID field names in the selected layer. Select the field you
want to classify your data on from the list of ID fields. After the Use Data Field is set,
click the buttons at the bottom of the dialog to create the list.
List View and Properties

The left side of the Layer Formatter lists the unique ID names. Select an item in the
data list to activate the right side of the dialog. The right side of the dialog displays
the keyword, fill, line and symbol properties available for the selected item in the list.
New List
Click the button to create a new list. The existing entries in the list are removed.
Auto Create List

Click the button to automatically create a new list based on all of the IDs in the
Data Field for the selected layer. The list is automatically generated.
Insert New Item

Click the button to insert a new item in the list.
Delete Item
Click the button to remove the selected item from the list.
79
Didger
Open List
Click the button to open the Format Files dialog. Select the existing Didger
Format Files (*.dfh) file from the dialog and click Open. The items from the list are
displayed in the Layer Formatter dialog.
Save List
Click the button to open the Format Files dialog. Type a name for the new Didger
Format Files (*.dfh) file and click Save. The items from the list are saved to a new
.DFH file.
Classifying Objects
To classify data based on a keyword:
1. In the Layer Manager, select the layer you want to classify.
2. Click the button.

3. Select Keyword as the Format Type.
4. Select the field name from the Use Data Field.
5. Click the button on the toolbar at the bottom of the dialog.

6. Select an item from the list generated by Auto Create Items.
7. On the right side of the dialog, select the fill, line or symbol properties to classify
your data.
8. Click OK or Apply to apply the changes to the selected objects. Click Cancel to exit
the dialog.
Tablet Calibration
Click the Draw | Tablet | Tablet Calibration command or click the button to
calibrate the digitizing tablet before beginning work on a project or continuing with a
project. The Tablet Calibration Wizard steps through the necessary options to begin
a new project or to recalibrate an existing project using the digitizing tablet. The tablet
must be calibrated before digitizing objects.

Didger instead.
80

Scanners
paper document.
Rotation
Your paper source documents can be rotated on the tablet, and Didger corrects for
any rotation.
Scaling
Paper source documents can use different scaling in the two dimensions. For example,
your document might use a scaling of 1 inch=1000 feet in the X dimension, and 1 inch
= 1200 feet in the Y dimension, and Didger corrects for the different scaling.
81
Didger
Calibration Marker
You can set the calibration marker symbol, color, and size by clicking the Draw |
Tablet | Calibration Marker command before or after calibrating the digitizing
tablet. Each tablet calibration point is shown in the plot window with the symbol
selected in the Calibration Marker dialog. The settings in the Calibration Marker
dialog are used in the current project and in future projects until the settings are
changed. The calibration markers are not printed or exported.
Select the symbol size, shape, and color for the

calibration marker in the Calibration Marker dialog.
Activate Tablet
Before you digitize objects, the digitizing tablet must be calibrated (see Tablet
Calibration), and must be activated by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Activate Tablet
command, clicking the button, or pressing F9 on the keyboard. This activates

the tablet pointer for digitizing. When the tablet is not activated, the tablet pointer
operates as a mouse. You must activate the tablet for the project coordinates to
appear in the status bar.
82
Troubleshooting Digitizing Tablets

If you are having trouble with your digitizing tablet, you might need to contact the
tablet manufacturer.
Check the following:

1. Was your tablet powered on before booting your computer? Many tablets must be
turned on before turning on your computer. If the tablet was not on first, turn the
computer off. While the computer is off, turn on the tablet. Then, start the
computer and open Didger.
2. Open Didger, and click on Help | Wintab Info command. Click on the buttons on
your puck. You should see numbers in the Tablet Button field. In addition, you
should see numbers scroll in the Tablet X and Tablet Y fields as you move the puck
around. If you do not see the button numbers or the tablet XY coordinates, your
tablet is not properly installed.
3. Can you move your puck and see the cursor move on your monitor? You do not
have to have any program open to observe this behavior. If you cannot move your
cursor with the puck, your tablet is not properly installed.
4. Did you install a Wintab driver over an existing tablet driver? If so, this is known
to cause problems with the tablet.
If your tablet is not properly installed, contact the tablet manufacturer for assistance.
Connectivity between the digitizing tablet and the Wintab driver often requires certain
information that can only be obtained from the tablet manufacturer. In our experience,
tablet manufacturers can quickly and easily get you up and running with your digitizer
connectivity.
Digitizing Accuracy and Acceptable Error - RMS Values

Didger can instill a degree of confidence about the accuracy of your digitizing project
because it reports root-mean-square (RMS) error values. Digitizing, by nature, is
never exact but you can use the calibration RMS error values to make statements such
as, "I am 95 percent sure that this digitized point is within two meters of the true
location on the ground." This lends a certain credibility to your digitizing project.
The final Didger project accuracy is determined by the care you put into the
calibration process. If you demand a high degree of precision and accuracy for your
project, take care when working through the calibration from selecting the calibration
points to digitizing them. If accuracy is not highly important to your results, calibration
requires very little effort. However, it is always a good idea to verify that RMS values
are reasonable before proceeding with a project.
83
Didger
The number of calibration points needed to determine RMS depends on which

georeference method is selected. See Spatial Transformation Methods for information
on the number of calibration points necessary for each method. A larger number of
points are better because you can then use the RMS error values with more confidence
when interpreting your final digitized data. However, more calibration points do not
necessarily provide a more accurate project, only more confidence in the reported RMS
values.
There are three points to consider that can affect the error values and ultimately the
RMS values.
1. How well did you define the X and Y coordinates for your calibration points?
• When you choose your calibration points, determining the exact XY
coordinates for the points is important. If you are determining XY coordinates
from an axis, you must rely on using a straight edge and ruler to determine
exact coordinates. In these cases, the points must be measured and recorded
as accurately as possible.
• The calibration point coordinates must also be typed into the calibration grid
during the calibration process. You should be careful to enter the correct
coordinates during this stage. If you find a problem with your XY coordinates,
correct any mistakes in the calibration grid coordinate values. Refer to the
tutorial for more information on the calibration grid and calibrating. If you
change a value in the grid, you do not have to redigitize the point (or points) if
you are confident that you clicked in the precise location when digitizing the
calibration points.
2. How precise were you when you clicked the calibration points?
• Even with exact calibration point coordinates, you should use care when
clicking the points. Make sure the pointer is directly over the points when you
click them onscreen or on the digitizing tablet.
• If the RMS value is not acceptable and your XY coordinates are correct, you
can redigitize the points. Refer to the tutorial for more information on
calibrating.
3. Finally, there are four conditions under which Didger does not calculate RMS
values, or the RMS values are meaningless.
• when you are using one or two log axes
• when you only have three calibration points with an affine polynomial
georeferencing method
• when you select the thin plate spline, natural cubic spline, Marcov spline,
exponential spline, rational quadratic spline, or inverse distance squared
georeferencing methods
84
• when your project uses different X and Y scaling (not the same number of
units per inch in both dimensions)
RMS Error Value

Digitizing accuracy is reflected in the RMS error value that Didger reports in the
calibration process. When a non-georeferenced image is imported into Didger, the
Image Registration and Warping dialog appears. For an RMS error to be calculated,
image calibration requires at least four points. After calibrating the image, the Total
RMS value appears in the lower right of the Calibration Points section.
If an image is already imported into the project, or if a georeferenced image is

imported, you can view the Total RMS by selecting the image, going to Image |
Image Registration and Warping. The Total RMS value appears in the lower right
of the Calibration Points section.
When you type calibration point coordinates into the calibration grid, Didger
determines where the exact or expected point locations should be in relation to the
tablet’s coordinate system or in relation to the image pixels.
However, there is a degree of error inherent in the process of digitizing calibration

points. When you actually digitize the points, Didger determines the difference
between the digitized locations and the expected locations. This difference is reported
as an error value for each calibration point. The RMS value is simply the standard
deviation based on all the error values. An RMS value is determined using the equation
where
x = a digitized location
t = the true (or expected) location
n = the number of digitized calibration points
85
Didger
This graphic illustrates the relationship between a point’s true location and
the probability that a digitized point will be within a certain distance of the true
location. For example, there is a 68.3% chance that a digitized point would
lie somewhere within the smaller circle around the true point location.
As stated previously, RMS values are simply standard deviation values, and are in the
units you use for your calibration coordinates (feet, meters, miles, kilometers, and so
on). Because of this, you can think of RMS values as distances. In this discussion, they
are often referred to as the RMS distance rather than RMS value or RMS error.
In Didger, we assume that all digitizing errors are random. This means that when you
digitize a point it has an equal chance of lying in any direction from the true point
location (a normal distribution). Statistics tell us that with this type of data distribution
(a normal distribution), a certain percentage of observations can be expected to lie
within a particular number of standard deviations from the mean. In Didger, this
means that a certain percentage of points lie within a certain number of RMS distances
from their true location. For example, we can say that there is a 68.3 percent chance
that a digitized point lies within one RMS distance of its true location.
What does this mean in simple language? How far away is the digitized location from
the true location? When you digitize a point, the digitized location is probably not
exact. You cannot determine how far away it actually is, but you can say there is a
percentage chance that it is within a given distance from the true location by using a
86
standard normal probability table. It can be stated that a point has some percent
chance of being a certain distance from its true location, or that a certain percentage
of points lie within a certain distance of their true location. Here is a short probabilities
table giving you an idea of several percentages assigned to numbers of RMS distances.
Within this Distance Chance of Occurrence

(0.5)*RMS distance 38.3%
This table shows how to use the RMS values to determine the chances that a digitized
point will lie within a certain distance from its true location. If we take the first row of
the table as an example, it shows that there is a 38.3 percent chance that a digitized
point will lie within one-half of the RMS distance (0.5*RMS distance) of its true
location. So, if your project uses feet for units, and the RMS value is 10, there is a
38.3 percent chance that a digitized point lies within 5 feet of the true location
(0.5*10). Alternatively, assume a project RMS is calculated to be 16.40. Another way
of using these RMS values is to say that 99.7 percent of all digitized points lie within
49.20 units of their true locations (3*RMS distance or 3.0 * 16.40 = 49.20).
Calculating Allowable or Acceptable RMS Error

Allowable RMS error defines the accuracy standard you want to apply to your Didger
project. It is a measure of the level of confidence you can apply to the data you
digitize. Before you begin a project, you should determine the level of acceptable
error. In addition, regardless of the standards you apply, it is a good idea to always
check the RMS value before proceeding with your project. For example, if you
inadvertently enter incorrect coordinates for your calibration, this can be reflected in
the RMS value.
Different projects require different allowable RMS errors.

• Some projects might require a high level of confidence as to the digitized data
accuracy. For example, you might need to record the positions of underground
utility lines before you begin excavating in an area. This would require that
you had a high degree of confidence in your data before proceeding with the
87
Didger
project. In this case, you might want a relatively low RMS value for your
project.
• Some projects do not require very stringent error parameters. For example, if
your project is digitizing sample points you recorded by hand on a topographic
map (the map positions were only approximated to begin with), you might not
care as much about the digitizing accuracy because the point location is
slightly suspect. Under these conditions, the actual RMS value is not as
important, although you should at least look at the RMS value to determine if
it appears realistic for your project.
The key point with RMS values is to establish what the acceptable error for your
project is, and make sure the calibration RMS error falls within the acceptable
parameters. If your company uses established standards, then they can be employed
for your Didger project. If you have no established standards, you can define them
any way you want. Just decide how accurate you want your data to be, and follow the
guidelines discussed below to achieve those standards.
You can think of allowable RMS error as acceptable error on the ground. If you were to
locate a digitized point on the ground, how far off can you afford to be, and with what
certainty? This acceptable error on the ground determines the allowable RMS.
Allowable RMS error is defined by the formula
where
• Allowable RMS is the RMS value that is at or within the standards you set for
your project. RMS is the standard deviation of errors reported for all digitized
calibration points.
• Acceptable Error on the Ground is the distance, at true scale (1:1), from the
true location that digitized points represent. If you determine the exact real-
world location of a digitized point from your document, the acceptable error
represents the possible distance from the true location for the point.
• The RMS Factor is the number of standard deviations (RMS distances)
represented by an acceptable chance of occurrence. From the table shown
previously, the RMS factors are 0.5 for 38.3 percent, 1.0 for 68.3 percent, 1.5
for 86.6 percent, 2.0 for 95.4 percent, 2.5 for 98.8 percent, and 3.0 for 99.7
percent. These values are equivalent to the Z score from a standard normal
probability table.
88
For example, let’s say you wanted to be 95.4 percent sure (RMS factor = 2) that
digitized points were within five units (acceptable error on the ground) of their true
location. In this case, the allowable RMS would be
During calibration of this example, you would need to be sure that your RMS value
was at or below 2.5.
An Example of Allowable Error Based on Map Scale

After you export your data from Didger, you can use the exported data to produce a
map. You can determine the standards you want to apply to your projects, or you can
use official standards. For example, the 1947 revision of the United States Map
Accuracy Standards states that no more than 10 percent of points on a map are more
than 0.033 inches off on a 1:20,000 scale or smaller map, or no more than 0.02
inches off on a map at a larger scale than 1:20,000.
Let’s say you want to determine your own standards using a 1:24,000 scale base map
and you want the digitized points to be within 0.05 inches of their true map position.
Your standards require that you are 95 percent sure that your points are within this
limit. In other words, when you produce a 1:24,000 map of the digitized data, you are
95 percent sure that the plotted positions are within 0.05 inches of their true location.
With this information, you can determine the acceptable RMS error for your project.
If you calibrate the map using feet as the calibration point units, the RMS value is also
in feet. To calculate an acceptable RMS value, you must translate the acceptable map
error (0.05 inches) to acceptable error on the ground (the error at true scale). Ground
error is based on map error, so you can convert required map error to required ground
error. This is done using the formula
Acceptable Ground Error = Acceptable map error * Scale * units conversion

so
Acceptable Ground Error = 0.05 inch * 24,000 * 0.083 feet/inch = 99.6 feet
From this you can determine the acceptable RMS. Remember that you want to be 95
percent sure that your digitized information is within the limit, which corresponds to
about two RMS distances (two standard deviations).
89
Didger
so
An Example of Allowable Error Based on a Percentage Value

As an example, county surveyors might be digitizing the location of underground water
mains in an area where you are planning to excavate. Their standards might require
no more than three chances out of 1000 that an excavation planned to be 10 feet from
the main might actually hit the water main. In other words, you can be 99.7 percent
sure of not hitting the water main.
In this case, the equation is
so
Spatial Transformation Methods

In Didger, you can calibrate a project, warp an image, or convert coordinates with
one of several spatial transformation methods, called Georeference Methods and Warp
Methods in Didger. Calibration, image warping, and converting coordinates involve
the process of mapping source coordinates to destination coordinates. These three
processes require that several points with known coordinates are located in the
original project. These points are known as calibration points or control points. With
these known points and the selected transformation method, Didger maps the known
points to the desired points. The points cannot fall into a straight line.
The spatial transformation methods correct for translation, rotation, and differential
scaling. Spatial transformation is analogous to stretching and pinning a rubber sheet.
90
The sheet is pinned down in various locations (control points) and is consequently
stretched and contracted between these points. Spatial transformations can stretch
the project in several different directions at one time. Therefore, it is beneficial to
define more control points where distortion is greatest.
A generalized discussion of the spatial transformation methods follows below. For

mathematical details, refer to one of the references. A graphical illustration of each
method is included. Keep in mind that the results are dependant upon the mapping
from the source control points to the destination control points and the spatial
transformation selected. In this case, the graphics are exaggerated for detail.
If a selected spatial transformation method is incompatible with the number of control

points, Didger replaces the method with the best method available. If you are unsure
of which method to use, select Affine Polynomial.
Affine Polynomial
The most common transformation is Affine Polynomial. Affine transformations are a
subset of bilinear transformations. Bilinear transformations account for rotation, shift,
and differential scaling in X and Y. The X and Y axis orthogonality may change, but
parallel lines remain parallel. Affine polynomial transformations of a plane change
squares into parallelograms and change circles into ellipses of the same shape and
orientation. The affine polynomial transformation results may not be as good as when
using a higher order polynomial.
The minimum number of control points required for this transformation is three,
though four are required to calculate an RMS value.
The general form for affine transformations is:
This is called the six parameter affine polynomial transform.
91
Didger
The left graphic is the file before using the affine polynomial transformation. The right
graphic is the file after an affine polynomial transformation. Note that lines remain parallel.
First Order Polynomial

The 1st Order Polynomial transformation preserves equally spaced points along a line
but does not preserve diagonal lines. The equation is of the form:
The minimum number of control points required for this transformation is four.
The left graphic is the file before using the first order polynomial transformation. The right
graphic is the file after using a first order polynomial transformation. Note that lines are no longer
parallel.
92
Second Order Polynomial

The minimum number of control points required for the 2nd Order Polynomial
transformation is six. The equation is of the form:
The left graphic is the file before using the second order polynomial transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using second order polynomial transformation.
Third Order Polynomial

The minimum number of control points required for the 3rd Order Polynomial
transformation is ten. The equation is of the form:
The left graphic is the file before using the third order polynomial transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using third order polynomial transformation.
93
Didger
Thin Plate Spline

Radial basis functions include the Thin Plate Spline, Natural Cubic Spline, Marcov
Spline, Exponential Spline, and Rational Quadratic Spline. These methods are best for
correcting local distortions. RMS values are not reported when using radial basis
function methods as these methods are perfect interpolators at the control points.
The minimum number of control points required for the Thin Plate Spline
transformation is four. The equation is of the form:
The left graphic is the file before using the thin plate spline transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using a thin plate spline transformation.
94
Natural Cubic Spline

The minimum number of control points required for the Natural Cubic Spline
The left graphic is the file before using the natural cubic spline transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using a natural cubic spline transformation.
Marcov Spline
The minimum number of control points required for the Marcov Spline transformation
is four. The equation is of the form:
The left graphic is the file before using the Marcov spline transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using a Marcov spline transformation.
95
Didger
Exponential Spline
The minimum number of control points required for the Exponential Spline
The left graphic is the file before using the exponential spline transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using an exponential spline transformation.
96
Rational Quadratic Spline

The minimum number of control points required for the Rational Quadratic Spline
The left graphic is the file before using the rational quadratic spline transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using a rational quadratic spline transformation.
97
Didger
Inverse Distance Squared

The Inverse Distance Squared method is an inverse distance to a power method. The
minimum number of control points required for this transformation is four. A RMS
value is not reported for this method because this method is a perfect interpolator at
the control points. The equation is of the form:
The left graphic is the file before using the inverse distance squared transformation.
The right graphic is the file after using an inverse distance squared transformation.
Spatial Transformation Methods References

Chalermwat, Prachya, High Performance Automatic Image Registration for Remote
Sensing, http://science.gmu.edu/~prachya/thesis/#_Toc467903485, July 30,
2001.
Crane, Randy (1996), A Simplified Approach to Image Processing: Classic and
Modern Techniques in C, Prentice Hall, 336 pp.
Fogel, David N., Image Rectification with Radial Basis Functions: Application to
RS/GIS Data Integration, http://www.ncgia.ucsb.edu/conf/SANTA_FE_CD-
ROM/sf_papers/fogel_david/santafe.html, July 30, 2001.
Gong, Peng, Remote Sensing and Image Analysis, 4.4 Georeferencing (Geometric
Correction),
http://www.cnr.berkeley.edu/~gong/textbook/chapter4/html/sect44.htm,
July 30, 2001.
Gong, Peng, Remote Sensing and Image Analysis, 4.5 Image Resampling,
http://www.cnr.berkeley.edu/~gong/textbook/chapter4/html/sect45.htm,
July 30, 2001.
98
Glynn, Earl F., Image Processing,

http://www.efg2.com/Lab/Library/ImageProcessing/Algorithms.htm#ImageR
egistration, July 30, 2001.
Wolberg, George, (1990) Digital Image Warping, IEEE Computer Society Press
Monograph, 340 pp.
99
Didger
100
Chapter 4
Drawing Objects
Draw Menu Commands
The Draw menu has commands to create text, polygons, polylines, symbols,
rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, and spline polylines. In addition, you can
reshape polylines and polygons, convert polylines to polygons and polygons to
polylines, combine or split islands and lakes, connect multiple polylines, or break a
polyline into multiple parts. Editing objects is discussed in Chapter 5.
Text
Click the Draw | Text command or click the button to create a text object. Unlike
a label, text objects are not directly associated with other object types. The typeface,
size, style, alignment, opacity, and color can be set for individual characters in a text
blocks.
This is a text object with

selected text properties.
Drawing Text
To create text:
1. Click the Draw | Text command, or click the button.

2. The cursor changes to a cross hair. Left-click in the plot window where you want
text to appear.
3. Enter text into the Text Editor dialog.
4. Highlight the text to be changed and set the properties by clicking the appropriate
button or option in the Text Editor dialog. The math text instructions are not used
in this dialog.
5. Click OK to return to the plot window.
6. The text appears inside a movable, sizable text box. Click on the box and drag it
to move the box to the desired location.
101
Didger
Editing Text Properties

The text can be edited in the Text Editor. To edit existing text content, double-click
on the text to open the Text Editor, or click on the text and click the <Click here to
modify the text> next to the Modify Text option in the Property Manager.
Text Properties
Text object properties can be modified through the Property Manager. Text object
properties include: Text Item Properties and Text Properties.
Default Properties
The default text properties are set by clicking the Tools | Project Settings command
and clicking on the Text Properties tab.
Text Editor
You can access the Text Editor by creating new text or by editing existing text. To
open the Text Editor with existing text, double-click on the text to open the Text
Editor.
Type or edit text in the Text Editor.
102
Text Appearance
Select a typeface from the list in the upper left corner of the dialog.
Set the size (in points) of the typeface in the box to the right of the typeface list.
Click the colored button to the right of the size box to display the color palette and
change the color for the highlighted text.
Several styles (including bold, italic, underline, and strikethrough) can be applied to
the text. Note that some typefaces, such as Symbol, do not support bold or italicized
text.
Superscripts and Subscripts

When working with superscripts and subscripts, you can type the character, highlight
it, and then click the superscript or subscript buttons. Alternatively, you can also click
the button or button and then type the characters. Click the button or
button a second time to return to the normal size font and placement.
If the default superscript or subscript placement is not sufficient, you can highlight the
text and enter a number in the box adjacent to the subscript box to raise or lower text
from the midpoint of the existing line. Click the button to reset the highlighted
character's position to the default unsuperscripted or unsubscripted position.
Sub Position
You can click in any field in a template and use the boxes below Sub
Position to modify the position of the field in a template. The values are
offsets from the main character's zero position and are in pixels. How
far each value moves the template field is determined in part by the
font size. Positive values move the field to the right and up. The Sub
Position values are only available when editing text in a template field.
Editing Tools
Text can be edited using the following tools:
• You can cut , copy , or paste selected text, or paste objects from
the clipboard into the Text Editor.
103
Didger
• Click the button to open the Symbol Properties dialog and add a symbol to
the text block.
• Click the button to open the Insert Date/Time dialog and enter the date
or time. The information entered in this dialog will automatically update every
time the Didger project is redrawn.
• Click to open the Template Library dialog and enter equations based on a
template.
• You can undo and redo actions.
• You can left justify , right justify , or center the text in the
bounding box. These options only make a difference with multiple lines of text.
• You can magnify text in the Text Editor by entering a new number in the
Zoom box. By default, the text is zoomed to a reasonable level.
• You can adjust the opacity of the selected text by entering a new number in
the Opacity box. Enter a value between zero (no opacity, full transparency)
and 100% (full opacity, no transparency).
Background
Click the Background button to open the Select Color dialog to set the background fill
pattern, color, and fill options for the text object.
Set the background color and opacity

Color
The Color is the color of the background. Click the existing color sample next to Color
to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the selected
background color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette to open the
Colors dialog and create custom colors.
104
Opacity
The Opacity controls the transparency of the foreground portion of the pattern. To
change the Opacity, highlight the existing value and type a new value. Press ENTER on
the keyboard to make the change. Alternatively, click on the to increase or
decrease the opacity value. Opacity values are between 0% (zero opacity, full
transparency) to 100% (full opacity, zero transparency).
Text Box Alignment

A reference point is the point clicked on in the view window after clicking the Draw |
Text command. The text box is horizontally and vertically aligned relative to the
reference point. The default position is that the reference point is at the upper left
corner of the bounding box (left, top).
• Right horizontally aligns the text box so that the reference point is to the right
of the text box.
• Left horizontally aligns the text box so that the reference point is to the left of
the text box.
• Center horizontally centers the text box on the reference point.
• Bottom vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is below the
text box.
• Top vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is above the text
box.
• Baseline vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is located at
the base of the text. The baseline is the imaginary line along which characters
are positioned as they are drawn. Descenders on characters are drawn below
the baseline.
To edit the alignment for text that already exists, change the options in the Text
Editor.
Resize the Text Editor

To make the Text Editor larger or smaller, click and drag on the lower left corner of
the dialog. When the dialog is the desired size, release the mouse button.
OK or Cancel
Click the OK button to save your changes and close the Text Editor. Click the Cancel
button to exit the Text Editor without saving your changes.
105
Didger
Symbol Properties Dialog

The Symbol Properties can be used to insert symbols from any font into a text block
in the Text Editor or change for selected objects in the text template.
You can set default symbol properties by clicking the Tools | Project Settings
command. In the Project Settings dialog, click on the Symbol Properties tab to
access these defaults. Changes made in the Project Settings dialog affect all
subsequent documents. Custom symbols can be created using a third party TrueType
font editing software.
Specify a Symbol Set and Symbol

in the Symbol Properties dialog.
Symbol Set
The Symbol Set displays all the fonts installed on the computer. Click on the symbol
set name and then you can choose a new font from the list.
Symbol
Click on the displayed symbol to choose a Symbol from the symbol palette. The
number of the selected symbol is indicated in the title bar above the palette and
adjacent to the symbol in the Property Manager. Add 32 if you are using font sets or
TrueType symbols, such as GSI Default Symbols.
106
The symbol index is the symbol or glyph number as it appears in the title bar above
the palette and adjacent to the symbol in the Property Manager.
Insert Date/Time Dialog
In the Text Editor dialog, click the button to open the Insert Date/Time
dialog. The date/time will update every time the project updates.
The Insert Date/Time dialog allows you to

select from many different date and time
formats, and create new formats.
Format List
Select a default format from the list. Use the vertical scroll bar to scroll through the
list. A sample of the selected format is displayed above the list.
Add
Click the Add button to open the Add Format dialog and add a new format. The Add
Format dialog is used to add a custom date/time format. The Edit Format dialog is
identical, but is used to edit existing custom date/time formats.
107
Didger
Add custom date formats

in the Add Format dialog.
Enter a new format in the New Format box. See Add or Edit Format for a list of
format examples.
Edit
Select a custom format. Click the Edit button to open the Edit Format dialog and edit
the custom format. The default formats cannot be edited.
Delete
Select an custom format. Click the Delete button to delete the custom format. The
default formats cannot be deleted.
Insert or Cancel
Click the Insert button to insert the selected date/time format. Click the Cancel button
to close the Insert Date/Time dialog without making changes.
Text Editor Template Library

You can use text templates from the Template Library to add equation formats into
the Text Editor.
Click the button in the Text Editor dialog to open the Template Library dialog.
108
Use the Template Library to insert templates that

can be used to input equations into the Text Editor.
Up/Down
Use the up and down buttons at the left side of the screen to reposition a selected
template in the library.
New
Click the New button to create a new template. The Symbol Properties dialog opens.
Select a base symbol, click OK, and the Create\Edit Template dialog appears.
Edit
Click the Edit button to edit the selected template in the Create\Edit Template
dialog.
Copy
Click the Copy button to duplicate the selected template. The copied template is
automatically pasted at the end of the template library.
109
Didger
Delete
Click the Delete button to delete a template.
Import
Click the Import button to use a different Golden Software template library file .LBT.
Insert
Click the Insert button to insert a template into the Text Editor.
Close
Click the Close button to close the template library without inserting a template into
the Text Editor.
Example
For example, to use the Template Library to create an image of the square root of a
number:
1. Click the Draw | Text command.
2. Click on the view window where you want the text to be displayed.
3. In the Text Editor dialog, click the button.
4. In the Template Library dialog, select the template and click the Insert
button.
5. In the Text Editor, the template is inserted as . Enter the numeric value, for
example the number nine, and click OK to display the in the view window.
Text Editor Create/Edit Template

To add custom templates to the Text Editor's template library, click the New button
in the Template Library dialog. To edit an existing template, select the template and
click the Edit button.
If you are creating a new template select a symbol and click the OK button before the
Create/Edit Template dialog opens.
110
Use the Create/Edit Template dialog to create new templates

or edit existing templates from the template library.
Arrow Buttons
Click the arrow buttons on the left and top sides of the dialog to position a string or a
line. The numbers at the edge of the arrow buttons show the string location.
Add String
Click the Add String button to add a text string box. Text string boxes in the templates
allow numbers or letters to be entered into the template in the Text Editor.
Add Line
Click the Add Line button to add a line to the template.
Font
Select a text string (#) and click the Font button to open the Text Properties dialog
and set the properties of the text string.
111
Didger
Set the properties of the text string in the Text Properties dialog.
Delete
Select a text string or a line, and then click the Delete button to remove it from the
template.
String Alignment
Once a text string is created (#), you can set the String Alignment of the entered text.
Text is entered after the template has been inserted into the text editor. Refer to the
Text Box Alignment section of the Text Editor topic for more information on alignment.
Line Alignment
You can set the Line Alignment to extend to the right, left, top, or bottom of the
marker by selecting a line and clicking one of the Line Alignment buttons. The line
length depends on the bounding box size.
Use the Line Alignment buttons to

determine how lines are drawn.
Main Symbol
Click the Main Symbol button open the Symbol Properties dialog and change the main
symbol appearing in the template.
To delete the main symbol, click the Main Symbol button to open the Symbol
Properties dialog. Choose an empty symbol box, such as symbol number zero.
112
Test
Click the Test button to open the Test Template dialog and see how the template will
appear in the Text Editor.
1. Use the Symbol Set menu to select a set of symbols or text.
2. Highlight the desired symbol and click OK. The Create/Edit Template dialog
opens.
3. Use the following instructions with the Create/Edit Template dialog.
The Test Template dialog displays the final template.
Text Editor Template Editor Example

When entering complex equations in a text box, it is sometimes necessary to create
one or more templates to create the equation. When the templates are created they
can be inserted into the text box. Templates can be imbedded within other templates.
The following example contains two templates: a square root template and a division
template.
Example 1 - Square Root Template

This example creates a square root template that will be used in the second example.
1. In the plot window, click the Draw | Text command or click the button.
2. Click on the screen where the text should be located and the Text Editor opens.
3. Click the button in the Text Editor to open the Template Library dialog.
4. Click New in the Template Library dialog. The Symbol Properties dialog opens.
5. In the Symbol Properties dialog, scroll down and select the square root symbol
and click OK. (The square root symbol is number 182 near the bottom of the
Symbol set.)
113
Didger
6. The Create/Edit Template dialog opens with the square root symbol in the
center of the main window. Click Add String in the Create/Edit Template dialog
and a pound symbol appears.
Clicking the Add String button

creates a pound symbol.
7. Set the Horizontal String Alignment to Left so the top line will grow with the text
entered into the box.
8. Use the arrow buttons on the left and top sides of the dialog to position the string
to the right of the square root sign.
Use the up/down and left/right arrows to move the

pound sign to the right of the square root symbol.
114
9. Click Add Line.
10. Click Extend Right in the Line Alignment group box.

11. Use the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to position the line above the string
and to the upper right side of the square root sign.
Position the line so it is next

to the square root symbol.
12. Click Test to view the final template. Click Close in the Test Template dialog.
13. Click OK to add this template to the template library. Leave the Template Library
dialog open for the next example.
Example 2 - Division Template

This example uses the square root template created in the first example.
1. Click New in the Template Library dialog.
2. In the Symbol Properties dialog, Select empty symbol for the main symbol and
click OK . The empty symbol is the first symbol ( number zero) in the Symbol set.
3. Click Add Line in the Create/Edit Template dialog.
4. Click Extend Right in the Line Alignment group box.

5. Click Add String.
6. Use the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to position the string above the line,
and to the right of the line symbol.
7. Click Add String again.
115
Didger
8. Use the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to position the second string below
and to the right of the line symbol.
The two string symbols appear to the upper

right and lower right of the line symbol.
9. Click Test to view the template. Click Close in the Test Template dialog.
10. Click OK to add this template to the template library. Leave the Template Library
dialog open for the next example.
Using Multiple Templates

Once these templates have been created, they can be inserted into the Text Editor.
Templates can be inserted into other templates.
To create the dividing/square root equation:
1. If the template library is not open, in the Text Editor click the button to open
the Template Library.
2. Highlight the new square root template in the Template Library, and click Insert.
3. You will be asked to save the changes in the template library. Click Yes. The
square root symbol appears in the Text Editor.
4. You may want to make the symbol larger. Adjust the Zoom of the image with the
zoom up arrow.
5. Click inside the text box underneath the square root sign.
116
6. Click to open the Template Library.

7. Click the newly created division template in the Template Library and click
Insert.
8. The division template is inserted under the square root sign.
9. Click in the numerator box and type the letter X.
10. Click in the denominator box and type the number 2.
Once the text is entered into the templates the substrings (added lines or added
symbols) can be moved around. For example, the top line on the square root symbol
may not quite touch the square root. Select the line by clicking just to the left of the
line where the pound sign (#) would be in the Create/Edit Template dialog. Use the
Sub Position boxes in the Text Editor to move the line around.
Polygon
A polygon is represented by a closed shape in a Didger project, and can have up to
256 associated IDs. Polygons are composed of straight-line segments defined by
vertices, in which the starting and ending vertex is the same. Polygons are shown with
a combination of line style, line color, fill pattern, fill color, and Primary ID label.
Polygons must have at least three vertices.
This is a polygon object with

line and fill properties.
Drawing a Polygon
To draw a polygon:
1. Click the Draw | Polygon command, click the button, or press CTRL+G on
the keyboard.
2. The cursor changes to a cross hair cursor to indicate drawing mode.
3. Enter any information about the polygon, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
117
Didger
4. Move the cursor over the location for the start of the polygon and click the left
mouse button.
5. Move the cursor to the next position along the line and click again.
6. Continue this procedure until you click the final point. Then press the ENTER key.
7. The first and last points are automatically connected and the new polygon is
drawn. To end draw polygon mode, click on another toolbar button or press the
ESC key on your keyboard.
Polygons can also be created from polylines using some of the commands in the Draw
| Change Boundary Type and Draw | Edit Boundaries sections.
Editing Polygon Properties

The polygon can be edited by clicking once on the polygon to select it. Polygon object
properties are displayed in the Property Manager. Polygon object properties
include:Polygon Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, Fill Properties, and
Label Properties.
Default Properties
The default line and fill properties are set by clicking the Tools | Project Settings
command and clicking on the Line Properties or Fill Properties tabs.
Using a Digitizing Tablet

When using the tablet pointer to digitize a polygon,
1. Calibrate the tablet by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Tablet Calibration
command, or by clicking the button.
2. Activate the tablet by pressing F9 on the keyboard, clicking the button, or

clicking the Draw | Tablet | Activate Tablet command.
Drawing Tips
• Click points on the page to draw a polygon, or click and hold the left mouse
button and drag the cursor to draw a continuous stream of points.
• When creating a continuous stream, the minimum distance between vertices is
controlled by the Vertex Tolerance.
• Click the right mouse button to remove the last drawn point. This can be done
repeatedly.
118
• If the CTRL key is pressed while clicking points, the created vertex is snapped
to the nearest vertex on an existing polyline or polygon. You can also use the
Button Settings Snap Vertex option to simulate this action.
• If the ALT key is pressed while clicking points, the created vertex is snapped to
the nearest position along a line segment of an existing polyline or polygon.
This point is not necessarily at the position of a vertex along the existing line,
just the closest position along that line. You can also use the Button Settings
Snap Line Segment option to simulate this action.
• If the CTRL key and SHIFT key are pressed while clicking points, lines are
constrained to 45-degree angles.
• Double-click the left mouse button or press the ENTER key to close the
polygon.
• To cancel drawing a polygon, press the ESC key before closing the polygon.
• Edit the polygon shape by using Draw | Reshape.
• Edit polygons by clicking on the polygon in the plot window or in the Data
Manager.
• Set default line and fill properties with the Tools | Project Settings
command.
• Zoom while in drawing mode by scrolling the mouse wheel. Alternatively,
press the NUMLOCK key on the keyboard to ensure Number Lock is on. Then,
use the + and - keys on the numeric keypad to zoom in and out.
• Scroll while in drawing mode by pressing the mouse wheel down and panning
the screen. Alternatively, press the NUMLOCK key on the keyboard to ensure
Number Lock is on. Then, use the 4, 8, 6, and 2 keys to scroll left, up, right,
and down.
Polyline
A polyline is represented by a line in a Didger project, and can have up to 256
associated attributes. Polylines are composed of straight-line segments defined by
nodes and vertices.
This is a polyline object with

line properties and vertex
tolerance circles.
119
Didger
Drawing a Polyline
To draw a polyline:
1. Click the Draw | Polyline command, click the button, or press CTRL+L on
the keyboard to begin drawing a polyline.
3. Enter any information about the polyline, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
4. Move the cursor over the location for the start of the polyline and click the left
mouse button.
6. Continue this procedure until you click at the final point for the line. Press the
ENTER key.
7. To end drawing mode, click on another tool button or press the ESC key on your
keyboard.
Editing Polyline Properties

The polyline can be edited by clicking once on the polyline to select it. Polyline object
properties can be modified through the Property Manager. Polyline properties
include: Polyline Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, and Label
Properties.
Default Properties
The default line properties are set by clicking the Tools | Project Settings command
and clicking on the Line Properties tab.


120
Drawing Tips
• Click the endpoints of the line to draw a straight line, or click several points to
create an irregularly shaped line.
repeatedly.
• Click and hold the left mouse button to create a continuous stream of points.
• When creating a continuous stream, the minimum distance between vertices is
controlled by the Vertex Tolerance.
• If the CTRL key is pressed while clicking points, the created vertex is snapped
to the nearest vertex on an existing polyline or polygon. You can also use the
Button Settings Snap Vertex option to simulate this action.
• If the ALT key is pressed while clicking points, the created vertex is snapped to
the nearest position along a line segment of an existing polyline or polygon.
This point is not necessarily at the position of a vertex along the existing line,
just the closest position along that line. You can also use the Button Settings
Snap Line Segment option to simulate this action.
• If the CTRL key and SHIFT key are pressed while clicking points, lines are
constrained to 45-degree angles.
• Double-click the left mouse button or press the ENTER key to end the line.
• To cancel drawing the line, press the ESC key before ending the line.
• Edit the shape of the line using Draw | Reshape.
• Edit the line style and color by clicking on the line in the plot window or in the
Data Manager.
• Set default line properties with the Tools | Project Settings command.
and down.
121
Didger
Symbol
Symbols are markers that are used to indicate point positions. Any TrueType font can
be used as a symbol, including several custom fonts provided with Didger. You can
use the Draw | Symbol command to place symbols in the plot document. A symbol
object can have up to 256 associated attributes.
This is a point object with selected

symbol and label properties.
Drawing a Symbol
To draw a symbol:
1. Click the Draw | Symbol command, click the button, or press CTRL+T on the
keyboard.
3. Enter any information about the symbol, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
4. Click on a location in the plot window to create a symbol.
5. Press the ESC key or click another tool button to end drawing mode.
Editing Symbol Properties

The symbol can be edited by clicking once on the symbol to select it. Symbol object
properties can be modified through the Property Manager. Symbol object properties
include: Symbol Item Properties, Data Attributes, Symbol Properties, and Label
Properties.
Default Properties
The default symbol properties are set by clicking the Tools | Project Settings
command and clicking on the Symbol Properties tab.
122


Drawing Tips
• Edit a symbol style, color, and size by clicking on the symbol in the plot
window or in the Data Manager.
• Set default symbol properties with the Tools | Project Settings command.
and down.
Rectangle
A rectangle is a special type of polygon, that contains two sets of two parallel sides of
the same length. A rectangle can have up to 256 associated IDs. Rectangles are
shown with a combination of line style, line color, fill pattern, fill color, and Primary ID
label.
This is a rectangle object with

line and fill properties.
Drawing a Rectangle
To draw a rectangle:
1. Click the Draw | Rectangle command or click the button.
123
Didger
2. The cursor changes into a cross hair to indicate drawing mode.

3. Enter any information about the rectangle, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
4. Press and hold the left mouse button at one corner of the rectangle.
5. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the rectangle.
6. Release the left mouse button when the rectangle is the preferred size and shape.
7. Press the ESC key or click another tool button to end draw mode.

The rectangle can be edited by clicking once on the rectangle to select it. Polygon
object properties are displayed in the Property Manager. Polygon object properties
include: Polygon Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, Fill Properties, and
Label Properties.
Default Properties


Drawing Tips
• To cancel drawing a rectangle, press the ESC key before finishing the
rectangle.
Manager.
command.
124

and down.
Circle
A circle is a special type of polygon. A circle can have up to 256 associated IDs. Circles
are shown with a combination of line style, line color, fill pattern, fill color, and Primary
ID label.
This is a circle object

with fill properties.
Drawing a Circle
To draw a circle:
1. Click the Draw | Circle command or click the button.

2. The cursor changes into a cross hair to indicate drawing mode.
3. Enter any information about the circle, such as the ID, in the Property Manager.
4. There are two methods to draw a circle: the three-point method or the center-
radius method. The circle digitizing options are set in Tools | Project Settings |
General.
a. When the Use 3 Point Method box is checked, circles are defined by clicking on
three points. A circle with a perimeter intersecting the three points is
automatically entered after the third point is clicked. Click on any three points
that lie on the outside edge of the circle.
b. When the Use 3 Point Method box is not checked, circles are defined by the
center-radius method. Click the first point at the center of the circle. Click the
second point at any point on the outer edge of the circle. The circle is drawn
when you click the outer-edge point.
5. Press the ESC key or click another tool button to end draw mode.
125
Didger
Editing Circle Properties

The circle can be edited by clicking once on the circle to select it. Polygon object
properties are displayed in the Property Manager. Polygon object properties include:
Polygon Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, Fill Properties, and Label
Properties.
Default Properties


Spline Polyline
A spline polyline is a polyline object, digitized like a polyline, but with different results.
A spline polyline uses a smoothing algorithm to add points between digitized vertices.
A spline polyline must be created from three or more points.
This spline polyline was created with five mouse clicks.
Drawing a Spline Polyline

To draw a spline polyline:
1. Click the Draw | Spline Polyline command or click the button to begin
drawing a spline polyline.
3. Enter any information about the spline polyline, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
126
mouse button.
5. Move the cursor to the next position along the line and click again. A curved line
connects the first and second points.
ENTER key.
keyboard.
To adjust the tension of the spline press the UP or DOWN arrow keys while drawing
the spline polyline.
Editing Polyline Properties

The polyline can be edited by clicking once on the polyline to select it. Polyline object
properties can be modified through the Property Manager. Polyline properties
include: Polyline Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, and Label
Properties.
Default Properties
The default line properties are set by clicking the Tools | Project Settings command
and clicking on the Line Properties tab.


Drawing Tips
repeatedly.
• Double-click the left mouse button or press the ENTER key to end the line.
• To cancel drawing the line, press the ESC key before ending the line.
• Edit the shape of the line using Draw | Reshape.
127
Didger
• Edit the line style and color by clicking on the line in the plot window or in the
Data Manager.
• Set default line properties with the Tools | Project Settings command.
and down.
• To adjust the tension of the spline press the UP or DOWN arrow keys while
drawing the spline polyline.
Spline Polygon
A spline polygon is a polygon object, digitized like a polygon, but with different results.
A spline polygon uses a smoothing algorithm to add points between digitized vertices.
This spline polygon was created

with five mouse clicks.
Drawing a Spline Polygon

To draw a spline polygon:
1. Click the Draw | Spline Polygon command or click the button to begin
drawing a spline polygon.
3. Enter any information about the spline polygon, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
4. Move the cursor over the location for the start of the polygon and click the left
mouse button.
5. Move the cursor to the next position along the line and click again. Generate the
spline polygon by clicking on the anchor points during the polygon creation. The
anchor points identify a change in the spline polygon's shape and direction. Notice
128
that the spline polygon shape is visible and that you can change its curvature by
moving the mouse.
6. Continue clicking on the anchor points until you click the final point. Press the
ENTER key or double-click the left mouse button to end drawing mode. The new
spline polygon is drawn.
keyboard.
To adjust the tension of the spline press the UP or DOWN arrow keys while drawing
the spline polygon.

The polygon can be edited by clicking once on the polygon to select it. Polygon object
properties are displayed in the Property Manager. Polygon object properties include:
Polygon Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, Fill Properties, and Label
Properties.
Default Properties


Drawing Tips
repeatedly.
• Double-click the left mouse button or press the ENTER key to close the
polygon.
• To cancel drawing a polygon, press the ESC key before closing the polygon.
129
Didger
Manager.
command.
and down.
Wrapped Polyline
The Draw | Wrapped Polyline command is used to create a wrapped polyline, a
common function in well log digitizing. This allows logs to be digitized with multiple
scales when logs have curves off scale. Once the polyline creation is complete, the
program automatically constructs the curve segments into a single polyline.
Drawing a Wrapped Polyline

To draw a wrapped polyline:
1. Click the Draw | Wrapped Polyline command to begin drawing a wrapped
polyline.
2. The Construct Wrapped Polyline dialog appears. Set the Minimum Value,
Maximum Value, Wrapping Scale, and the Un-Wrap Along Y Axis options and click
OK.
4. Enter any information about the polyline, such as the ID, in the Property
Manager.
mouse button.
7. When the line goes off scale, press the F4 key on the keyboard.
8. Move the cursor to the off scale position and click again.
9. When the line returns to the regular scale, press the SHIFT+F4 keys on the
keyboard to return to the regular scale.
ENTER key.
130
keyboard.
Construct Wrapped Polyline Dialog

The Construct Wrapped Polyline dialog appears after clicking the Draw | Wrapped
Polyline command.
Set the wrapping options in the Construct Wrapped Polyline dialog.
Wrap Limits
The Wrap Limits section controls the Minimum Value and Maximum Value of the curve.
To change the Minimum Value or Maximum Value, highlight the existing value and
type a new value.
Wrapping Scale
The Wrapping Scale option controls the number of scales displayed on the log. The
default value is 1. When a log wraps more than once around the log, Didger allows
you to enter that number as the Wrapping Scale. To change the Wrapping Scale,
highlight the existing value and type a new value.
Un-Wrap Along Y Axis

The Un-Wrap Along Y Axis option controls whether the graph is oriented in the Y
direction. If the polyline is vertical in orientation, leave the box unchecked. For a
horizontal polyline, check this box.
131
Didger
The above figure represents a well log with curves off scale.
In this instance, the Minimum Value is 30 and the Maximum
Value is 130. The Wrapping Scale is 1. The scale is along
the X Axis, so the Un-Wrap Along Y Axis is unchecked.
132
Polygon Marker
The Draw | Polygon Marker command creates a polygon marker. A polygon marker
is a symbol, but has a special use for the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create
Polygons by Locator command. Didger stores an internal setting to differentiate a
polygon marker from a normal symbol. If you draw a polygon marker in the middle of
some snapped polyline segments, you can use the Create Polygons by Locator
command to generate a polygon from the polylines.
Introduction to Complex Polygons

Complex polygons can be made from polygons that are touching or are completely
separate, or can even use one polygon contained completely inside another polygon.
Each individual polygon in the group is called an island. An example of islands that can
form a complex polygon is the Hawaiian Islands. You can also have one polygon
completely inside another polygon. This is referred to as a lake. Lakes form holes in a
complex polygon so you can see through the lake to any underlying objects. If one
polygon is inside another polygon, the inside polygon becomes a hole inside the larger
polygon so you can see through to any underlying objects.
Complex polygons can be separate islands

as shown for Hawaii (top), or can contain lakes
that form holes in the larger area (bottom).
133
Didger
Create Several Objects

The procedure for drawing several objects is the same when drawing a point, polyline,
polygon, rectangle, or circle. To draw several objects of the same type, go to the
Draw menu and click on the object type you wish to draw. By default, the Create
Several option in the Increment Settings section of the Property Manager is
checked.
Create Several Objects

The Create Several check box lets you draw any number of objects in succession
without choosing the draw command each time. This option is especially helpful when
you are drawing several objects of the same type. For example, if you are drawing
several symbols you should activate this option.
IDs
There are two methods to assign IDs when drawing multiple objects. You can enter
the IDs after each object is drawn, or you can have Didger auto-increment the IDs if
the IDs are sequential.
Enter Data After Creation

In the Increment Settings section of the Property Manager, the Enter Data After
Creation check box lets you draw objects first, and enter the IDs for the object
immediately after it is created. For example, if you are drawing symbols, you can click
the symbol on the tablet and the Enter Object Data dialog is displayed. Enter the
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, Quaternary, or any additional IDs you want to associate
with the point and click OK. The IDs are associated with the symbol.
134
Enter any IDs associated with the object

just drawn in the Enter Object Data dialog.
Creating Several Objects with Different IDs

You can create several objects without selecting the Symbol, Polyline, Polygon,
Circle, or Rectangle command each time. In this case, you can create the object and
enter the unique Object IDs for each object after it is digitized. For example, you
might have several well locations on a map with different well names and different
data values (such as water depth or contaminant values) and want to quickly enter the
points into your Didger project. Didger makes this easy by following these steps.
To enter IDs after digitizing objects:

1. Choose the appropriate command from the Draw menu or click a drawing button
on the toolbar.
a. Specify the properties you want to apply to the objects, such as the symbol,
line color, or fill color.
b. In the Increment Settings section, check the box next to the Enter Data After
Creation option.
135
Didger
c. In the Increment Settings section, check the box next to the Create Several
option.
3. Move the pointer over the first location and click to draw the object, following the
steps on the object help page.
4. When the object is finished, the Enter Object Data dialog appears. Enter the IDs
for the object just created and click OK.
5. Continue drawing the rest of the objects and entering the IDs associated with each
object.
6. When you have drawn the last object, either use the mouse to click another button
on the toolbar or press the ESC key on the keyboard to end drawing mode.
Creating Several Objects with Sequential IDs

There might be times when you have several objects with sequential IDs. In this case,
you can use the auto increment settings to automatically assign the IDs as you digitize
the objects. In this case, you do not have to choose the Draw command for each
object to be digitized.
To automatically increment IDs:

1. Choose the appropriate command from the Draw menu or click a drawing button
on the toolbar.
a. Specify the properties you want to apply to the objects in the Property
Manager.
b. In the Increment Settings section, uncheck the box next to the Enter Data
After Creation option.
c. In the Increment Settings section, uncheck the box next to the Create Several
option.
d. In the Increment Settings section, check the box next to the Auto Increment
option.
e. Specify the Starting Increment Value, Ending Increment Value, Increment
Value, ID Prefix, and ID Suffix to use.
3. Move the pointer over the first location and click to draw the object. The new
object is drawn in the project, using the first ID based on the increment settings.
4. Continue clicking on the objects and the Primary ID is sequentially changed based
on the Increment Value. After the last object is digitized (based on the Ending
Increment Value), the pointer returns to the select mode.
136
Tips on Drawing Several Objects

• The Starting Increment Value is the first value used for drawing objects. When
set to zero, the first object will contain the value zero in the Primary ID. When
set to 1201, the first object will contain the value 1201 in the Primary ID.
• The Ending Increment Value determines the last value used for drawing
objects. When the last value is reached, drawing mode automatically ends.
• The Increment Value determines how many values are added after the
Starting Increment Value for the second, third, fourth, etc. values.
• The ID Prefix is used before the Starting Increment Value to name the object
in the Primary ID.
• The ID Suffix is used after the Starting Increment Value to name the object in
the Primary ID.
Drawing Several Objects Example

As an example, suppose you want to draw 5 objects with the prefix of MW- and no
suffix. Object names should be MW-1, MW-2, MW-3, MW-4, and MW-5. Set the
Starting Increment Value to 1, the Ending Increment Value to 5, the Increment Value
to 1, the ID Prefix to MW-, and leave the ID Suffix empty. Click on the screen in five
locations and the five symbols with the object names MW-1, MW-2, MW-3, MW-4, and
MW-5 are created.
137
Didger
138
Chapter 5
Editing Objects
Object Types
Didger allows you to convert symbol, polyline, polygon, text, and image objects from
your paper documents or imported files into digital format. Every object digitized or
imported into Didger has associated XY coordinates that define the object location
and can have up to 256 associated attributes. These attributes can be used to assign
names, data, or any type of descriptive text to an object.
Didger objects are represented in your project using special drawing properties, such
as fill patterns and color. You can control the properties with the Property Manager
for each object you create.
Symbols
Symbols are isolated locations that indicate objects such as well locations, sample
locations, benchmarks, and so on. In Didger, polygon markers are a special type of
symbol. Post maps, created by importing a data file, also consist of symbols. Symbols
have Symbol Item Properties, Data Attributes, Symbol Properties, and Label
Properties.
The IDs associated with symbols can provide information such as:
• well names
• technician name
• contamination levels
• water depth
• elevation
• sample number
• date of sample
• assay value
• porosity This is a symbol
• or any other type of data with a label.
139
Didger
Editing Point Properties

After you have created points in Didger, you can edit the point properties, including
the symbol properties and the IDs for the points. This step shows you how to gain
access to the point properties, and where you can go to change any of the point
properties.
Editing Properties for One Point at a Time

When you want to edit the properties or IDs for a single point, you can double-click
the point to display the point attributes in the Data Manager, the point symbol
properties in the Property Manager, and the XY coordinates in the Coordinate
Manager.
Editing Properties for All Points

The properties of several selected points can be changed at one time.
To change the symbol properties of several selected points:

1. Open the Propertry Manager.
2. Select several points.
3. Once all points are selected, click the Symbol Properties page in the Property
Manager.
4. Change the color, symbol, and size to whatever you like.
Polylines
Polylines indicate objects such as roads, streams, contours, township and range lines,
or partial area boundaries such as county or state boundaries that might pass through
a map area. A polyline consists of one or more line segments joined end to end.
Polylines, unlike polygons, are not closed. The beginning and ending points of a
polyline are called nodes, and the intermediate ends to each line segment are called
vertices. Polyline nodes are displayed as green (beginning) and red (ending) boxes
when the Show Line Nodes box is checked in Tools | Project Settings | Tolerance
Settings. Polylines are also called curves or lines. In Didger, spline polylines and
wrapped polylines are special types of polylines. Polyline objects have Polyline Item
Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, and Label Properties.
140
The IDs associated with polylines can provide information such as:
• road name
• stream name
• stream flow for stream segments
• contour value (elevation)
• township or range indicators
• and so on
This is a polyline displaying line nodes.
Polygons
Polygons are closed shapes such as county or state boundaries, project areas, and
claim boundaries. Polygon perimeters are defined by a series of straight-line segments
joined end to end. A polygon contains at least three line segments, and the beginning
of the first line segment is joined to the end of the final line segment to achieve
closure. Vertices define the end of each straight-line segment along a polygon. In
Didger, rectangles, circles, and spline polygons are special types of polygons.
Polygons have Polygon Item Properties, Data Attributes, Line Properties, Fill
Properties, and Label Properties.
The IDs associated with polygons can provide information such as:
• county or state name
• area name
• number of samples or wells in an area
• claim number
• claim ownership
• and so on
141
Didger
This is an example of a filled polygon.
Text
Text is defined as an object type in Didger and, unlike labels, text is not directly
associated with other object types. Text objects are created for display purposes and
are not generally used for analysis. The information stored for text includes a text
string, the location at which it is displayed, and text properties (color, font, size, etc.).
Text has Text Item Properties and Text Properties.
This is an example of a text object.
Images
An image is displayed as an array of dots or pixels. There are two ways of storing,
representing, or displaying spatial data in digital form: images and vector data.
Images, such as . JPG or .GIF, are displayed as an array of dots or pixels and contain
information on each and every pixel. The resolution of an image changes when the
image is resized or stretched. Images have Image Item Properties.
This is an image displaying an urban area.
142
Property Manager
The Property Manager allows you to edit the properties of a selected object. The
Property Manager contains a list of all properties of the selected object. The
Property Manager can be left open so that the properties of the selected object are
always visible.
For information on a specific feature or property that is shown in the Property

Manager, refer to the help page for that feature. For instance, if you are interested in
determining how to set the fill opacity for a rectangle or how to assign a primary ID to
an object, refer to the specific pages for fill properties or data attributes. Refer to the
Property Manager section in Chapter 1 for specific information about the Property
Manager.
Object Properties
To change the properties of an existing object, click the object in the plot window. All
of the properties for the selected object are listed in the Property Manager. Each
object type contains a unique set of properties that you can change and view through
the Property Manager.
Item Properties
The Item Properties section of the Property Manager displays information about
the selected object in the current project depending on the object type.
The Item Properties section contains

information about the digitized object.
Item Properties by object type:

• Symbol objects contain Layer and Visible
• Polyline objects contain Layer, Visible, Length, and Point Count
• Polygon objects contain Layer, Visible, Length, Area, Point Count, and
Direction
• Text objects contain Layer and Visible
143
Didger
• Image objects contain Layer, Visible, Image Width, Image Height, Geo-
Referenced, Clipped Image, and File Name
Property Description
Layer This row displays the layer on which the object exists.
You can also move objects to other layers through the
Property Manager.
Visible This row allows you to display the visibility of an object
type. Select True to make the object visible. Select False
to make the object not visible.
Length This row displays the length of a polyline or the perimeter
length of a polygon. The units of the length measurement
are set during calibration or in Tools | Project Settings |
General.
Point Count This row displays the number of vertices in a polygon or
polyline.
Area This row displays the area of a polygon. The units of the
area calculation are set during calibration or in Tools |
Project Settings | General. Area is not reported when the
project is in the Unprojected Lat/Long projection.
Direction This row displays the direction of the polygon vertices.
Reverse is counterclockwise and Forward is clockwise.
Polygon direction can be reversed with Draw | Reverse
Direction.
Image Width This row displays the image width in pixels.
Image Height This row displays the image height in pixels.
Color Format This row displays the current color format of the current
image.
Geo-Referenced This row displays whether the image is geo-referenced. A
True is displayed if the image is geo-referenced. A False is
displayed if the image is not geo-referenced.
Clipped Image This row displays whether the image has been clipped. A
True is displayed if the image was clipped. A False is
displayed if the image was not clipped.
File Name This row displays the complete directory path and file
name of the image.
144
Data Attributes Properties

Data attributes are the Object IDs assigned to an object when it is digitized. In this
way, you associate data with an object, such as assigning a well name to a point or
assigning a sample datum value (such as contamination, elevation, assay) to a point.
When you digitize an object, you can assign the object IDs to the digitized object. In
Didger, objects can have more than 256 different IDs.
The Data Attributes section of the Property Manager

displays all of the IDs associated with the selected object.
Enter Field Data Attributes

By default, there are four IDs associated with every object. Each ID can either be a
descriptive name or a data value. The four default IDs are Primary, Secondary,
Tertiary, and Quaternary.
Additional IDs can be listed here if other IDs have been defined in the project. This can
occur when you import a file with other IDs or if you have selected the Map | Data |
Edit Attribute Fields and added additional IDs.
145
Didger
Increment Settings Properties

The Increment Settings section contains options to set multiple object properties at
once, when creating the objects.
The Increment Settings section of the Property Manager

is only available when creating objects.
Enter Data After Creation

The Enter Data After Creation check box lets you digitize objects first, and then enter
the IDs for the object immediately after it is created. For example, if you are digitizing
a point, you can click the point on the tablet and the Enter Object Data dialog is
displayed. Enter the IDs you want to associate with the point and click OK. The IDs are
associated with the point.
Auto Increment Settings

The auto increment settings are useful for automatically assigning sequential Primary
IDs to several objects you might digitize during a session. For example, you might
have several sample locations with sequential numbering (MW-1, MW-2, MW-3, etc.)
that you want to digitize. Check the Auto Increment box to enable automatic
numbering of multiple created objects.
Once the Auto Increment option is checked, the Starting Increment Value, Ending
Increment Value, Increment Value, ID Prefix, and ID Suffix options become available.
The Starting Increment Value is the first value to use for the Primary ID. The Ending
Increment Value is the last value to use for the Primary ID. The Increment Value is the
value added to the Primary ID between the sequential points. The ID Prefix is the
static text placed at the beginning of each sequential ID. The ID Suffix is the static
text placed at the end of each sequential ID. The ID Prefix and ID Suffix are optional.
Automatic numbering continues until the Ending Increment Value is reached.
146
To change any of the values, highlight the existing value and type a new value. The
Starting Increment Value, Ending Increment Value, and Increment Value must be
numbers.
Create Several
The Create Several check box lets you digitize any number of objects in succession
without choosing the digitize command each time. This option is especially helpful
when you are digitizing several objects of the same type. For example, if you are
digitizing several points you should activate this option.
You can use the Enter Data After Creation and Create Several check boxes in
conjunction. For example, if you are digitizing several points, each with different IDs,
you can check both options. Click the first point, enter the data in the Enter Object
Data dialog, and click OK. Draw the next point, enter the IDs, and continue the
procedure until you have digitized all the points. Press ESC on the keyboard or Finish
on the tablet pointer (set with the Button Settings command) when you are done to
end drawing mode.
Symbol Properties
The Symbol Properties section in the Property Manager controls the symbol
properties for the selected object in the project. Symbol properties are used in
symbols.
These are the properties available for

point objects through the Property Manager.
Symbol
Choose the Symbol by clicking the existing symbol and selecting a new symbol from
the symbol palette. The number of the selected symbol is indicated in the title bar
above the palette. This number is useful when a specific symbol is desired.
147
Didger
Symbol Set
Select the Symbol Set from the list. The Symbol Set can be any TrueType font
installed on your system. To change the Symbol Set, click on the existing font name.
Select the new font from the list.
Fill Color
The Fill Color is the inside color of a solid symbol. Click the existing color sample next
to Fill Color to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the
selected foreground fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette to
open the Colors dialog and create custom colors.
Fill Opacity
Change the Fill Opacity of the symbol by highlighting the existing value and typing a
new value. Alternatively, click the buttons to increase or decrease the opacity
percentage. Percentages range from 0% (completely transparent) to 100%
(completely opaque).
Line Color
The Line Color is the outside edge color of the symbol. Click the existing color sample
next to Line Color to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for
the selected foreground fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette
to open the Colors dialog and create custom colors.
Line Opacity
Change the Line Opacity of the symbol by highlighting the existing value and typing a
new value. Alternatively, click the buttons to increase or decrease the opacity
percentage. Percentages range from 0% (completely transparent) to 100%
(completely opaque).
Size
Change the Size of the symbol by highlighting the existing value and typing a new
number into the box. Alternatively, click the buttons to increase or decrease the
symbol size. Symbols can be from 0 to 4.000 inches (0 to 10.160 centimeters) in size.
Sizes are reported in page units.
148
Line Properties
The Line Properties section in the Property Manager controls the line properties for
the selected object in the project. Polyline properties are used in polylines, polygons,
rectangles, and circles.
Click the Tools | Project Settings command or click the button to open the
Project Settings dialog. The Line Properties page controls the default line
properties.
Set the Line Properties for the selected

object in the Property Manager.
Style
The Style is the manner in which a line is drawn. Click on
the existing line style to open the line style palette. Click on
a style to use it for the selected line. Both simple and
complex lines can be selected from the list.
The line palette is opened by clicking on the line pattern.

• The name of the line appears at the top of the
palette.
• Select a line style from the palette by clicking on a
line. Alternatively, you can use the arrow keys to
move around the palette, and then press the
Use the line palette
SPACEBAR on your keyboard to select a line. to select a line or
create a custom line.
To create a custom simple line style, click the Custom
button at the bottom of the list. The Custom Line dialog allows you to create new line
styles.
149
Didger
Custom Line Style

Click the Custom button at the bottom of the line Style palette to open the Custom
Line dialog and create new simple line styles. You can add line styles to the palette,
remove line styles from the palette, or replace existing line styles in the palette.
Set the Dashes and Spaces in the Custom Line dialog.
Dashes and Spaces

The Dashes and Spaces boxes determine the pattern of the custom line. As an
example, refer to the Dash Dot line style.
The first dash is 0.200 inches, so 0.200 is entered into the first Dashes box. This is
followed by an equal length space of 0.200 inches. Enter 0.200 in the first Spaces box.
The "dot" is a line dash that is 0.030 inches long followed by a space of 0.200 inches.
So, 0.030 is entered into the second Dashes box and 0.200 is entered into the second
Spaces box. The pattern repeats after the space so no more dash/space definitions are
necessary. You can use a combination of five dashes and five spaces to create a new
line style.
Name
Click on one of the displayed line styles and the name of the selected line style
appears in the Name field. Type a new line style name in the Name field if you are
creating a custom style.
150
Sample
The Sample box shows the new line style.
Add to List
Click the Add to List button to add a new line style to the end of the line style palette.
Type the new line style name into the Name field before adding the new line style.
Replace
Click the Replace button to replace the selected line style with the modified line style.
The previous style is removed.
Remove From List

Click the Remove From List button to delete the selected line style.
Line Style Palette

The line style palette on the right side of the dialog shows all line styles. To move a
line in the palette to a new location, click on the line and drag it to a new location.
Changing the location in this dialog will change the order that lines appear in the line
palette.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to make the change. You are prompted with a dialog confirming changes.
If you click Yes, the change is permanently made to your line palette. The next time
you open Didger, this new line style will be shown. If you click No, the change is only
made to the current Didger session. When you close Didger, the custom line style is
lost.
Click Cancel to close the Custom Line dialog without making any changes.
Color
The Color is the color of the line. Click the existing color sample next to Color to open
the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the selected line. Click the
Custom button at the bottom of the palette to open the Colors dialog and create
custom color.
Width
151
Didger
The Width controls how thick a line appears. To change the line Width, highlight the
existing value and type a new number. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the
change. Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the thickness of the line.
The line Width is a value from 0.0 to 0.5 inches (0.0 to 1.27 cm). A width of zero is
one pixel wide. Values are in page coordinates.
Opacity
The Opacity controls the transparency of the line. To change the Opacity, highlight the
existing value and type a new value. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the
change. Alternatively, click on the to increase or decrease the opacity value.
Opacity values are between 0% (zero opacity, full transparency) to 100% (full opacity,
zero transparency).
Start and End Styles

The ends of the lines can have arrowheads on them. The Start Style is placed at the
first vertex of the line. The End Style is placed at the last vertex of a line. Not all lines
can have arrowheads. For example, the line surrounding a rectangle does not support
arrowheads.
Scale
The Scale determines the size of the arrowhead. A larger Scale creates a larger arrow.
To change the scale of the arrowheads, highlight the existing value and type a new
value. Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the scale. Press ENTER on
the keyboard to make the change.
152
Fill Properties
The Fill Properties section in the Property Manager controls the fill properties for
the selected object in the project. Fill properties are used in polygons, rectangles, and
circles.
Project Settings dialog. The Fill Properties page controls the default fill properties.
Set the Fill Properties for the selected

object in the Property Manager.
Pattern
The Pattern indicates the way that an object is
filled. To change the Pattern, click on the existing
pattern sample next to Pattern. In the list, select a
new pattern from the fill pattern palette. Select a
pattern by clicking on it. Alternatively, you can
use the arrow keys to move around the palette,
and then press the SPACEBAR on your keyboard
to select a pattern. The pattern name and type
appears at the top of the palette. Hold the cursor
over a pattern to display a tool tip with the
pattern name. Use the scroll bar to see all of the
available fill patterns.
There are two types of fill patterns: Windows

stock and bitmap images. Stock patterns and
some bitmap patterns can have different
foreground and background colors. All patterns
can have the foreground or background color Select a fill pattern from the
fill pattern palette.
153
Didger
partially transparent. Bitmap patterns can be scaled.
To load a fill pattern from a raster image file, click the Custom button at the bottom of
the fill pattern palette. An Import dialog will appear. Click on the image file and click
Open to load the image as the fill pattern.
Foreground
The Foreground is the color of the pattern lines or pixels. Click the existing color
sample next to Foreground to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to
use it for the selected foreground fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of
the palette to open the Colors dialog and create custom colors.
Foreground Opacity
The Foreground Opacity controls the transparency of the foreground portion of the
pattern. To change the Foreground Opacity, highlight the existing value and type a
new value. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change. Alternatively, click on
the to increase or decrease the opacity value. Opacity values are between 0% (zero
opacity, full transparency) to 100% (full opacity, zero transparency).
Background
The Background is the color behind the pattern. Click the existing color sample next to
Background to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the
selected background fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette to
Background Opacity
The Background Opacity controls the transparency of the background portion of the
pattern. To change the Background Opacity, highlight the existing value and type a
new value. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change. Alternatively, click on
the to increase or decrease the opacity value. Opacity values are between 0% (zero
opacity, full transparency) to 100% (full opacity, zero transparency).
To make a fill pattern appear transparent with only the foreground portion of the fill
pattern showing, change the Background Opacity value to 0%.
154
Scale
The Scale controls the density of the bitmap fill Pattern. The scale factor controls the
density of the pattern. Set the Cover mode to Tile and set the Scale factor to a value
between 0.1 and 10. The larger the Scale, the larger the resulting pattern.
Cover Mode
The Cover mode is used with bitmap patterns. The Cover mode determines how the
bitmap is used to fill the desired area. You can Stretch a bitmap to fit the fill area or
Tile the pattern in the fill area. To change the behavior, click on the existing value and
select the desired option from the list.
This bitmap fill has the This bitmap fill has the
Cover mode set to Stretch. Cover mode set to Tile.
155
Didger
Label Properties
Didger lets you position labels many different ways with respect to point, polyline, or
polygon objects. The Label Position Editor is available through the Property
Manager under the Label Properties section.
Set the label position and label font

properties in the Label Position Editor dialog.
Label Field Name

The Available Fields list contains the IDs available for labels. Select the ID containing
the label information from the list. Once the ID is selected, click the Add button to add
the label to the project. Alternatively, if you do not want a field labeled that has been
156
added to the list, highlight it in the Label Field Name column and click the Remove
button.
Font Properties
To change the font properties of the labels, highlight a label in the Label Field Name
list and click the Font button.
Remove Label
Click on a label in the Label Field Name list to select it and click the Remove button to
remove the label from the object.
Label Position
The label position options change according to the type of object selected. The view
window displays the options as you chose them.
Point and Polygon Labels

The point and polygon label positions are controlled through the following options.
• To set the general position of a label, use the eight small arrow buttons or the
center button. The buttons positions the object based upon the object’s
bounding box. To fine tune the label's position, change the values in the X Pos
and Y Pos fields. These values can be positive or negative and range from -2.0
inches (-5.08 cm) to +2.0 inches (+5.08 cm) in 0.01 inch increments.
• You can change the angle of the label from -360° through 360° in one-degree
increments by changing the value in the Angle field. Use the arrow buttons to
change the default angle, or type the desired angle directly in the field.
Polyline Labels
The polyline label positions are controlled through the following options.
When you select Position Along Line, you can use two fields to position the label:
• Label Alignment On - Select from the list to place the label On, Above, or
Below the polyline.
• Label Position Along - Select from the list to indicate the label position along
the polyline as Before the Start, Beginning, Middle, End, and At the End.
When you choose Position From Line Extent, the label is placed relative to the center
of the polyline's bounding box. Select from the list to place the label either in the
157
Didger
Center point of the bounding box, or to the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of the center of
the bounding box.
Introduction to Colors
Change the color of the selected item by selecting a new
color from the color palette. The color palette is opened
by clicking the color sample or button. Create new colors
by clicking the Custom button at the bottom of the color
palette.
The name of the color appears at the top of the palette.
Select a color from the palette by clicking on a color.

Alternatively, you can use the arrow keys to move
around the palette, and then press the SPACEBAR on
your keyboard to select a color. Use the color palette to
select a color or create
a custom color.
Colors Dialog
Click the Custom button at the bottom of the color palette to create new colors.
Standard Page
The standard colors appear on the
Standard page in a standard
palette spectrum.
Colors
Click a color in the standard palette
spectrum.
New
A preview of the selected color
appears under New on the right side
of the dialog. Click OK to accept the
new color. The Colors dialog closes.
Select
Click the Select button to color
Use the Colors dialog to load standard colors
or create custom colors.
158
match to any color on the screen. The cursor changes to an eyedropper. Move the
cursor around the screen and the color under New changes accordingly. Click the
mouse when you find the color you want, and that color appears under New. Click OK
to accept the new color. The Colors dialog closes.
Custom Page
You can create custom colors on the Custom page. New colors are created by mixing
red, green, and blue.
Colors
Click anywhere in the color
spectrum to choose a new
color, or enter new values in
the Hue, Sat, Lum, Red,
Green, and Blue boxes. You
can drag the slider next to
the color spectrum to adjust
the new color's intensity.
New
A preview of the new color
appears under New on the
right side of the dialog. Click
OK to accept the new color.
The Colors dialog closes.
Select
Click Select to color match to
any color on the screen. The
cursor changes to an
eyedropper. Move the cursor Use the Colors dialog to load standard colors
around the screen and the or create custom colors.
color under New changes
accordingly. Click the mouse
when you find the color you want, and that color appears under New. Click OK to
accept the new color. The Color dialog closes.
Cancel
While in the Colors dialog, click Cancel to close the dialog without making any color
changes.
159
Didger
Editting Attribute Fields

Click the Map | Data | Edit Attribute Fields command to open the Data Attributes
dialog. This dialog lets you define new data fields (IDs) for objects. This command is
particularly useful for preserving attributes from files that have been imported from
different formats, like ESRI Shapefiles .SHP, AutoCad .DXF files, or files with Z values.
This is also a useful command for deleting unnecessary attributes.
Set the ID columns in the Data Attributes dialog.
Field Names
By default, the Data Attributes dialog includes the Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, and
Quaternary IDs in the Field Name column. To change any field name, slow double-click
(click once, wait a second, and click again) to edit the name. Type the new name and
press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change.
Each field is defined as either String or Number under Preferred Export Type. The
Current Field indicates whether the field is currently in use in the project. When
importing files, up to 256 data fields can be preserved.
160
Adding Fields
Click the Add Field button to add field names to the list. The new field name is listed
as New Field and a number. The number indicates the field name. Since there are four
fields, by default, the next field is named New Field 5.
Removing Fields
Click the Remove Field button to delete the selected field from the project. If no field
name is selected, Didger starts at the top of the list and removes the first item in the
list of data fields.
Loading Field Definitions

Click the Load Definitions button to open the Open dialog. Select the Didger Data
Attribute File (*.daf) that contains the field attributes and click Open. The DAF file is
an ASCII data file that contains all of the field names and properties. After selecting
the file and clicking Open, the field names appear in the Data Attributes dialog.
Saving Field Definitions

Click the Save Definitions button to open the Save As dialog. Type a File name to
save the current field attribute settings to a Didger Data Attribute File (.daf). Click
Save and the file is saved. This file can be used later to load definitions in this or
another Didger project using the Load Definitions button.
Specialty Fields
The Specialty Fields section allows mapping of field names to one of the default fields
defined in the Specialty Fields section. The Primary ID is used as the unique key for a
data set. In most files, this will be the Primary field name. However, it could be any
unique field in the project.
The Polygon Left and Polygon Right fields are used to store the left and right side IDs
of the polygon boundary. These are used with the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create
Polygons by IDs command.
The Z-Level field is used to store elevation or production values. This column is
primarily used with the Map | Surfer | Grid Data command. The Z-Level field must
be defined before selecting this command.
161
Didger
Reshaping Objects
Click on an single object to select it and click the Draw | Reshape command, click
the button, or press CTRL+R on the keyboard to move, add, and delete vertices
within a selected polyline, polygon, spline polyline, or spline polygon.
After clicking the Draw | Reshape command, all of the vertices in the selected object
are shown with hollow squares. Click on a vertex to select it. The selected vertex is
indicated by a solid black square.
There are a number of special keys that control the reshape operation:
• Click and drag the vertex to move it to a new location.
• To add a vertex, hold down the CTRL key on the keyboard, move the mouse
pointer over the position where you want to add a vertex, and click.
• To delete a vertex, select the vertex and press the DELETE key on the
keyboard.
When you are done reshaping the object, press the ENTER key or click the
button. The polyline or polygon is redrawn in the new shape.
When Reshape is selected, the vertices that make up

the object are shown by small hollow squares. A
selected vertex is shown as a solid black square.
An object can also be reshaped by selecting it and editing the vertex coordinates in
the Coordinate Manager.
162
Thinning and Smoothing Polylines

Click the Draw | Thin and Smooth command or click the button to remove
unnecessary vertices in selected polylines or polygons and to smooth out jagged
sections in digitized objects. After selecting a thinning or smoothing option, you can
click the Preview button to see how it affects the selected object. Click Cancel to
restore the polyline to its original condition. Click OK to apply and save the current
settings.
Keep Every nth Point

The Keep Every nth Point option keeps every nth vertex point from the polyline or
polygon, and then reconnects the polyline segments. The value of "n" is entered into
the Removal Rate field. For example, if the Removal Rate is set to 3, the first node is
kept, the next two vertices are removed, the forth point is kept, and so on.
The original polyline is on the left. The polyline after a

Removal Rate of 3 was applied is shown on the right.
Deviation Distance
The Deviation Distance controls how many points are removed by the thinning
process. Points closer than the Deviation Value from the general trend of the polyline
are removed. A value of 0 does not remove anything. A value of .1 inch removes all
points that are .1 inch or closer to the general trend of the polyline.
The original polyline is on the left. The polyline after a

Deviation Value of 0.50 was applied is shown on the right.
163
Didger
Vertex Averaging
Vertex Averaging preserves the first and last point in a polyline, but averages the
vertices along the polyline based on the number set in the Average Rate field. For
example, a polyline that has 10 vertices when averaged using a rate of 3 yields a
polyline with 6 vertices.
The original polyline is on the left. The polyline after an

Average Rate of 3 was applied is shown on the right.
Spline Smooth
Spline Smooth produces a uniform polyline that passes through all of the data points,
regardless of the spacing of the data points or the tension factor applied to the spline
fit. The Spline Tension can range from 1 to 50. Higher tension factors result in
straighter polylines between the data points and lower tension factors result in more
curvature. The Generate Points option is the total number of vertices in the new
polyline after smoothing.
The original polyline is on the left. The polyline after a Spline Tension of
3 and Generate Points of 100 was applied is shown on the right.
164
Resampling Polylines
Click the Draw | Resample Polyline command to resample along either the X or Y
axis of a selected polyline. The project must be calibrated with Cartesian coordinates
to use this command. Resample Polyline is designed specifically for well log
resampling to create a data value at specified depth increments.
This function is not designed to work with polygon objects or polylines that loop back
on themselves. The polylines should have X or Y values that are ordered and are
ascending or descending. If your data are not arranged this way, then use the Thin
and Smooth command instead.
These types of polylines can be used with Resample Polylines.
Polygons and polylines that loop back upon themselves

cannot be used with Resample Polylines.
In the Resample Polylines dialog, you can choose to Resample Along the X Axis or
Resample Along the Y Axis. For the axis you choose, enter a Starting Value, Ending
Value, and Increment Value for resampling.
You can check the Create New Line check box to leave the original polyline as is and
create a new polyline, usually for comparison purposes.
165
Didger
Removing Duplicate Objects

Click the Draw | Remove Duplicate Objects command to open the Remove
Duplicate Objects dialog. Check the types of objects to remove and click OK.
Check the types of objects to search and

click OK to remove duplicate objects.
The program searches all of the object types selected for any objects that are a
duplicate of other objects in the project. Any objects that contain identical vertices are
removed, regardless of the object properties such as line style or IDs. When an object
type is checked in the dialog, that object type is searched for duplicates. When an
object type is not checked in the dialog, that object type is not searched for
duplicates.
Removing Polylines by Length

Click the Draw | Remove Polyline by Length command to open the Remove
Polyline by Length dialog.
Set the minimum length in the Remove Polyline by Length dialog.

Any polylines shorter than the specified length are deleted.
166
In the dialog, set the Specify Length value to any value in project coordinates. Any
polylines shorter than the specified length are deleted when OK is clicked.
If the box next to Remove Linked Polylines is checked, polylines that are shorter than
the specified length that have been snapped to polylines longer than the specified
length are also removed. If the box is unchecked, the short polylines that have been
snapped to polylines longer than the specified length are not removed.
Changing Polygons to Polylines

Click on any polygon or group of polygons to select them. Click the Draw | Change
Boundary Type | Polygon to Polyline command to convert each polygon into a
polyline. The first and last points defined for the polygon are disconnected, making an
unclosed polyline. The new polyline uses the original polygon IDs and line properties.
Changing Polylines to Polygons

Click on any polyline or group of polylines to select them. Click the Draw | Change
Boundary Type | Polyline to Polygon command to convert each polyline into a
polygon. The polyline first and last end nodes are connected with a straight line. The
new polygon uses the original polyline IDs and line properties. The default fill
properties are applied to the new polygon.
Alternatively, polygons can be created from polylines by clicking the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Create Polygons by Locator or the Draw | Edit Boundaries |
Create Polygons by IDs commands.
Changing Points to Polylines

Select two or more symbols and click the Draw | Change Boundary Type | Points
to Polyline command to convert the points into a polyline. Each point is connected to
the next point with a straight line. The points are connected in the order the points
appear in the Data Manager. The new polyline uses the ID of the symbol that is at
the top of the Data Manager. The default line properties are applied to the new line.
Changing Polylines to Points

Click on any polyline or group of polylines to select them. Click the Draw | Change
Boundary Type | Polyline to Points command to convert each polyline into
separate points. The lines are removed and the nodes that are used to create the
polyline are converted to symbols. Each new symbol uses the original polyline IDs. The
default symbol properties are applied to the new symbols.
167
Didger
Connecting Polylines
Click two or more polylines to select them. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries |
Connect Polylines command to join the selected polylines into a single new polyline.
When you connect polylines, they are joined by connecting the two closest nodes. The
polylines do not have to be within snap tolerance of each other. The new polyline uses
the IDs and line properties of the polyline that had been at the top of the Data
Manager.
Draw | Edit Boundaries | Connect Polylines creates one polyline

out of several polylines. Three separate polylines were
combined into one polyline in the example above.
Breaking Polylines
Click on a polyline to select it and click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Break
Polyline command or click the button. The cursor changes to . Click

anywhere along the length of the polyline. Two polylines are created, one on each side
of the break.
If the Break Polyline command is not available, the polyline may not be on the
current layer. Click on the layer that the polyline is on in the Layer Manager to select
the proper layer before selecting the Break Polyline command.
To break a polyline:
1. Click on a polyline on the current layer to select it.
2. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Break Polyline command.
3. Move the pointer over the position along the polyline you wish to cut.
4. Click on this position.
A beginning and ending node are created at the clicked position indicating that two
polylines are created. Both new polylines use the original polyline IDs and line
properties.
168
Select a polyline and then choose the

Draw | Edit Boundaries | Break Polyline command.
To rename or change any of the properties of the new polylines, click on the new
polyline to select it. Edit the properties in the Property Manager or change the IDs in
the Data Manager.
Trimming Polylines
Click on a polyline to select it and click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Trim Polyline
command or click the button. The cursor changes to . Click on the polyline
where the polyline should end. The shortest section between the point where the
mouse is clicked and the end of the polyline is removed. For instance, on a horizontal
polyline, if the trim point is closer to the right edge of the polyline, everything to the
right of the trim point is removed.
If the Trim Polyline command is not available, the polyline may not be on the current
layer. Click on the layer that the polyline is on in the Layer Manager to select the
proper layer before selecting the Trim Polyline command.
To trim a polyline:
1. Click on a polyline on the current layer to select it.
2. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Trim Polyline command.
3. Move the cursor over the position along the polyline you wish to remove.
4. Click the left mouse button.
The shorter section of the polyline is deleted and the longer section of the polyline
ends at the clicked location.
Since the trim point is closer to the right side

of the polyline, everything to the right of the
cursor is removed when Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Trim Polyline is selected.
169
Didger
Creating Line Intersections

Click on several polylines to select them. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create
Line Intersections command to break the selected polylines into multiple polylines.
At each location where two polylines cross, two separate polylines are created for each
original polyline. The beginning and ending points for the new polylines are the
location where the original polylines crossed. For example, if two polylines cross on a
layer, four polyline segments would exist after using this tool.
Two polylines (left) exist before using Draw | Edit Boundaries |

Create Line Intersections. After the command four polylines (right) exist.
Snapping Polyline Segments

Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap All Polyline Segments command to
automatically join all existing polylines with nodes that are within the Snap Tolerance
(see Tolerance Settings section in Chapter 12) of each other. Polylines are only
snapped to other polylines on the same layer.
This is different from the Connect Polylines command in that you do not choose the
polylines to be connected.
Use Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap All Polyline

Segments to snap all polylines in a project. The
end nodes must be in an overlapping snap tolerance circle.
170
Snapping Undershoot Polylines

Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap Undershoot Polylines command to snap
all existing polylines to adjacent polylines that fall within the snap tolerance. The
adjacent polyline is broken and the undershoot polyline is snapped to the new point of
intersection. The resultant product is three polyline segments. Polylines are only
snapped to other polylines on the same layer.
The graphic on the left shows an undershoot.

After using Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap Undershoot Polylines,
the undershoot is connected to the top polyline and
the top polyline is broken into two segments.
Note: if a polyline intersects with another polyline, it is discarded from the Snap
Undershoot Polylines operation. The Snap Undershoot Polylines command does
not work with intersecting line segments. Use the Trim Overshoot Polylines instead.
Trimming Overshoot Polylines

Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Trim Overshoot Polylines command to snap all
existing polylines to adjacent polylines when the two polylines intersect each other. If
the two lines intersect and one of the end nodes is within the snap tolerance value of
the other line. the intersecting polylines are broken at the point of intersection. The
overshoot portion of the polyline is trimmed and removed from the project. The
resultant product is three polyline segments. Polylines are only snapped to other
polylines on the same layer.
The graphic on the left shows an overshoot. After using Draw |

Edit Boundaries | Trim Overshoot Polylines, the overshoot is connected
to the top polyline and the top polyline is broken into two segments.
171
Didger
Note: If a polyline does not intersect with another polyline, but is within the snap
tolerance, the Trim Overshoot Polylines command will not snap the lines together.
Use the Snap Undershoot Polylines command instead.
Creating Polygons by Locator

The Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by Locator command creates
polygons from polylines.
You can create polygons that share common borders by digitizing the shared border
(polyline), and use the border to create both adjacent polygons. This command
requires that a polygon marker be digitized somewhere within the polygon area to be
created.
To create polygons using a locator marker:

1. Create all polyline segments by clicking the Draw | Polyline command. The
segments should only be long enough to be shared by two polygons.
Digitize all polyline segments as indicated in the figure on

the left. The figure on the right will not work with the Create
Polygons by Locator command because it consists of a
polyline and a polygon.
2. Snap the polyline segments to one another by clicking the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Snap All Polyline Segments command. If the polyline segments
are not snapping together, check the snap tolerance value and display the snap
tolerance circles. You may need to reset the snap tolerance value or reshape the
polyline.
3. Draw the polygon markers by clicking the Draw | Polygon Marker command.
4. Assign a Primary ID to each polygon marker in the Property Manager in the
Data Attributes section.
5. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by Locator command and
the polygons are created.
172
Create all polyline segments, snap the polyline

segments, and draw the polygon markers
before using Draw | Edit Boundaries |
Create Polygons by Locator.
If a polygon is not created, check to be sure the polylines are snapped. If all polylines
are snapped, try moving the polygon marker to a slightly different location within the
polyline outlines. In some cases, moving the polygon marker to a slightly different
location within the set of polylines allows the polygon to be created.
Creating Polygons by IDs

It is usually very difficult to create polygons that share common borders and get the
borders to match exactly. The Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by IDs
command lets you create polygons that share common borders by digitizing the
shared border (polyline) one time, and using the single border to create both adjacent
polygons.
For each polyline used by the Create Polygons by IDs you must first create an ID in
the field that is assigned to the Polygon Left and Polygon Right attributes defined by
clicking the Map | Data | Edit Attribute Fields command.
The polyline nodes must be coincident with the nodes of the other polylines used to
create the polygons in this command. For this reason, it is recommended that you use
the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap All Polyline Segments command before using Draw
| Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by IDs command.
Consider the example below where three polylines are digitized to create two adjoining
polygons. The beginning node for all three polylines is at the bottom center and is
indicated by the green box. The Left and Right IDs for the three polylines are also
indicated.
173
Didger
Three polylines are digitized with the left and right IDs as shown above.
To use the Create Polygons by IDs command

1. Draw the three polylines as shown above by clicking the Draw | Polyline
command. Start at the top of the polyline.
2. Snap the polyline segments to one another by clicking the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Snap All Polyline Segments command. If the polyline segments
are not snapping together, check the snap tolerance value and display the snap
tolerance circles. You may need to reset the snap tolerance value or reshape the
polyline.
3. Click the Map | Data | Edit Attribute Fields command to open the Data
Attributes dialog.
4. Set the Polygon Left to the Tertiary ID and the Polygon Right to the Quaternary
ID.
5. Click OK.
6. Click on the blue polyline above to select it.
a. In the Property Manager, in the Data Attributes section, set the Primary to
Polyline 1.
b. Set the Tertiary to Outside.
c. Set the Quaternary to Polygon 1.
7. Click on the red polyline to select it.
Shared Polyline.
b. Set the Tertiary to Polygon 1.
c. Set the Quaternary to Polygon 2.
8. Click on the green polyline to select it.
174
Polyline 2.
b. Set the Tertiary to Polygon 2.
c. Set the Quaternary to Outside.
The Data Manager displays all of the objects and IDs.
9. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create Polygons by IDs command.

10. In the Create Polygon by ID's dialog,
a. Select the polygon you want to produce from the Select Left/Right ID list.
b. The name is automatically entered for the Primary for the new polygon to be
created in the New Object ID's list.
c. If desired, type a Secondary, Third, and Fourth ID.
11. Click Create and the new polygon is created.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the second polygon.
13. Click Close to exit the dialog. The new polygons are displayed.
The next figure shows two polygons after they have been created with the Create
Two polygons are created after using the Draw | Edit

Boundaries | Create Polygons by IDs command.
175
Didger
Note: You can only create one polygon at a time, even if you create polylines defining
multiple polygons with the same IDs.
Changing a Polyline to a Polygon with a Shared Border

Click on a polyline and polygon to select both objects. Click the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Polyline to Polygon with Shared Border command to snap selected
polyline end nodes to a nearby single polygon. When the polyline is snapped to the
polygon, it is converted to a polygon and shares the border with the original polygon.
Select the polygon and polyline. Click the Polyline to Polygon

with Shared Border command. The polyline is converted
to a polygon and shares the same border as the original polygon.
Combining Polygons
Select all of the polygons to combine. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Union
Polygons command or click the button to create a new polygon that traces around
the outside of a group of contiguous polygons.
Note, if the selected polygons do not contain any overlapping sections, no change is
made after selecting the command.
To use the Union Polygons command:

1. Select all the polygons to be grouped together.
2. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Union Polygons command.
176
The Union Polygons command traces

outside a group of selected polygons
(left) and creates one polygon (right).
Combining Islands/Lakes or Union Polygons

The Union Polygons command differs from the Combine Islands/Lakes command.
With the Union Polygons command, the outside boundary for the selected group of
polygons is generated. All inner lines are removed. With Draw | Combine
Islands/Lakes, the group is combined into a single complex polygon, but the outer
boundary is not traced.
Intersecting Polygons
Select all of the polygons to intersect. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Intersect
Polygons command or click the button to create a new polygon from two or more
intersecting polygons. The polygon that intersects all selected polygons is created. The
original polygons outside of the intersecting portion are removed. A single new
polygon that contains only the shape of the intersecting polygons is created.
To use the Intersect Polygons command:

1. Select all the polygons that define the intersecting polygon.
2. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Intersect Polygons command.
The Intersect Polygons command

creates a new polygon out of all
selected intersecting polygons.
177
Didger
Difference of Polygons
Select all of the polygons to use for calculating the difference. Click the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Difference of Polygons command or click the button. The
overlapping section of the selected polygons are removed. A single new polygon is
created that contains the shape of the areas that do not contain overlapping portions
of the original polygons.
These two areas are selected. After the Difference of Polygons command
is selected, two new areas are created without the intersecting
area. Note that the area's fill was changed for emphasis.
Dividing Polygons
To divide a polygon into multiple pieces, create a polyline where you would like to
divide the polygon. Click on the polygon and polyline to select both objects. Click the
Draw | Edit Boundaries | Divide Polygons command or the click the button to
create two or more polygons from one polygon.
Digitize a polyline over the polygon you want to divide.

The Divide Polygons command creates four polygons
from the original polygon.
178
Creating a Convex Hull

Select a group of objects, including polylines and polygons. Click the Draw | Edit
Boundaries | Convex Hull command or click the button. A new polygon is

created around the selected set of objects. The new polygon is determined by using
the outermost edges along selected objects. Each edge is connected by a straight line
to the next edge.
The Convex Hull command creates a new

area around selected objects.
NOTE: A convex hull cannot be created from only two points or from only a single two
point polyline because building a polygon requires at least three points.
Creating Intersection Points

Click on several objects to select them. Click the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create
Intersection Points or click the button to create point objects at the
intersection of selected objects.
Two objects (polyline and polygon) exist before the

Create Intersection Points command is executed (left).
Two additional objects (points) are created where the two
objects intersect after the command is executed (right).
179
Didger
Islands/Lakes
Select a group of polygons. Click the Draw | Combine Islands/Lakes command to
combine all of the selected polygons into a single complex polygon. The new polyline
uses the IDs and line properties of the polyline that had been at the bottom of the
Data Manager. You can edit the complex polygon's properties in the Property
Manager.
Splitting Islands/Lakes
Select a single complex polygon. Click the Draw | Split Islands/Lakes command to
break the complex polygon into its component parts. When the Split Islands/Lakes
command is selected, each polygon becomes completely independent of the other
polygons in the group. The original object’s Primary ID is assigned to all the new
polygons. You can change the new polygons’ properties, such as IDs, through the
Property Manager.
Reverse Direction
Click on a single polygon, single polyline, group of polygons, or group of polylines to
select them. Click the Draw | Reverse Direction command. The order of points in
the selected polylines and polygons are reversed. Objects converted in this way
appear the same on the screen. The direction of the objects are listed as Reverse
(counterclockwise) and Forward (clockwise) in the Data Manager's Direction column.
Note: This command does not work with complex polygons. To reverse a single
polygon in a complex polygon, first click the Draw | Split Islands/Lakes, reverse
the desired polygons by clicking the Draw | Reverse Direction command, and click
the Draw | Combine Islands/Lakes command to recombine the polygons.
180
Chapter 6
Downloading and Processing Images
Image
An image is a graphic that contains a series of small squares, or pixels, to represent
objects in a file. You cannot edit the individual elements of an image, such as
reshaping a line, changing the colors of a line, or changing the line style.
Image Properties
Image object properties can be modified through the Property Manager. Image
object properties are discussed in the Item Properties section of Chapter 5.
Georeferenced Images
Typically, images consist of pixel coordinates, the number of pixels in the X direction
and the number of pixels in the Y direction. A georeferenced image contains real world
coordinates, such as latitude, longitude or UTM, rather than pixel coordinates. Some
images can have coordinate, projection, and datum information embedded in them
(GeoTIFF) and some images have associated files that contains georeferencing
information (Golden Software Reference .GSR, Blue Marble .RSF, ESRI .PRJ, and ESRI
World File .TFW).
Georeferenced Images in Didger Projects

A georeferenced image contains a set of control points or transformation parameters
that define the mapping from pixel coordinate space to the real world coordinate
space.
If you import an image into a Didger project, you can also import vector files, data
files, and other images into the plot window and overlay them. The projection
information of an image can be changed once you import it into a Didger project.
Rectified Georeferenced Images

A georeferenced image can also be rectified in a Didger project. In most cases
calibrating an image will not fully rectify it. If the georeferencing information contains
any sort of warped component, rotation, or non-linear scaling along the axes, Didger
181
Didger
has the tools to adjust an image by first calibrating and then by warping the image.
Both processes are needed to most accurately rectify an image.
Images with Unknown Georeferencing

If you scanned an image, if you are unsure if the image is georeferenced, or if you
know the image does not contain georeferencing, you can either import the image un-
referenced into a project, let Didger define a set of coordinates for you, or you can
georeference the image in the Image Registration and Warping dialog.
Image Scaling
Because image files are raster based, they cannot be scaled in the receiving
application without distortion or some loss of resolution. They can be useful for
reproducing the project image in other applications. If you need to reproduce and
rescale the project image in another application, you might consider vectorizing the
image or digitizing the image. The digitized information can then be exported to a
vector format.
Image Menu Commands

The Image menu contains commands to download online maps, vectorize images,
register and warp images, process images, clip or crop images, resize images, mosaic
images, change the color format, and modify the colors in the image.
Download Online Maps

Click the Image | Download Online Maps command to open the Download Online
Maps dialog. This dialog allows you to download data or maps from any web mapping
server (WMS). Images can be downloaded from any of the existing servers or new
servers can be added to the list.
182
Set the image properties in the Download Online Maps dialog.
183
Didger
Data Source
In the Select Data Source section, click the to open a section. The arrow turns black
when a section is opened.
Server Information
To see additional options for a specific server, right-click in the Select Data Source
section on the existing data source name, such as NAIP Color Imagery for US layer.
Right-click on the layer name to see the URL for the

layer or additional information about the layer.
To view the data source for any predefined server, right-click on the predefined server
name and select View. The View Data Source dialog allows predefined web server
URLs to be edited. This may be useful if the location for the server changes.
To view information about the server, right-click on the server name and select Info.
The Server Information dialog displays the results of attempting to connect to the
server.
Layer Information
To view information about the specific layer, right-click on the layer name and select
Info. The Layer Information dialog displays information such as the minimum scale,
height or width, layer name and title. None of the options are editable.
Adding New Data Sources

To add additional data sources to the list, right-click on the white space in the Select
Data Source section. Select Add to open the Add Data Source dialog. Set the Name
and URL to the new web mapping service. Click Next and the web server can be
tested. If the test is successful, click Finish and the new web mapping service is added
to the Select Data Source list. If the test is not successful, click Back and edit the URL.
184
All custom data sources are saved to an INI file, allowing multiple Golden Software
programs to use the custom definitions. The INI file is located at
C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\Golden Software\Shared\Geode.ini. The file
can be copied from one computer to another to share custom data sources between
multiple computers and users.
Editing Custom Data Sources

To edit the data source for any custom server, right-click on the custom server name
and select Edit. The Didger dialog allows custom web server Name and URLs to be
edited. This may be useful if the location for the server changes or if the name listed
in the Download Online Maps dialog should be changed.
To view information about the server, right-click on the server name and select Info.
The Server Information dialog displays the results of attempting to connect to the
server.
Deleting Custom Data Sources

To delete a custom server from the Select Data Source list, right-click on the server
name and select Delete. In the Delete World Map dialog, click Yes to delete the
server. Click No to keep the server in the Select Data Source list.
Select Area to Download

The Select Area to Download section controls the areal extent of the image being
downloaded. Available options are Current map extents, Entire data source extents,
Within XX units of Latitude Y and Longitude Y, or Specify Latitude/Longitude extents.
Click on the desired option to select it.
Select the extents of the image to download in the Select Area to Download section.
185
Didger
The Current map extents option sets the limits for the downloaded image to the map
extents for the project. If no objects exist in the project, this option is not available.
When this option is selected the yellow box in the image Preview section highlights the
area that will be downloaded.
The Entire data source extents reads all of the data on the specified server. All of the
data is downloaded in the single image. With servers that cover large areas, this
option is not recommended because even at high resolutions, very little detail will
appear on the downloaded map.
The Within XX units of Latitude Y and Longitude Y option allows a single latitude and
longitude value to be entered. A square area is downloaded based on the XX value and
the units option. The square is centered on the value entered for the Latitude and
Longitude. To use this option, enter valid values in each box.
• The first box sets the width and height of the square area. For instance, 25
can be input.
• The second option (units) can be set to either Kilometers or Miles. Click on the
existing option to select the desired option.
• The third option is the central Latitude value. In the example below, the center
point of the downloaded image will be 39.753304. Latitude values must be
between -90 and +90. Negative values are entered for the southern
hemisphere. Positive values are entered for the northern hemisphere.
• The last option is the central Longitude value. In the example below, the
center point of the downloaded image will be -105.220139. Longitude values
must be between -180 and +180. Negative values are western hemisphere
longitudes. Positive values are eastern hemisphere longitudes.
The downloaded area will be 25 miles wide and 25 miles tall. The image will be
centered on the longitude and latitude location of -105.220139, 39.753304.
The Specify Latitude/Longitude extents option allows a rectangular area to be input in

latitude and longitude coordinates. After selecting this option,
• Type in the western-most edge for the downloaded map in longitude degrees
coordinates in the West box. Longitude values must be between -180 and
+180. Negative values are western hemisphere longitudes. Positive values are
eastern hemisphere longitudes.
• Type in the eastern-most edge for the downloaded map in longitude degrees
coordinates in the East box. Longitude values must be between -180 and
186
+180. Negative values are western hemisphere longitudes. Positive values are
eastern hemisphere longitudes.
• Type in the northern-most edge for the downloaded map in latitude degrees
coordinates in the North box. Latitude values must be between -90 and +90.
Negative values are entered for the southern hemisphere. Positive values are
entered for the northern hemisphere.
• Type in the southern-most edge for the downloaded map in latitude degrees
coordinates in the South box. Latitude values must be between -90 and +90.
Negative values are entered for the southern hemisphere. Positive values are
entered for the northern hemisphere.
The downloaded area will cover from -105.5 to -105

degrees longitude and 39.25 to 40.75 degrees latitude.
Select Image Resolution to Download

The Select Image Resolution to Download section controls the quality of the image
being downloaded. Drag the slider to the right to increase the image resolution. The
farther to the right the slider is located, the better the resolution and the larger the
image. Clicking on one of the lines on the left side of the slider will normally download
a map of sufficient quality that is smaller in size. The larger the file size, the longer the
image will take to process and the more memory the program will use to manipulate
the image.
Set the image quality by dragging the slider to the right or left. Setting the
slider to the far left side downloads a small map with less resolution. Setting
the slider to the far right side downloads a very large map with
very fine resolution. This should only be used for small areas.
Image Preview
The Preview section displays a picture of the area to be downloaded. The image
quality is controlled by the Select Image Resolution to Download. The Preview section
contains a low resolution preview of the area. Use the + and - buttons on the left side
of the image preview to zoom in or out on the area. Changing the zoom level does not
187
Didger
affect the area to download. The area to download is indicated in the Preview section
by a yellow outline.
Log
The Log section displays the tiles that have previously been downloaded in the current
session.
OK, Cancel and Help

Once all of the options are set, click OK to download the image. Click Cancel to cancel
the download and return to the Didger project. Click Help to open the help file.
Add Data Source Dialog

Right-click in the open white space in the Download Online Maps dialog to open the
Add Data Source dialog. This dialog allows new web servers to be added to the list in
the Download Online Maps.
Type a name and the website location to add the data source.
188
Name
In the Name section, type the name of the server. This is the name that is listed in the
Download Online Maps dialog, so the name can be as descriptive as desired.
URL
In the URL section, type the full internet location of the web mapping service. The
address must contain the http:// and the www before the location. If the URL does not
work, a good site to test whether the URL is a WMS server is MapMatters.org. Input
the URL in the Search field and the website will determine if the resulting server is a
WMS server. Didger currently only supports WMS (web map service) servers.
Next
Click Next to test the URL location. The program initiates communication with the
server. If the communication is successful, an Initial Test Success message appears.
Click Finish to return to the Download Online Maps dialog.
If the program cannot communicate with the server, an Initial Test Failed message
appears. The program is unable to connect to the server. There are a variety of
reasons this could happen. The web server URL could have changed or could be input
incorrectly, the web server is temporarily down, a firewall or virus scanner is
preventing the program from connecting to the server, or an internet connection
cannot be established.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous page, allowing the Name or URL to be re-edited.
Cancel or Finish
Click Cancel to return to the Download Online Maps dialog, without making any
changes. Click Finish to return to the Download Online Maps dialog, making any
changes to the Name or URL in the dialog.
Help
Click Help to open the online help file with information about the open dialog.
189
Didger
Edit Data Source Dialog

Right-click on a custom layer name in the Download Online Maps dialog to open the
Edit Data Source dialog. This dialog allows custom web servers to be edited in the
Download Online Maps.
In the Edit Data Source dialog, you can change

the name or the web location of the server.
Name
In the Name section, type the name of the server. This is the name that is listed in the
Download Online Maps dialog, so the name can be as descriptive as desired.
URL
In the URL section, type the full internet location of the web mapping service. The
address must contain the http:// and the www before the location. If the URL does not
work, a good site to test whether the URL is a WMS server is MapMatters.org. Input
the URL in the Search field and the website will determine if the resulting server is a
WMS server. Didger currently only supports WMS (web map service) servers.
190
Next
Back
Cancel or Finish
Help
191
Didger
View Data Source Dialog

Right-click on a predefined server name in the Download Online Maps dialog to open
the View Data Source dialog. This dialog allows predefined web servers to be edited
in the Download Online Maps.
In the View Data Source dialog, you

can change the web location of the server.
Editing the URL

For predefined layers, the Name cannot be edited. The URL can be edited. This is
useful if the URL for the server changes. Highlight the existing location and type the
new location.
Next
192
Back
Cancel or Finish
Help
193
Didger
Server Information Dialog

Right-click on any server name and select Info to check the connectivity of the server.
The server location is tested and the results of the test are reported.
The program initiates communication with the server. If the communication is

successful, an Initial Test Success message appears. Click OK to return to the
Download Online Maps dialog.
Help
194
Layer Information Dialog

Right-click on any layer in the Download Online Maps dialog to open the Layer
Information dialog. Information such as the minimum scale, height or width, layer
name and title are listed in the dialog. None of the options are editable.
The Layer Information dialog contains information about the selected web server.
OK
Click OK to return to the Download Online Maps dialog.
Help
195
Didger
Vectorize Image
Click the Image | Vectorize Image command or click the button to open the
Vectorize Image dialog. The Vectorize Image dialog controls the settings that
automatically convert an image into a vectorized data set. A complete image can be
vectorized, select colors on the image can be vectorized, noise can be removed,
polygons or polylines created, and a number of other image processing options are
available.
Set the colors to vectorize and the edge

detection options in the Vectorize Image dialog.
Vectorization Scheme
The Vectorization Scheme saves the settings for different vectorization types to use
again on similar images, without resetting or remembering all the parameters. To
change the Vectorization Scheme, click on the down arrow next to the current scheme
name and select the desired scheme from the list.
196
To create a new Vectorization Scheme, set all of the parameters in the dialog. Type a
name in the Vectorization Scheme box. Click Save to the right of the scheme name to
store the scheme to a file.
To delete an existing Vectorization Scheme, click on the down arrow next to the
current scheme name. Select the desired scheme from the list. Click Delete to the
right of the scheme name and Save button.
Colors to Vectorize
Didger gives you the option to vectorize an entire image or specific colors or color
ranges from the image. To vectorize the entire image, select the Complete Image
option in the Colors to Vectorize section. To vectorize only certain colors or ranges of
colors, select Selected Colors in the Colors to Vectorize section. For example, you may
only want to vectorize the blue rivers on a contour map.
To set specific colors, select the Selected Colors option. Move the cursor over the
image, and the cursor changes to . Click on the color you want to select.
To zoom into the image, press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and click on
the image. To zoom out of the image, press and hold the CTRL key on the keyboard
and click on the image. Alternatively, use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in and out.
To move around on the image, click on the scroll bars to move up/down or right/left.
Alternatively, press and hold the mouse scroll wheel down and drag the image on the
screen.
Once the color is selected, it is entered into the Color column cell in the Vectorize
Image dialog. If you make a mistake or click the wrong color, simply click again on
the intended color on the image to update the color in the Color column cell.
To add a new color to the list, click Add below the color section. To delete a color from
the list, click on the color in the dialog and click Delete below the color section. To
delete all of the selected colors, click Remove All.
Color Tolerance
The Color Tolerance determines the range of colors identified by each color. The value
is reported in the Tolerance column. Tolerance defines a similarity in color from one
pixel in an image from another pixel in that same image. For instance, the blue rivers
might be a darker value than the lighter colored lakes. If you only want the blue rivers
197
Didger
vectorized, then you want the tolerance value low so the range of blue does not
include the lighter blue lakes. Pixel values can range from 0 to 255. A low color
tolerance is very similar to the pixel color selected. A high color tolerance fills the
pixels within a broader range. Click and drag the to the right to
broaden the pixel range of color. The tolerance number moves up as the slider moves
right. This is useful for color images that have a variety of pixel color ranges near the
edge or border. When the Color Tolerance value is zero, only the selected color is
vectorized.
Edge Detection Method

The Edge Detection Method determines how lines in the image are found. Available
options are Edge Detection, Standard Object Thinning, and Enhanced Object Thinning.
To change the option, click on the down arrow to the right of the existing option and
If an image was previously processed using edge detection, erosion, dilation or one of
the other processing filters, you should select Enhanced Object Thinning as the edge
detection method from the list. If the image was not pre-processed, then either Edge
Detection or Standard Object Thinning should be selected from the list for best results.
For most images that contain lines that should be vectorized, Standard Object
Thinning is recommended because lines in images are generally a few pixels wide. The
Edge Detection method would create a polyline on both sides of the line in the image.
Standard Object Thinning creates one polyline through the middle of the line in the
image.
The green lines are the vectors The green lines are the vectors
created using the Standard created using the Edge
Object Thinning method. Detection method.
198
Canny Edge Options

Edge detection is useful for vectorization processing because it easily detects the
edges of lines or color boundaries in an image and creates single pixel width polylines
along the edges. The Canny Edge Options are only available when the Edge Detection
Method is set to Edge Detection. If the options are not available, set the Edge
Detection Method to Edge Detection. There are three options available in the Canny
Edge Options section: Gaussian Standard Deviation, Hysteresis High Value, and
Hysteresis Low Value.
Gaussian Standard Deviation

The Gaussian Standard Deviation is used to smooth the image and look for horizontal,
vertical, and diagonal edges. To change the value, highlight the existing value and
type a new value. Alternatively, click and drag the to the right or
left. The value ranges between 0.1 and 3. Didger creates a convolution mask based
on the value input. The 0.1 value creates shorter and more fragmented lines across
the image. A 3.0 value creates longer, more continuous lines across the image.
Hysteresis High Value and Hysteresis Low Value

Hysteresis helps to connect lines based on angles and pixel value connectivity. To
achieve this, hysteresis uses two different threshold values: Hysteresis High Value and
Hysteresis Low Value. To change the value, highlight the existing value and type a
new value. Alternatively, click and drag the to the right or left. The
values range between 0 and 255. The Hysteresis High Value marks out the strongest
edges of an image. Hysteresis traces these high value edges through the image. The
Hysteresis Low Value traces faint sections of lines and avoids the few noisy pixels that
do not constitute a line. Together these high and low values are able to identify edges
and continuity in an image. Typically, the higher threshold can be set to approximately
three times the lower threshold.
The green lines are the output from the The green lines are the output from the
Vectorize Image command using Edge Vectorize Image command using Edge
Detection with an Hysteresis High Value Detection with an Hysteresis High Value
= 30 and Hysteresis Low Value = 10. = 70 and Hysteresis Low Value = 210.
199
Didger
Post Processing Options

The Post Processing Options section contains options to control the final output of the
vectorize command. This can generate smoother, longer lines or create polygons if a
vectorized object appears closed.
Smooth Lines
The Smooth Lines option reduces the total number of vertices created along a polyline
during the vectorization process. Available options are: No Smoothing, Minor,
Moderate, and Aggressive. The default option is Minor, which applies a slight amount
of smoothing to the vectorized lines. To change the amount of smoothing, click on the
down arrow next to the existing option and select the desired option from the list.
For example, a polyline generated with No Smoothing creates many points and jagged
edges. Setting the Smooth Lines to Minor removes some of the points and smooths
the jagged edges to make smoother lines. Selecting Moderate for the Smooth Lines
option reduces the number of points created during the trace without overly
compromising the shape of the polyline. Selecting Aggressive for the Smooth Lines
option reduces the number of points even further and simplifies the shape of the
polyline. Some sections of the polyline may be removed with the Aggressive option.
Minimum Pixel Length

The Min Pixel Length option is the minimum number of pixels traced before a new
polyline segment is created. To change the value, highlight the existing value and type
a new value or use the to increase or decrease the value. Values range from 0 to
255.
The default is 10 pixels, which means that 10 pixels must be connected before a
polyline object is created. Increasing this number results in fewer vectorized polylines
with longer lengths. Decreasing this number results in more vectorized polylines, with
potentially shorter lengths.
Auto Generate Polygons

The Auto Generate Polygons option is used to create polygons from the vectorized
image when a polyline appears to close. Check the box to automatically create
polygons. When the box is unchecked, polylines are created. The polylines can be
converted to polygons by clicking the Draw | Change Boundary Type | Polyline to
Polygon command after the vectorization is complete.
200
Retain Processed Image

The Retain Processed Image option is only available when the Colors to Vectorize is
set to Complete Image. If the Retain Processed Image is not available, select
Complete Image in the Colors to Vectorize section. When the box next to Retain
Processed Image is checked, the altered processed image replaces the current image
on the screen. When the box is unchecked, the original image remains on the screen.
Create Results on New Layers

The Create results on new layer(s) option adds the vectorized polylines and polygons
to a new layer. This makes it easy to separate the image layer from the vectorized
information. This option is checked by default. Uncheck the box next to Create results
on new layer(s) to create the vectorized polylines and polygons on the same layer as
the image.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to create polylines and polygons from the image. Click Cancel to close the
dialog without creating any polylines or polygons from the image.
Image Registration and Warping Dialog

The Image Registration and Warping dialog appears in two places in a Didger
project. It appears during File | Import when an non-georeferenced image is
imported. It also appears when the Image | Image Registration and Warping
command is clicked. Regardless of how the dialog is opened, the image can be
calibrated, recalibrated, or georeferenced using the Image Registration and
Warping dialog.
In an existing project, click on the image to select it. Click the Image | Image
Registration and Warping command or click the button. The dialog allows you
to either verify the calibration or coordinate system, change the calibration, or define
the calibration or coordinate system. The Image | Image Registration and
Warping command is only available when there are no other objects in the project
and the image is selected. If the Image Registration and Warping command is not
available in the Image menu, two options are available. Delete the other objects,
leaving only the image. Click on the image and click the Image | Image
Registration and Warping command. Alternatively, delete the existing image,
leaving the other objects. Click the File | Import command to import the image. The
Image Registration and Warping dialog will appear if the image is not calibrated.
201
Didger
Calibrate the image, set the image projection, and set the warping
method in the Image Registration and Warping dialog.
Image Display
Above the image display window are three tabs: Source Image, Project Reference
Coordinates, and Dual View.
Click on the tab to view information about the image and project.
Click the Source Image tab to display the un-referenced image. Click on the Project
Reference Coordinates tab to display the current Didger project. Click on the Dual
View tab to display both windows side by side.
202
Zooming and Panning the Image

On the left side of the image are several buttons for zooming in or out on the image.
Click the button to the left of the image to enter zoom in mode. The cursor
changes to to indicate zoom in mode. Click on the image to zoom in at the desired
location. Click the button to the left of the image to enter zoom out mode. The
cursor changes to to indicate zoom out mode. Click on the image to zoom out at
the desired location. Alternatively, click on the image and scroll in or out using the
mouse wheel.
Click the button to the left of the image to zoom out to the entire extents of the
image. The full image is displayed.
Click the button to the left of the image to enter pan mode. Click and hold the
mouse button down. The cursor changes to to indicate pan mode. Drag the mouse
around to move the image. Alternatively, click and hold the mouse wheel down to pan
around the image.
Entering Calibration Mode

Click the button to the left of the image to enter calibration mode. Once
calibration mode is entered, the cursor changes to to indicate calibration mode.
Click on the image where the first calibration point should be located.
Calibration Points
Calibration points are used to define a correlation between the source image
coordinates and the project reference system. Didger automatically creates four
calibration points, located at the maximum extents of the image. The number and
position of the calibration markers shown in any of the selected display windows
reflect the number and position of the calibration points. The green marker
indicates the selected row (or calibration point) in the table at the bottom of the
dialog. The red markers indicate a calibration row that is not currently selected.
Calibration points can be bench marks, surveyed points, grid intersection lines, axis
intersections, or any type of identifiable point you choose. At least three calibration
points must be entered to accurately calibrate an image. Using more points does not
203
Didger
necessarily yield more accurate calibration. Four points are desired, to create a total
RMS value and individual point error.
Calibration Points Table

The calibration points table is dynamically linked to the Source Image, Project
Reference Coordinates, and Dual View windows when you enter or select the
coordinates for calibration points.
Enter the calibration point information in the calibration point table.
Each row contains information about a specific calibration point. The columns contain
information about the location on the image.
• The Use column contains either Yes or No. This column tells Didger whether
to use the point when calibrating. To change the value, double-click on the Yes
to change it to No or double-click on the No to change it to Yes. When set to
Yes, the calibration point is used for calibrating the image.
• The Point ID column identify each calibration point with a name. This column is
optional and information does not need to be entered into this column.
• The Image X and Image Y columns contain the pixel location of the calibration
points on the image. The 0,0 point is located at the top left corner of the
image. The maximum values are determined by the number of pixels in the
image. The maximum point is located at the bottom right corner of the image.
• The Reference X and Reference Y columns contain the real world coordinates
of the calibration points. The values can be typed into the Reference X and
Reference Y boxes or the point can be clicked on in the Project Reference
Coordinates window to be automatically entered.
• The Point Error column displays the error value for each calibration point
between the source image and referenced image.
Auto Advance Row

Check the box next to the Auto Advance Row Position option below the table to
automatically move to the next row after clicking on a calibration point. This option
makes it quicker to select many calibration points in sequence without needing to click
204
in the table. When unchecked, the current calibration row does not change after
clicking a location on the image.
Adding Calibration Points

Click the Add Point button to the right of the calibration point table to add a new
calibration point to the image. A new row is added to the table.
Deleting Calibration Points

Click the Delete Point button to the right of the calibration point table to delete the
selected row from the table.
Loading Calibration Points

Click the Load button to load existing calibration points into the project. Points may be
loaded from any data file format, such as a .DAT, .XLSX, .TXT, or .ACCDB file. Loading
a previously defined set of calibration points saves you the time of typing in the
coordinates for a project that you have used in the past.
To use previously defined calibration points:

1. Click the Load button.
2. In the Open dialog, select the appropriate file.
3. Click Open.
4. In the Load Calibration Points dialog, set the columns.
5. Click OK. The values are loaded into Image Registration and Warping dialog
table.
6. Click on each row in the table and click on the image in the location associated
with each row.
7. Click OK and the image is imported with the new calibration.
Saving Calibration Points

Click the Save button to save the calibration points to a file. The Report button
displays a generic calibration report of the results, including the calibration RMS value.
Check the Auto Advance Row Position box to automatically move to the next record in
the table.
205
Didger
Creating a Calibration Report

Click the Report button to generate a Didger Calibration Report. The report opens in a
text editor window. The report contains projection information, the axis types, the
calibration units, and the calibration points. This can be useful information if you are
trying to determine the calibration process used for an image at a later point.
Setting the Calibration Marker

Click the Marker button to set the calibration marker to a different symbol. In the
Calibration Marker dialog, set the Symbol Set to the desired font. Any TrueType font
on the system can be used for the calibration marker. After the font is selected, click
on the desired symbol to select it. Click OK and the new symbol is used for the
calibration markers. Click Cancel and the old symbol is still used. By default the is
used for the calibration marker. The marker is green when the calibration point is
selected and red when the calibration point is not selected.
Total RMS
The Total RMS value is displayed just below the Marker button. The Total RMS helps
you determine the accuracy of your calibration. A large Total RMS could reflect either
too few calibration points, or it may mean that you need to recalibrate your image
with more accuracy.
Warp Method
The Warp Method option determines the image warping method. Available options are:
Affine Polynomial, 1st Order Polynomial, Thin Plate Spline, Natural Cubic Spline,
Marcov Spline, Exponential Spline, Rational Quadratic Spline, Inverse Distance
Squared, 2nd Order Polynomial, and 3rd Order Polynomial. The default option is Affine
Polynomial. To change the Warp Method, click the down arrow next to the existing
warp method and select the desired method from the list. Refer to each specific page
for the transformation information and an image demonstrating the warp.
Resample Method
The Resample Method option determines the method used to when resampling an
image during warping. Available options are Nearest Neighbor or Bilinear
Interpolation. To change the Resample Method, click on the down arrow next to the
existing resampling method and select the desired method from the list.
The Nearest Neighbor method locates the center of each new image cell and locates
equivalent centers on the original image. The closest cell on the original image is
assigned to the new image cell. When the original image and the new image differ in
206
size, more than one original cell may be applied to the new image and some original
image cells are not applied to the new image. The nearest neighbor method is the
fastest resampling method, though it can result in distorted output if the original
image and new images differ in size. This method is best for cells containing discrete
data.
The Bilinear Interpolation method uses a weighted average of four cells in the original
image and applies this to the new image. The new image is smoothed compared to the
original image. This method is best for continuous data.
Specify Coordinate System

The current coordinate system is displayed in the bottom left side of the Image
Registration and Warping dialog.
Set the Coordinate System in the Specify Coordinate System section.
If you want to use the current coordinate system, select the Use Current option.
Otherwise, select the Specify option to enable to the Coordinate System button. Click
the Coordinate System button to open the Assign Coordinate System dialog. Set the
coordinate system for the image in your current Didger project. This is the coordinate
system that the image is currently displaying.
Specify Image Extents

Check the box next to the Automatic Image Extents option to use the default map
extents, image extents, and scaling. The Image Extents values are displayed below
the Automatic Image Extents box. For example you may import an image and the
Image Extents value may read 515(w) x 515(h). This means the original image was
imported with a width of 515 pixels and a height of 515 pixels.
207
Didger
Set the image extents in the Specify Image Extents section.
If Automatic Image Extents is not checked, the Set Extents button is enabled. Click
the Set Extents button to open the Change Output Limits dialog and specify the
output extents for the map, change the pixel dimensions of the image, or change the
scaling. This is useful if you want to create a subset image with a certain extent from
the original file.
Preview
Click the Preview button to open the Warp Preview window. A scaled down version of
the warped image is displayed. This preview does not use the entire image to display
results and therefore, it has a slightly different appearance than the final image will
look.
Import without Referencing and Warping

If you do not want the image to be georeferenced, calibrated, or warped, but still want
to load it into your Didger project, click the Un-referenced button. This imports the
image and allows you to manually move it around in the project window using your
mouse.
Resizing the Dialog

To make the Image Registration and Warping dialog larger or smaller, click and
drag on the lower left corner of the dialog. When the dialog is the desired size, release
the mouse button.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to save the calibration and apply the new coordinates to the image. Click
Cancel to exit the Image Registration and Warping dialog without applying the
new coordinates.
208
Example 1: Calibrating an Image by Entering Coordinates

If you know the coordinates of at least three points on your image enter the Reference
X and Reference Y coordinates in the calibration points table.
To calibrate the image with three or more known points:

1. Click the Source Image tab at the top of the Image Registration and Warping
dialog.
2. In the calibration points table, select the first calibration point.
3. Enter the coordinates of that calibration point in the Reference X and Reference Y
cells.
4. Use the , , , or buttons in the Source Image window to move

the view to the location of that calibration point.
5. Click the button to enter calibration mode.

6. Click on the calibration point location in the Source Image window.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each calibration point.
Example 2: Calibrating an Image by Selecting Reference Points in an

Existing Project
If you do not know the exact coordinates of three or more points on your image, but
you do know where in the project the image is supposed to be located, you can use
the Project Reference Coordinates page to help calibrate the image.
To calibrate with reference points on an image:

1. Click the Dual View tab at the top of the Image Registration and Warping
dialog.
2. In the calibration points table, select the first calibration point.
3. Use the , , , or buttons in the Source Image window (image on

the left) to move the view to the location of that calibration point.
4. Click the button to enter calibration mode.

5. Click on the calibration point location in the Source Image window (image on the
left). The pixel location of that point is entered in the Image X and Image Y fields.
6. Use the , , , or buttons in the Project Reference Coordinates

window (image on the right) to move the view to the location of that calibration
point.
209
Didger
7. Click the button and click on the calibration point location in the project in the
Project Reference Coordinates window. The coordinates of that point are entered
in the Reference X and Reference Y cells.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each calibration point.
Change Output Limits Dialog

Use the Change Output Limits dialog when you do not want to use the Automatic
Image Extents in the Image Registration and Warping dialog. This dialog lets you
specify a particular extent from the original image.
Set the limits and image extents in the Change Output Limits dialog.
Output Map Extents

The Output Map Extents section describe the limits, in world coordinates, of the new
warped image. You can set the extents manually by entering the extents into the X
Minimum, X Maximum, Y Minimum, and Y Maximum boxes. Alternatively, you can set
the extents by choosing Input Image Extents or Calibration Coordinates from the Set
Extents Based Upon drop-down list.
• Input Bitmap Extents calculates the extents based on the edges of the original
image.
• Calibration Coordinates defines the extents based on the calculated extents of
the calibration points.
210
Output Image Extents

The X Output Image Extents and Y Output Image Extents sections specify the scaling
along the specified axes. You can use these settings to create a smaller test image
before making a larger image. For example, if your DRG is 5000 X 5000 pixels, you
can make a 300 X 300 pixel image to check the warping before making the final
image. Use Edit | Undo to return to the original state if you have made a test image,
and then rewarp the image using the final image extents.
• The 1 Pixel = __ Map Units edit box specifies the number of units pixel in the
specified dimension. For example, if your calibrated image contains meters as
the units, and you want your project to be drawn at a scale of 100 meters per
pixel, type the value 100 into the edit box. The Width or Height value is
automatically updated to reflect the change you make.
• The Width and Height edit boxes specify the length of the project in the
specified dimension. When you change the Width or Height value, the 1 Pixel
= __ Map Units edit box is automatically updated to reflect the change.
Proportional XY Scaling
The Set Proportional XY Scaling check box forces the X and Y dimensions to be scaled
equally. When the check box is activated and you make a change to the X or Y
dimension, the other dimension is scaled the same amount. The same number of units
per pixel is applied to both the X and Y dimensions. If you want to scale the
dimensions differently, you must uncheck the check box.
Undo
Once you have clicked the OK button in the Change Output Limits dialog, the
calculations take place. Depending on the selected Warp Method, this may take
awhile. You may be asked about Undo due to the size of the image. If you are sure
that the warp settings are correct, click Yes to continue without undo.
Image Processing Filters

The Image | Processing Filters command is used to pre-process images for
vectorization. The complete list of image processing filters are: Edge Detection, Image
Thinning, Spatial Filters, Sharpen, Median Filter, Adjust Contrast, Adjust Brightness,
Adjust Saturation, Color Reduction, Image Erosion and Dilation, Convert to Black and
White, and Convert to Grayscale. Each method is discussed in the following pages.
211
Didger
Edge Detection
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Edge Detection command to accurately
identify the edges of solid objects. Edges characterize boundaries and are therefore of
fundamental importance in image processing. Edges in images are areas with strong
intensity contrasts from one pixel to the next. Detecting an images edge significantly
reduces the amount of data and filters out useless information, while preserving the
important structural properties in an image.
Edge Detection simplifies the image to a series of

lines that outline the edges of the original objects.
The Edge Detection dialog includes two key functions (Gaussian Standard Deviation
and Hysteresis) to successfully identify the outline of an image object.
Gaussian Standard Deviation

The Gaussian Standard Deviation option is used to smooth the image to look for
horizontal, vertical, and diagonal edges through an image. Based upon the supplied
value in the Gaussian Standard Deviation, Didger creates a convolution mask size.
The Gaussian Standard Deviation is a value between the 0.1 and 3.0. When set to 0.1,
212
shorter and more fragmented lines are created across the image. When set to 3.0,
longer, more continuous lines are created across the image. To change the value,
highlight the existing value and type a new value. Alternatively, click and drag the
to the desired value.
Hysteresis Threshold Values

Hysteresis helps to connect lines based on angles and pixel value connectivity. To
achieve this, hysteresis uses two different threshold values: High and Low. To change
the value, highlight the existing value and type a new value. Alternatively, click and
drag the to the right or left. The values range between 0 and 255.
The High value marks out the strongest edges of an image. Hysteresis traces these
high value edges through the image. The Low value traces faint sections of lines and
avoids the few noisy pixels that do not constitute a line. Together these high and low
values are able to identify edges and continuity in an image. Typically, the higher
threshold can be set to approximately three times the lower threshold.
Post Process Line Thinning

Check the box next to the Post Process Line Thinning option to force a line thinning
routine. This ensures all lines are one pixel wide. When unchecked, the line width can
vary.
Preview Windows
The immediate effects of the edge detection changes are displayed in the dialog. The
image on the left side is the Original Image, as it appears in the project. The image on
the right is the Sample Output, which displays the changes as the Gaussian Standard
Deviation and Hysteresis Threshold Values are changed in the dialog.

Above the image are several buttons for zooming in or out on the image. Click the
button to enter zoom in mode. The cursor changes to to indicate zoom in
mode. Click on the image to zoom in at the desired location. Click the button to
the left of the image to enter zoom out mode. The cursor changes to to indicate
zoom out mode. Click on the image to zoom out at the desired location.
Click the button to zoom out to the entire extents of the image. The full image is
displayed.
213
Didger
Click the button to enter pan mode. Click and hold the mouse button down. The
cursor changes to to indicate pan mode. Drag the mouse around to move the
image. Alternatively, click and hold the mouse wheel down to pan around the image.
As the zoom changes in the Original Image view, the same zoom appears in the
Sample Output view. This way you can compare the same extents with the applied
settings in both views.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to apply the edge detection to the image. Click Cancel to close the dialog
without applying the edge detection to the image.
Color Image Tip

Grayscale images tend to show the most dramatic difference when changing the
Hysteresis Threshold Values and Gaussian Standard Deviation values. If an image is
not responding well to the edge detection, try converting the image to a grayscale
image with the Image | Processing Filters | Convert to Grayscale command
before applying the edge detection.
214
Image Thinning
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Image Thinning command to reduce line
images to one pixel width line segments. Image thinning is a good processing tool for
black and white images that contain simple line or shape objects rather than complex
shapes. It can be used for several applications, but is particularly useful for reducing
foreground regions in a black and white image to a skeletal structure that largely
preserves the extent and connectivity of the original region while removing most of
the original foreground pixels. In this mode it is commonly used to tidy up the output
of edge detectors by reducing all lines to single pixel thickness.
Use the Image Thinning dialog, to reduce lines in images to one pixel in width.
Thinning Method
The Image Thinning dialog allows you to thin an image using either the Standard
Object Thinning or the Image Thinning with angle enhancement method. The Standard
Object Thinning method is the default and works on most images with rounded and
curved shapes. The Image Thinning with angle enhancement method is a better option
for images with corners and angular edges. Click on the desired method and the
preview image updates.
215
Didger
Preview Windows
The immediate effects of the image thinning changes are displayed in the dialog. The
image on the left side is the Original Image, as it appears in the project. The image on
the right is the Sample Output, which displays the changes as the image thinning is
applied in the dialog.

displayed.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to apply the image thinning to the image. Click Cancel to close the dialog
without applying the image thinning to the image.
216
Spatial Filters
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Spatial Filters command to accentuate the
appearance of an image. The filters can bring out the spatial details that might be
required to digitize objects from an image. There are 17 spatial filters to choose from
in Didger. Spatial filters help to accentuate the appearance of an image.
Select the type of spatial filter and click

Apply to view the image with the filter applied.
Spatial Filter Type

The type of spatial filter applied determines how objects are emphasized in the image.
Available filters are: Laplacian Omnidirectional Filter 1, Laplacian Omnidirectional Filter
2, Laplacian Omnidirectional Filter 3, Laplacian Diagonal, Laplacian Horizontal,
Laplacian Vertical, Sobel Horizontal, Sobel Vertical, Prewitt Horizontal, Prewitt Vertical,
Shift-Difference Diagonal, Shift-Difference Horizontal, Shift-Difference Vertical, Line
Segment Horizontal, Line Segment Vertical, Line Segment L-R, and Line Segment R-L.
For more information on the filters listed above, refer to the references on the next
page or to other imaging spatial filter references.
View Filter
To view the affects of a filter, select the desired filter and click Apply. The image in the
Didger window changes to display the filter results.
Reset Image
To return the image to the original state without any filters, click Reset.
OK, Close, or Apply

Click Apply to view the affects of the filter on the image in the Didger window. Click
OK to apply the spatial filter to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to close the
dialog. Any spatial filters that have been applied to the image are saved.
217
Didger
Spatial Filter References

Baxes, Gregory A., (1994), Digital Image Processing: Principles and Applications,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 480 pp.
Crane, Randy, (1996), A Simplified Approach to Image Processing: Classic and
Modern Techniques in C, Prentice Hall, 336 pp.
Sharpen
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Sharpen command to sharpen the resolution
of an image. The Sharpen Image dialog opens, allowing you to enter the percentage
of sharpening to apply. Sharpening is used to emphasize the details in an image. This
filter increases the contrast between adjacent pixels. When the images appear fuzzy,
this function can aid in restoring them to a better-enhanced state. This function
enhances the overall contrast of an image.
Set the Percentage to sharpen the image

and click Apply to view the filter on the image.
Percentage
The Percentage value controls the amount of sharpening applied to the image. To
change the value, highlight the existing number and type the desired value.
Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the value. The Percentage value
must be between -100 and +100. The higher the value, the more sharpening is
applied. The edges in the image become more exaggerated. The lower the value, the
less emphasis is applied.
View Filter
To view the affects of the sharpening filter, select the desired Percentage and click
Apply. The image in the Didger window changes to display the sharpened image
results.
218
Reset Image
To return the image to the original state, click Reset.
OK, Close, or Apply

Click Apply to view the affects of the sharpening filter on the image in the Didger
window. Click OK to apply the sharpening filter to the image and close the dialog. Click
Close to close the dialog. Any sharpening that has been applied to the image are
saved.
Median Filter
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Median Filter command to remove detail
from the image. The median filter "blurs" the image such that major details are seen
more easily while removing the intricate details.
Set the Sample Size and click Apply

to view the median filter on the image.
Sample Size
Choose a number between three and 11 for the amount of median filtering to apply to
the image. Median filters are a nonlinear filter based on the median brightness value
of each input group of pixels. The filter is very good for removing noise and other
anomalies from an image. The higher the value, the more filtering is applied. To
change the Sample Size, click on the existing value and select the desired value from
the list.
View Filter
To view the affects of the median filter, select the desired Sample Size and click Apply.
The image in the Didger window changes to display the median filtered image results.
219
Didger
Reset Image
OK, Close, or Apply

Click Apply to view the affects of the median filter on the image in the Didger window.
Click OK to apply the median filter to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to
close the dialog. Any filtering that has been applied to the image are saved.
Adjust Contrast
The Image | Processing Filters | Adjust Contrast command opens the Change
Contrast dialog and adjusts the amount of contrast in the image. Contrast is the
difference in brightness between the dark and light components of an image.
Set the Percentage and click Apply

to view the filter on the image.
Percentage
The Percentage value controls the amount of contrast applied to the image. To change
the value, highlight the existing number and type the desired value. Alternatively, click
the to increase or decrease the value. The Percentage value must be between -
100 and +100. The higher the value, the more contrast is applied. The colors in the
image become more exaggerated. The lower the value, the less contrast is applied.
The colors in the image become closer to other colors.
View Filter
To view the affects of a filter, select the desired filter amount and click Apply. The
image in the Didger window changes to display the filter results.
220
Reset Image
OK, Close, or Apply

OK to apply the contrast filter to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to close
the dialog. Any contrast filters that have been applied to the image are saved.
Adjust Brightness
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Adjust Brightness command to control the
amount of light assigned to the image.

Percentage
The Percentage value controls the amount of brightness in the image. To change the
value, highlight the existing number and type the desired value. Alternatively, click the
to increase or decrease the value. The Percentage value must be between -100
and +100. The higher the value, the more fading toward white is applied to the image.
The image becomes very light. The lower the value, the more darkness toward black is
applied to the image. The image becomes very dark.
View Filter
To view the affects of a filter, select the filter amount and click Apply. The image in the
Didger window changes to display the filter results.
Reset Image
221
Didger
OK, Close, or Apply

OK to apply the brightness filter to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to close
the dialog. Any brightness filters that have been applied to the image are saved.
Adjust Saturation
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Adjust Saturation command to adjust the
color saturation of the image. Saturation refers to relative purity or the amount of
white light mixed with hue.

Percentage
The Percentage value controls the amount of color saturation applied to the image. To
Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the value. The Percentage value
must be between -100 and +100. The higher the value, the more saturation is
applied. The colors in the image become deeper. The lower the value, the less
saturation is applied. The colors in the image become more gray.
View Filter
To view the affects of the filter, select the desired Percentage and click Apply. The
image in the Didger window changes to display the saturation filter image results.
Reset Image
222
OK, Close, or Apply

Click Apply to view the affects of the saturation filter on the image in the Didger
window. Click OK to apply the saturation filter to the image and close the dialog. Click
Close to close the dialog. Any saturation filter that has been applied to the image are
saved.
Color Reduction
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Color Reduction command to reduce the
number of colors in an image. This is useful when you want to simplify a complex
image or reduce its size.
Set the number of colors and the color reduction

method and click Apply to view the filter on the image.
New Color Count

The New Color Count option controls the number of colors in the filtered image. To
Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the value. The New Color Count
value must be any integer between 2 and 256. The lower the value, the less colors are
displayed in the filtered image.
Method
The Method determines how the color reduction is applied. Available options are 5:5:5
Median cut, 8:8:8 Median cut, and Popularity. To change the Method, click on the
down arrow next to the existing option and select the desired option from the list.
The 5:5:5 Median cut implementation uses 5 bits of precision for each color: 5 bits
red, 5 bits green, and 5 bits blue. The 8:8:8 Median cut uses 8 bits of precision for
each color: 8 bits red, 8 bits green, and 8 bits blue. Normally, the 5:5:5 Median cut
method is faster, but the 8:8:8 Median cut method offers better color distribution.
223
Didger
The Popularity method maintains good color integrity in images where most of the
colors are similar in hue. For example, a source image that contains mostly shades of
red maintains the subtle variations between the different shades of red as long as
there are not large concentrations of other hues in the image. However, the Popularity
method can lose portions of the color spectrum in images where many colors are
similar in hue. If a source image contains many shades of red and only a few shades
of green, choosing this method may result in an image without green at all if there
was too much red in the source image.
View Filter
To view the affects of the filter, select the desired Percentage and click Apply. The
image in the Didger window changes to display the color reduction filter image
results.
Reset Image
OK, Close, or Apply

Click Apply to view the affects of the color reduction filter on the image in the Didger
window. Click OK to apply the color reduction filter to the image and close the dialog.
Click Close to close the dialog. Any color reduction filter that has been applied to the
image are saved.
Image Erosion and Dilation

Click the Image | Processing Filters | Image Erosion and Dilation command to
eliminate small image object features, such as noise spikes and ragged edges. Erosion
and Dilation are normally used in vectorization pre-processing. The effect is to remove
single-pixel object anomalies such as small spurs and single pixel noise spikes. As a
result, objects are smoothed. This is particularly effective with contour images.
Set the Method, the Pass Size, and click

Apply to view the image with the filter.
224
Method
The Method is the type of process that is applied to the image. Available options are:
Erosion, Dilation, Opening and Closing. To change the Method, click on the down arrow
next to the existing option and select the desired option from the list. Erosion
uniformly reduces the size of objects in relation to their background. Dilation uniformly
expands the size of objects in relation to their background. Opening applies first
Erosion and then Dilation. Closing applies first Dilation and then Erosion, filling in
single pixel anomalies, such as holes and gaps. Examples of each are shown in the
following graphics.
This is the image before using Image

Erosion and Dilation processing filters.
Erosion uniformly reduces the size of objects Dilation uniformly expands the size of
in relation to their background. objects in relation to their background.
225
Didger
Opening uses the Erosion operation followed Closing uses the Dilation operation followed
by a Dilation operation. by an Erosion operation and fills in single
pixel object anomalies, such as small holes
and gaps.
Pass Size
The Pass Size is the number of passes or consecutive operations used on an image.
To change the value, highlight the existing number and type the desired value.
Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the value. The Pass Size value must
be any integer between 1 and 25. The lower the value, the less number of times the
filter is applied. The higher the value, the more filtering is applied. This is useful if you
want to build up the process incrementally to get the desired result.
View Filter
To view the affects of the filter, select the desired Method and Pass Size and click
Apply. The image in the Didger window changes to display the filtered image results.
Reset Image
OK, Close, or Apply

OK to apply the filter to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to close the dialog.
Any filter that has been applied to the image are saved.
226
Convert to Black and White

Click the Image | Processing Filters | Convert to Black and White command to
convert color images to black and white. This feature is useful when the file size is
very large. Converting the image to black and white reduces the memory overhead
and allows the program to process information more quickly.
Set the Method and click OK to convert the color image to black and white.
Method
The Method determines how the colors are converted to black and white. Available
options are: Intensity Threshold and Brightness Threshold. To change the Method,
click on the existing option and select the desired option from the list. Intensity
Threshold refers to the magnitude, or amount, of light actually reflected or
transmitted. For instance, a low Intensity Threshold yields more white in the image
and a high Intensity Threshold yields more black. Brightness Threshold refers to the
contrast of brightness between black and white. For instance, a low Brightness
Threshold makes more black pixels white. A high Brightness Threshold creates a
higher brightness contrast by making more white pixels black.
227
Didger
To change the amount of the method applied, click and drag the to
the desired value.
Preview Windows
The immediate effects of the method options are displayed in the dialog. The image on
the left side is the Original Image, as it appears in the project. The image on the right
is the Sample Output, which displays the changes as the Method and amount of the
Method are changed in the dialog.

displayed.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to apply the black and white method to the image. Click Cancel to close the
dialog without applying the black and white method to the image.
228
Convert to Grayscale
Click the Image | Processing Filters | Convert to Grayscale command or click the
button to convert the image to eight shades of gray. This feature is useful when
the file size is very large. Converting the image to grayscale reduces the memory
overhead and allows the program to process information more quickly. It is also easier
to view the newly digitized vector objects.
To control how the colors are changed, click the Image | Processing Filters |
Convert to Black and White instead.
Clipping Images
There are two methods of clipping images in a Didger project. The image can be
clipped based on a polygon or the image can be clipped to remove the map collar that
may exist with USGS topographic maps.
Images can also be cropped using the Image | Crop Image command. Cropped
images remove the outside cropped portion. After closing the file, the cropped portion
cannot be retrieved. Clipped images can be reverted to the original image with the
Image | Remove Clipping command.
Clip Image with Current Polygon

Click the Image | Clip Image | Current Polygon command to clip an image to a
previously drawn polygon. The polygon can exist on any layer in the project. All
images in the project that are on non-locked, visible layers are clipped to the polygon.
To clip an image with a polygon:

1. Import an image into the project by clicking the File | Import command.
2. Click the Draw | Polygon, Draw | Rectangle, Draw | Circle, or Draw | Spline
Polygon command. A polygon must be a simple polygon, not a complex polygon.
3. Click on the polygon to select it.
4. Click the Image | Clip Image | Current Polygon command. The image portions
outside the polygon are removed.
229
Didger
Digitize a polygon around the area you Select the polygon and click the Image |
would like to retain. The polygon is shown as Clip Image | Current Polygon
a thick black line above. command to clip the image.
Map Collar
The map collar is the area outside the neat lines in a map. The collar contains
information about the map, such as its name, location, scale, etc. Click the Image |
Clip Image | Map Collar command to remove the collar. If you remove the collars
from multiple image files, you can use Image | Mosaic to create a single new image.
USGS Digital Raster Graphic .DRG files are scanned topographic maps that sometimes
contain map collars. .DRG files are either in a .TIF or .DRG file format. Didger
supports the .TIF format. To use the Image | Clip Image | Map Collar command,
the directory where the .TIF file is located also must contain a .FGD file. The .FGD file
defines the map collar. The Image | Clip Image | Map Collar command works with
1:24,000; 1:63,360; 1:100,000; and 1:250,000 scale maps that contain the
accompanying .FGD file.
To remove a map collar:

1. Import an image into a Didger project by clicking the File | Import command.
2. Click once on the image to select it.
3. Click the Image | Clip Image | Map Collar command.
230
The image on the left is the original image with a map collar.
The image on the right is the image after removing the map collar.
Remove Clipping
If an image has been clipped with either the Image | Clip Image | Current Polygon
or Image | Clip Image | Map Collar command, the clipping can be removed from
the map by clicking the Image | Clip Image | Remove Clipping command.
If you have any other objects selected, the Remove Clipping command is grayed
out.
To remove clipping:
1. Click the Edit | Deselect All command to deselect all objects.
2. Click once on the image to select it.
3. Click the Image | Clip Image | Remove Clipping command. The image is
displayed in the original format.
Images can be cropped using the Image | Crop Image command. Cropped images
remove the outside cropped portion. After closing the file, the cropped portion cannot
be retrieved.
Remove All Clipping

If multiple images have been clipped with either the Image | Clip Image | Current
Polygon or Image | Clip Image | Map Collar command, the clipping from all the
images can be removed at once with the Remove All Clipping command.
231
Didger
To remove all clipping, click anywhere in the project and click the Image | Clip
Image | Remove All Clipping. All images are displayed in the original format.
Images can be cropped using the Image | Crop Image command. Cropped images
remove the outside cropped portion. After closing the file, the cropped portion cannot
be retrieved.
Cropping Images
Click the Image | Crop Image command or click the button to extract a small
section of an image. After clicking this command, the cursor changes to . Click
and drag the cursor around the area you would like to keep. The portion of the image
outside the drawn box is automatically removed. The selected portion of the image is
cropped and becomes a new image. The new image can be exported to a new image
file, if desired. The original image does not exist any longer.
The image cannot be restored to the original format except by clicking the Edit |
Undo command. Cropped images remove the outside cropped portion. After closing
the file, the cropped portion cannot be retrieved. If any portion of the image may need
to be retrieved at a later point, use the Image | Clip Image commands instead.
Drag a rectangle around the area you wish to

keep with Image | Crop Image.
232
Resizing Images
Click the Image | Resize Image command to change the pixel dimensions and
resolution of an image.
Set the new image size and resolution in the Resize Image dialog.
Pixel Dimensions
Choose the Width and Height pixel settings for the resized image. The Pixel
Dimensions indicate the number of pixels that are in the new image. The larger the
number of pixels, the larger the image will be. Values should be between 10 and
32767 in both the Width and Height directions. To change the value, highlight the
existing value and type a new value. When the box next to the Constrain Proportions
option is checked, changing either the Width or the Height automatically changes the
other dimension.
Document Size
The Document Size section displays the Width and Height of the selected image in
page units. When the box next to the Retain Document Size option is checked, the
Width and Height are not available and show the original image size. When the box
next to the Retain Document Size option is not checked, the Width and Height can be
changed separately.
233
Didger
Resolution
Choose the Resolution to increase or decrease the number of pixels in a page unit of
the image being resized. If you choose to change the number, the Width and Height in
the Pixel Dimensions changes automatically. The Resolution controls how fine the new
image will appear. The larger the number, the larger the Pixel Dimensions will be.
Constrain Proportions
Check the box next to the Constrain Proportions option to retain the original image
pixel proportions. When checked, the new image will have the same height to width
ratio as the original image, resulting in no stretching of the new image. When
unchecked, the new image can have different Height and Width values, allowing the
image to be stretched.
Retain Document Size

Check the box next to the Retain Document Size option to keep the original image size
in page units. Uncheck the box to change the Document SIze Width and Height
options. The Resolution can be changed under either condition and the pixel
dimensions change accordingly.
Resample Method
The Resample Method controls how the image is resized. Available options are:
Nearest Neighbor, Bilinear, Cardinal cubic spline, B-Spline, and BC-Spline. To change
the method, click on the existing method and select the desired method from the list.
The Nearest Neighbor method locates the center of each new image cell and locates
equivalent centers on the original image. The closest cell on the original image is
assigned to the new image cell. When the original image and the new image differ in
size, more than one original cell may be applied to the new image and some original
image cells are not applied to the new image. The nearest neighbor method is the
fastest resampling method, though it can result in distorted output if the original
image and new images differ in size. This method is best for cells containing discrete
data.
The Bilinear Interpolation method uses a weighted average of four cells in the original
image and applies this to the new image. The new image is smoothed compared to the
original image. This method is best for continuous data.
The Cardinal cubic spline method is a fast method to reduce sharp changes in the
image. It often results in various degrees of blurring.
234
The B-Spline method uses a cubic spline method to emulate a Gaussian blurring filter.
This is commonly used to produce a smooth flow though the control points. Typically,
the B-Spline method creates various degrees of blurring in the new image.
The BC-Spline method is similar to the B-Spline method, but tends to produce sharper
angles in the new image.
Reset Image
OK or Cancel
Click OK to resize the image. Click Cancel to close the dialog without resizing the image.
Mosaicking Images
Click the Image | Mosaic command to combine image files from adjacent areas into
a new seamless single image file.
To mosaic image files:

1. Select all of the images that should be combined.
2. Click the Image | Mosaic command.
3. Click the Save button to save the image file with the new name and location.
4. The images in the project are now replaced with a single new image file.
235
Didger
Changing Image Color Formats

Click the Image | Change Color Format command to change the current color depth
of an image after an image has been imported. Reducing the color depth can save
space in the project.
Set the new image color format and click OK.
Select New Format

You can select one of the following color formats:
• 1 bit/pixel Grayscale
• 8 bits/pixel Grayscale
• 1 bit/pixel Indexed Color
• 4 bits/pixel Indexed Color
• 8 bits/pixel Indexed Color
• 24 bits/pixel True Color
OK or Cancel
Click OK to change the color format of the image. Click Cancel to close the dialog
without changing the color format of the image.
236
Modifying Image Colors

Click the Image | Modify Image Colors command or click the button to change
or modify the colors of an image.
Select the appropriate colors and the type of modification

and click Apply to view the changes on the image.
Current Color
The Current Color column displays the color selected from the image in the plot
window. To change the Current Color, move the pointer over the image in the plot
window. Move the cursor over the image, and the cursor changes to . Click on the
color you want to select and the Current Color selected is changed. If you make a
mistake or click the wrong color, simply click again on the intended color on the image
to update the color in the Current Color column.
To zoom into the image, press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and click on
the image. To zoom out of the image, press and hold the CTRL key on the keyboard
237
Didger
and click on the image. Alternatively, use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in and out.
To move around on the image, click on the scroll bars to move up/down or right/left.
Alternatively, press and hold the mouse scroll wheel down and drag the image on the
screen.
To add a new color to the list, click Add to the right of the color section. To delete a
color from the list, click on the color in the dialog and click Delete to the right of the
color section. To delete all of the selected colors, click Remove All.
Color Tolerance
The Tolerance determines the range of colors identified by each color. The value is
reported in the Tolerance column. Tolerance defines a similarity in color from one pixel
in an image from another pixel in that same image. For instance, the blue rivers might
be a darker value than the lighter colored lakes. If you only want the blue rivers to
change colors, then you want the tolerance value low so the range of blue does not
include the lighter blue lakes. Pixel values can range from 0 to 255. A low color
tolerance is very similar to the pixel color selected. A high color tolerance fills the
pixels within a broader range. Click and drag the to the right to
broaden the pixel range of color. The tolerance number moves up as the slider moves
right. This is useful for color images that have a variety of pixel color ranges and all of
the colors in the range should be changed. When the Tolerance value is zero, only the
selected color is changed.
Transparent
The Transparent column is either True or False. When the Transparent option is True,
the Make Pixel Transparent option is selected. When the Transparent option is False,
the Replace Pixel Color option is selected. When Transparent is set to True, all of the
selected colors are removed from the image, as if they were not there. When
Transparent is set to False, all of the selected colors are change to another color, as
displayed in the New Color column.
New Color
The New Color column displays the color that replaces the Current Color. If Replace
Pixel Color is selected, click on the color button to the right and select a color from the
color palette. Once a new color is selected from the list, it is displayed in the New
Color column. When replacing a color in a grayscale image with a true color, Didger
converts the selected color to its corresponding gray shade. If the Make Pixel
Transparent option is selected, there is an X through the New Color column, indicating
that the color is transparent, not replaced.
238
Set All Transparent Pixels to Opaque

Check the box next to the Set all transparent pixels to opaque to convert all
transparent colors in the image back to the pre-transparent color.
OK, Close, Apply, or Cancel

Click Apply to view the color changes on the image in the Didger window. Click OK to
apply the color changes to the image and close the dialog. Click Close to close the
dialog. Any color changes that have been applied to the image are saved. Click Cancel
to undo all changes that have been made in the dialog.
239
Didger
240
Chapter 7
Tablet Digitizing
Didger instead.

Scanners
paper document.
241
Didger
What is Digitizing?
Digitizing is the process of transferring paper document information, image file
information, or data to your computer. This is accomplished with the use of a digitizing
tablet or by importing an image or vector file. Software such as Didger converts the
information from the file or paper document to digital information.
By providing the computer with the coordinates necessary to define object locations in
relation to other objects, you can create a file of object locations. Object locations are
defined by XY coordinates, such as latitude/longitude, UTM (Universal Transverse
Mercator), State Plane, or any type of coordinate system. In addition, with Didger you
can associate text and data with the objects that you digitize.
Tablet Digitizing
Digitizing with a tablet and puck, like the one shown below, is a fast and efficient
method when documents such as larger paper maps or bore hole logs need to be
converted into data. Digitizing tablets consist of a large flat surface with an underlying
electronic detection system. To use the digitizer, the document is placed on the tablet.
The document should not be moved after being placed on the tablet. The document is
calibrated by setting the tablet location to some type of coordinate system. This is
done by selecting from three to 256 calibration points. Once calibrated, points,
polylines, and polygons can be transferred from the tablet to the computer screen,
then printed or exported in a variety of formats.
You can digitize paper documents with a

digitizing tablet and a puck (shown above).
242
To begin digitizing:
1. Click the File | New command.
2. Place the document securely on the tablet. The document does not have to be
perfectly oriented on the tablet because Didger corrects for any rotation in the
document relative to the tablet.
3. Click the Draw | Tablet | Tablet Calibration command or click the button.
4. The Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog opens, allowing the digitizing tablet to be
calibrated before beginning work on the project.
a. In the first dialog, click the Coordinate System button.
i. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, set the coordinate space type,
axis units, calibration units, and projection if desired. This information must
match the document's information.
ii. Click OK.
b. Click Next.
c. In the Create Calibration Points dialog, set the calibration points to use.
Select at least three calibration points on the document and determine the X
and Y coordinates for each point.
i. Enter the calibration points in to the World X and World Y boxes. For each
point, you must enter the X and Y coordinates that define the point’s
position in the document.
ii. The ID is optional.
iii. Once you have entered the calibration points, click on point number one,
and then move the tablet pointer over the point to be calibrated and click. A
dot appears in the dialog indicating the point you clicked.
iv. Continue clicking the calibration points until all are entered.
v. Click Next.
d. In the RMS Calibration Settings dialog, verify the calibration and the RMS
value. If the value is not low enough, click Back and recalibrate the tablet. If
the value is acceptable, click Next.
e. In the Calibration Settings dialog, set the tolerance values, the display units,
and the tablet button settings. Click Next.
f. In the Specify Project Limits and Scale dialog, set the axis limits and
scaling. Click Finish and the tablet is ready for digitizing.
5. Once the tablet is calibrated, click the commands on the Draw menu to draw
objects. Use the tablet puck to click on the objects.
6. After objects are drawn, the map projection can be changed, if desired.
243
Didger
Activate Tablet
Before you digitize objects, the digitizing tablet must be calibrated (see Tablet
Calibration), and must be activated by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Activate Tablet
command, clicking the button, or pressing F9 on the keyboard. This activates

the tablet pointer for digitizing. When the tablet is not activated, the tablet pointer
operates as a mouse. You must activate the tablet for the project coordinates to
appear in the status bar.
Why Calibrate the Tablet?

When you want to digitize points, polylines, or polygons from a paper document, you
must first calibrate the digitizing tablet using the Didger Tablet Calibration Wizard.
Digitizing tablets have an internal coordinate system that is not related to the
coordinate system of your document. Tablet calibration is how Didger determines the
relationship between your paper document's coordinate system and the coordinate
system of the tablet.
Before you calibrate the tablet, you must select between three and 256 calibration
points on your paper document, and determine the document XY coordinates for these
calibration points. When you place the document on the digitizing tablet, the document
calibration points are placed over specific tablet locations. The Tablet Calibration
Wizard asks you to enter the document coordinates for your calibration points and
then click each calibration point. This way, Didger knows where these document
calibration points lie in relation to the tablet coordinates, and can then convert all
subsequently digitized object coordinates to document coordinates for use in Didger.
Once you have calibrated the digitizing tablet, you are ready to digitize objects from
your paper document. This is the actual transfer of data from your paper document to
the computer. During this procedure, you transfer the document location of objects as
well as names or data associated with each object. A Didger project can contain any
number and combination of objects.
Selecting Calibration Points

Before you begin calibrating, you must select at least three calibration points either on
the Image Source in the Image Registration and Warping dialog for an image or
the Tablet X and Tablet Y in the Create Calibration Points dialog for a tablet.
Calibration points can be bench marks, surveyed points, grid intersection lines, axis
intersections, or any type of identifiable point you choose. These points are entered
into the calibration points table.
244
Calibration points can be at any location and are important in establishing the quality
of your subsequently digitized data. The accuracy also depends on the degree of
precision you use when digitizing the calibration points.
The calibration points cannot lie in a straight line. If you can, spread the calibration
points over the extent of the document or image.
Tablet Calibration
Click the Draw | Tablet | Tablet Calibration command or click the button to
calibrate the digitizing tablet before beginning work on a project or continuing with a
project. The Tablet Calibration Wizard steps through the necessary options to begin
a new project or to recalibrate an existing project using the digitizing tablet. The tablet
must be calibrated before digitizing objects.
Rotation
Your paper source documents can be rotated on the tablet, and Didger corrects for
any rotation.
Scaling
Paper source documents can use different scaling in the two dimensions. For example,
Tablet Calibration Wizard

The Tablet Calibration Wizard leads you through the necessary steps to calibrate a
digitizing tablet. The tablet must be calibrated before you can digitize objects from
your source document.
The source document can use different scaling in the two dimensions. For example,
Tablet Calibration Wizard Coordinate System Dialog

The Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog is part of the Tablet Calibration Wizard
process. Use the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog to set up the coordinates, axes,
and the projection of the source document or image. The settings in this dialog must
match the original document or image settings.
245
Didger
Set the coordinate space type, the axis scales, and the map
projection parameters in the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog.
Coordinate System
Click the Coordinate System button to open the Assign Coordinate System dialog.
Set the Coordinate Space Type, axis types, and projection information. Click OK to
return to the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog.
NOTE: You must know the exact projection category, system, and datum settings
used in the file to enter the Projected Coordinate System settings manually. If you
incorrectly set the projection parameters, the map will be distorted. Do not use this
dialog to change the projection, use it to initially set the projection. If you would like
to change the map's projection, create the map. After digitizing the objects on the
map, change the projection by clicking the Map | Change Projection command.
246
Create Calibration Points Dialog

The Create Calibration Points dialog is part of the Tablet Calibration Wizard. In the
Create Calibration Points dialog, enter the World X and World Y coordinates for the
calibration points you select. After the values are input, click on the tablet at these
locations to define the correspondence between the source document coordinates and
the digitizing tablet coordinates.
At least three calibration points must be entered. Depending on which georeference

method is selected, additional points can be added. Calibration points cannot be in a
straight line (collinear). In addition, an optional ID for each point can be entered to
help identify the points as each is calibrated.
Enter the calibration points World X and World Y coordinates.

Click on the points to have Didger enter the Tablet X and Tablet Y coordinates.
247
Didger
Entering Calibration Points

To enter calibration points:
1. Position the puck's cross hair over the place on the paper source document where
you want to define a calibration point.
2. Click the puck's digitize button (usually button 1). The tablet coordinates for that
point are filled into the Tablet X and Tablet Y columns.
3. Assign the fields in the data file to the calibration points field.
a. Click in the Point ID box and type the ID for this calibration point. The ID is
optional.
b. Click in the World X box and type the document's X coordinate for this
calibration point.
c. Click in the World Y box and type the document's Y coordinate for this
calibration point.
4. Click the Add Point button to create a new row in the calibration points table. The
new row is automatically highlighted.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each additional point.
Changing a Calibration Point

If one or more of the calibration points needs to be changed, click on the row in the
calibration points table. Place the puck over the calibration point, and click the puck's
digitize button. The new tablet coordinates are written to the calibration grid.
Adding a Calibration Point

Click the Add Point button to add a new row to the calibration points table. Each row is
a single calibration point.
Rows can also be added by clicking the Cancel button on the puck. Normally, this is
button 3.
Removing a Calibration Point

To remove a calibration point, click on the row in the calibration points table and click
the Delete Point button.
Loading Calibration Points from an Existing Data File

The Load button imports coordinates for a previously defined set of calibration points.
The calibration points can be stored in any supported data file format, including .XLS,
.TXT, .XLSX, .DAT, or .ACCDB. Loading a previously defined set of calibration points
248
saves time by not needing to type in the coordinates for a project that have bene
previously defined. This works extremely well with a tablet when the paper document
on the tablet has not moved.
Click the Load button to open the Open dialog. Select the data file and click Open. In
the Load Calibration Points dialog, set the columns to the appropriate fields from the
calibration points table and click OK.

1. In the Create Calibration Points dialog, click the Load button.
2. In the Open dialog, click on the data file containing the calibration points and click
Open.
3. In the Load Calibration Points dialog, set the columns to the appropriate fields
from the calibration points table. Click OK.
4. Back in the Create Calibration Points dialog,
a. If the document has not moved on the tablet, accept the previously calibrated
points locations.
b. To relocate points on the document, click on the row and click on the
appropriate point on the document.
c. Add additional calibration points, if desired, by typing the coordinates into the
calibration grid and digitizing the added points.
d. Delete existing calibration points by clicking on the row and clicking the Delete
Point button.
5. Click Next to move to the RMS Calibration Settings dialog.
Saving Calibration Points

Click the Save button to open the Save As dialog. Type a File name and click Save to
save the calibration points to a file. The Point ID, Tablet X, Tablet Y, World X, and
World Y values are stored in the data file. This file can be used later to load the
calibration points in this project or another project.
Activate Tablet and Using the Puck as a Mouse

If the box next to the Activate Tablet option is checked, the tablet is ready to digitize
the calibration points. If the box next to the Activate Tablet option is not checked, the
puck can be used as a mouse. For example, you can click on the Next button when
Activate Tablet is not checked.
249
Didger
Calibration points are added by clicking the Digitize button on the puck. Normally this
is button 1.
Moving to the next row can be done by clicking the Finish button on the puck.
Normally this is button 2.
Rows can also be added by clicking the Cancel button on the puck. Normally, this is
button 3.
Auto Advance Row Position

Check the box next to the Auto Advance Row Position option to automatically move to
the next row when clicking on calibration points. When checked, after clicking on a
point on the tablet with the puck, the next point is automatically highlighted. When
unchecked, the point just selected remains highlighted in the calibration points table.
Moving to the next row can also be done by clicking the Finish button on the puck.
Normally this is button 2.
250
RMS Calibration Settings Dialog

The RMS Calibration Settings dialog is part of the Tablet Calibration Wizard. The
RMS Calibration Settings dialog provides information about each calibration point
and the RMS error value calculated for your calibration points.
When calibration points are digitized, the coordinate positions of the points in the
digitizer's grid referencing system or pixel coordinates are determined. Didger uses
the selected Georeferencing Method to compute the error between the tablet or pixel
coordinates and the digitized coordinates. This allows Didger to orient and scale the
project.
The error for each point and the total RMS error
are listed in the RMS Calibration Settings dialog.
In the results grid, the following data are included. You can use the scroll bars to scroll
the field of view.
• The Use column shows which calibration points are used in the calibration.
When set to Yes, the calibration point is used. When set to No, the calibration
point is not used. Double-click on the word Yes or No to change it. As you
remove calibration points, the Point Error and Total RMS values automatically
update. To increase the overall accuracy of the calibration, Didger lets you
251
Didger
exclude any points that have an unacceptably high error. Any points with a
high Point Error should either be removed or recalibrated.
• The Point ID column shows the name associated with each calibration point in
the Create Calibration Points dialog.
• The Source X and Source Y columns display the X and Y coordinates for each
calibration point in the tablet coordinate system.
• The World X and World Y columns display the X and Y coordinates for each
calibration point in the document coordinate system.
• The Computed X and Computed Y columns display the projected X and Y
coordinates, in meters, for the specified latitude/longitude value for that
calibration point.
• The Predicted X and Predicted Y columns display the X and Y coordinates of
the calibration point after it has been processed by the georeferencing
algorithm. This indicates the accuracy of the calibration point for the
calibration.
• The Point Error column shows the standard deviation in each value. This
column contains zeros if the RMS is not calculated. The error values presented
for each point indicate the difference between the coordinates entered and the
expected digitizing coordinates.
RMS
The Total RMS value is calculated from the Point Error values. This is a measure of the
agreement between the calibration point coordinates and the expected digitizing
coordinates. The Total RMS field below the results grid shows the average error that
can be expected in any single point. If the RMS error is too high, click the Back button
to return to the Create Calibration Points dialog and repeat the calibration
procedure for any point.
Georeference Method
Didger provides a number of methods for georeferencing the coordinate space from
tablet or pixel coordinates to world coordinates. You can select one of 10 methods for
calibration in the Georeference Method list, including Affine Polynomial, 1st Order
Polynomial, Thin Plate Spline, Natural Cubic Spline, Marcov Spline, Exponential Spline,
Rational Quadratic Spline, Inverse Distance Squared, 2nd Order Polynomial, and 3rd
Order Polynomial.
When digitizing from source documents or images that contain extreme warping, a
higher order polynomial method is appropriate. When different methods are selected,
the Total RMS and Point Error values change.
252
If you do not have the minimum number of calibration points needed for a particular
method, Didger defaults to the next acceptable method based the number of
calibration points. For most digitizing applications, the Affine Polynomial method is the
best choice.
Calibration Settings Dialog

The Calibration Settings dialog is part of the Tablet Calibration Wizard. The
Calibration Settings dialog contains options for screen display, digitizing tolerance,
and digitizing button options. Many of these settings can be set after calibration by
clicking the Tools | Project Settings command.
Set the tolerance, units, numeric display, and tablet

button settings in the Calibration Settings dialog.
Tolerance Settings
Tolerance settings include the options to control the distance between points on a
polyline or polygon and the distance between objects.
253
Didger
Vertex Tolerance
The Vertex Tolerance option sets the minimum spacing for vertices along a polygon or
polyline. The values are specified in calibration units. The value defines the minimum
segment length for a polyline or polygon. No two adjacent vertices along the object
can be closer together than the specified length. To change the tolerance, highlight the
existing value and type a new value. A good default value is half the Total RMS error
value.
Snap Tolerance
The Snap Tolerance option sets the minimum distance allowed between nodes for the
existing and new polylines when creating a new polyline. The value is specified in
calibration units. To change the tolerance, highlight the existing value and type a new
value. A good default value is the Total RMS error value.
Auto Snap Nodes

If the box next to the Auto Snap Nodes option is checked and the beginning or ending
node of a new polyline is located less than the Snap Tolerance distance from an
existing polyline, the node is automatically joined to the existing polyline when you
finish digitizing the new polyline. If the box next to the Auto Snap Nodes option is not
checked, the polylines are not automatically snapped together.
Calculated Display Units

The Calculated Display Units for Length and Area control the units of the area and
length calculations shown in the Data Manager, the Property Manager, and in the
report window. To change either the Length or Area units, click on the existing option
and select the desired option from the list.
Numeric Display Format

The Numeric Display Format can be set to any integer from zero to nine decimal
places. To change the number of decimal places, highlight the existing value and type
a new value. Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the value. This
setting affects the number of decimal places shown in the status bar and on graticule
and grid labels.
Tablet Button Settings

The actions for each button on the puck are set in the Tablet Button Settings section.
Refer to Tablet Settings for more details.
254
Specify Project Limits and Scale

This is the final step in the Tablet Calibration Wizard process. Use the Specify Project
Limits and Scale dialog to set the project extents and to set the project scale. You
can also set the project limits and scale after calibration by clicking the Map | Project
Limits command.
Set the project limits and scaling of the map area

in the Specify Project Limits and Scale dialog.
Specify Project Limits

The X Axis Minimum and X Axis Maximum values define the project limits in the X
direction. To change the values, highlight the existing value and type a new value.
The Y Axis Minimum and Y Axis Maximum values define the project limits in the Y
dimension. To change the values, highlight the existing value and type a new value.
If your project is projected in anything other than Unprojected Lat/Long, the numbers
in the Specify Project Limits group appear in meters. Click the Lat/Long button to set
the limits in latitude/longitude coordinates.
255
Didger
Set Limits Based Upon

The project limits are automatically set to be ten percent larger than the limits defined
by your calibrated points. As an example, if your calibration points in one dimension
ranged from 0 to 100, the default project limits would span a range of 110 units in
that dimension, from -5 to 105. The Set limits based upon check box activates
automatic project scaling based on the Calibration points or the Project Extents. The
Calibration option sets the project extents to the calibrated coordinates. The Project
Extents option sets the extents to the entire project.
X and Y Axis Scaling

The Project Limits and Scale dialog also allows you to set the scale of your project.
The X and Y axis scaling is useful to re-scale the overall size of a project for printing
on various sizes of paper.
The X Axis Scaling and Y Axis Scaling sections specify the scaling along the specified
axes. If the project is in anything other than unprojected lat/long, the numbers to
enter for Map Units must be in meters.
The 1.0 in (cm) = __ Map Units edit box specifies the number of units per inch or
centimeter in the specified dimension. For example, if you want your project to be
drawn at a scale of 1000 units per inch, type the value 1000 into the edit box. The
Length value is automatically updated to reflect the change you make. If your project
is 8000 units in the dimension you are setting, the project is 8 inches long in that
dimension. To change the map unit scaling, highlight the existing value and type a
new value.
The Length edit box specifies the length of the project in the specified dimension.
When you change the Length value the 1.0 in (cm) = __ Map Units edit box is
automatically updated to reflect the change in length. To change the length scaling,
highlight the existing value and type a new value. Alternatively, click the to
increase or decrease the size of the map.
Set Proportional XY Scaling

equally. When the box is checked and a change is made to the X or Y dimension, the
other dimension is automatically scaled the same amount. The same number of units
per inch are applied to both the X and Y dimensions. If the dimensions should be
scaled differently, uncheck the box before setting the values.
256
Finish
Click Finish to end the tablet calibration wizard. Once the dialog closes, objects can be
digitized with the puck and the Draw menu commands.
Setting the Calibration Marker

You can set the calibration marker symbol, color, and size by clicking the Draw |
Tablet | Calibration Marker command before or after calibrating the digitizing
tablet. Each tablet calibration point is shown in the plot window with the symbol
selected in the Calibration Marker dialog. The settings in the Calibration Marker
dialog are used in the current project and in future projects until the settings are
changed. The calibration markers are not printed or exported.
Select the symbol size, shape, and color for the

calibration marker in the Calibration Marker dialog.
257
Didger
Load Calibration Points Dialog

The Load Calibration Points dialog is accessed through the Image Registration
and Warping dialog or the Create Calibration Points dialog by clicking the Load
button.
The Load Calibration Points dialog allows

you to use previous calibration points.
To load points:
1. Click the Load button in the Image Registration and Warping dialog, the
Create Calibration Points dialog, or the Coordinate Conversion dialog to load
existing calibration points into the project.
2. Points may be loaded from any data file format, such as a .DAT, .XLSX, or .ACCDB
file. Select the appropriate file in the Open dialog.
3. Click Open.
4. The Load Calibration Points dialog appears.
5. Set the columns to the appropriate columns in the worksheet.
6. Click OK. The values are loaded into Image Registration and Warping dialog,
the Create Calibration Points dialog, or the Coordinate Conversion dialog in
the calibration points table.
258
Point ID
The Point ID option contains the column assigned to the Point ID. To change the
column, click on the existing option and select the appropriate column from the list.
Source X and Y
The Source X and Source Y columns contain the Tablet X and Tablet Y values for a
tablet calibration or the Image X and Image Y values for an image registration. To
change the column, click on the existing option and select the appropriate column
from the list.
World X and Y
The World X and World Y columns contain the World X and World Y values for a tablet
calibration or the Reference X and Reference Y values for an image registration. To
change the column, click on the existing option and select the appropriate column
from the list.
Skip Rows
Check the box next to the Skip Rows option to not import values from one of the rows
in the worksheet. Normally this is used for a header row. It can also be used for a row
that contains data that does not apply to this project. When the box is checked, the
row listed to the right of the Skip Rows text will not be imported into the dialog. When
the box is unchecked, all rows are imported. To change the skipped rows, highlight the
existing value and type the new row number.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to accept the points from the file and return to the Image Registration and
Warping dialog or the Create Calibration Points dialog. The points are
automatically entered into the calibration points table. Click Cancel to return to the
Image Registration and Warping dialog or the Create Calibration Points dialog
without the values entered.
259
Didger
Recalibrating an Existing Didger Project with a Tablet

When an existing Didger project .PJT file is opened, the tablet calibration must be
reestablished before digitizing additional objects. The tablet cannot be activated for
digitizing if it has not first been calibrated.
Recalibrating when the Document has not Moved

If you are sure the paper document has not moved on the digitizing tablet, you can
follow these steps after opening the project file with File | Open.
1. Start the tablet calibration wizard by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Tablet
Calibration command or clicking the button.

2. Click the Next button four times.
3. Click the Finish button in the last dialog to accept the existing calibration.
Recalibrating when the Document has Moved

When you are working on a project, it is possible to inadvertently move the paper
document on the tablet. When this occurs, the current calibration is no longer valid
and must be reestablished. You can easily reestablish the calibration in Didger. If the
paper document has moved on the digitizing tablet, or if you are not sure if it has
moved, you can follow these steps.
1. Start the tablet calibration wizard by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Tablet
Calibration command or clicking the button.

2. Click Next in the Tablet Calibration Wizard dialog.
3. In the Create Calibration Points dialog, click on the first record in the calibration
points table.
4. Locate the currently highlighted calibration coordinate on the digitizing tablet and
click on that point using the tablet puck. The new tablet coordinates for that point
are entered in the appropriate fields and the next record in the Create
Calibration Points dialog is automatically selected.
5. Repeat step 4 for each of the calibration points the calibration points table until all
of the calibration points have been updated.
6. Click Next to move to the RMS Calibration Settings dialog and verify that the
RMS error is acceptable.
7. If the RMS error is not acceptable, click the Back button and repeat steps four and
five. If the RMS error is acceptable, click Next twice.
8. Click Finish and continue with the digitizing project.
260
Large Documents
Sometimes you might need to digitize information from a paper source document that
is larger than your digitizing tablet. With Didger, you can accomplish this task by
making use of the Tablet Calibration in the Draw menu and the Project Limits in
the Map menu.
Calibrating Large Documents

When you are using a large document you need to define different sections of the
document, each of which should overlap somewhat and be small enough to fit on the
digitizing tablet. You have to select between three and 256 calibration points within
each section. Each section of the document is to be digitized within a single project by
digitizing one section at a time. After you complete a section, you can move the
document on the tablet so a new section is oriented and recalibrate the tablet. You can
reset the project limits so all sections can be seen in the plot window.
Digitizing Large Documents

Documents larger than your digitizing tablet can be digitized in Didger. Follow the
steps for Calibrating Large Documents, and then you can begin digitizing large
documents.
To digitize a large document:

1. Divide the document into enough sections so that each section fits on the digitizing
tablet. For each section, define between three and 256 calibration points (see
Selecting Calibration Points).
2. Place the first section of the document on the tablet and start Didger. Use the
Tablet Calibration Wizard or click the button to digitize the calibration points
for the first section of the document.
3. Digitize all the objects from that portion of the document. Save the work in a .PJT
file.
4. When completed with the first section, move the document so the next section is
placed on the tablet.
5. Choose the Tablet Calibration command.
6. Clear all the currently displayed calibration points from the calibration grid and
type the coordinates for the calibration points on the current section of the
document. Step through the Tablet Calibration Wizard to calibrate these new
points.
7. Choose the Project Limits command from the Draw menu, and set the limits for
the project to the entire document extents (with all the sections you digitize). Do
261
Didger
not check the Set limits based upon check box. This allows you to see the entire
project area, including all the objects you have digitized from other sections. Note:
You can set the Project Limits at the beginning of the project so you can see the
entire project area from the beginning.
8. Digitize the objects for the current document section and save the file when
completed.
9. Continue with this procedure until all sections of the document are digitized.
Wintab Info
Click the Help | Wintab Info command to view information about your digitizing
tablet. If you do not have a digitizing tablet installed or if it is turned off, the Wintab
Info command is grayed out. If the digitizing tablet is not working properly, the
Wintab Information dialog reports this to you.
The Wintab Information dialog contain

information about the tablet listed.
262
Project Settings - Digitizing Settings Page

Project Settings dialog. The Digitizing Settings page sets tablet button behavior on
the digitizer puck. You can define operations for up to 16 buttons. Button settings are
also available when calibrating the tablet.
Set table button options on the Digitizing

Settings page of the Project Settings dialog.
263
Didger
Setting Puck Buttons

To set puck buttons:
1. Click the Tools | Project Settings command.
2. In the Project Settings dialog, click on the Digitizing Settings tab.
3. Click on a button name in the Tablet Button Settings list. For example, click on
Button 2.
4. Select an action from the Select Button list.
5. Make any additional adjustments to the digitizing settings and click OK to close the
NOTE: Some tablet pucks use buttons that begin numbering at zero rather than one.
For these types of pucks, Button 1 in the dialog refers to button 0 on the puck.
Button Settings
Click the existing option next to Select Button to change the function of the selected
button. The available options and the function description are listed below.
• Nothing - If this option is selected, the button does not have a function.
• Enable Tablet On/Off - This option toggles the digitizing tablet on and off. This
can also be accomplished by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Activate Tablet
command. When the tablet is disabled, the tablet pointer can then be used as
a mouse. Toggling the tablet on with this button is not supported by all tablet
drivers.
• Enable/Disable Stream Mode - When stream mode is enabled, you can hold
down this button and drag it to create a continuous stream of vertices. The
minimum vertex spacing is controlled by the vertex tolerance settings.
• Digitize - This option creates a point, node, or vertex. This option should
always be specified for one of the buttons. See digitizing points, polylines, and
polygons for more information.
• Finish - This option completes the creation of a polyline or polygon. When you
have digitized the final point in a polygon or polyline, this adds the final node
for polylines, or closes the polygon and adds the default fill.
• Cancel - This option cancels the current operation before completion.
• New Point - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Symbol command.
• New Polyline - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Polyline
command.
• New Polygon - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Polygon
command.
264
• Snap Nearest Vertex - When digitizing a polyline or polygon, this option snaps
the next created vertex to the nearest vertex on an existing polyline or
polygon.
• Snap Nearest Line Segment - When digitizing a polyline or polygon, this option
snaps the next created vertex to the nearest position along an existing polyline
or polygon, even if a vertex does not exist at that point.
• Undo - This option removes the last point digitized in a polyline or polygon.
Beep on Object Completion

When Beep on Object Completion is checked, the system emits the "default beep"
sound each time an object is finished being digitized. This signifies that the object was
created without needing to look at the monitor. If the default beep is mapped to a
.WAV file in Windows, that sound plays instead.
Stream Mode
When Stream Mode is checked, hold down the primary mouse button or digitize button
and drag the puck to create a continuous stream of vertices. The minimum vertex
spacing is controlled by the vertex tolerance settings.
Beep on Vertex Creation

When Beep on Vertex Creation is checked, the system emits the "default beep" sound
each time a vertex in your polyline or polygon object is digitized. If the default beep is
mapped to a .WAV file in Windows, that sound plays instead. If Stream Mode is
checked, the beep sounds every few seconds.
Digitizing Cursor
The Digitizing Cursor list sets the default cursor type when digitizing. The cursor icon
changes to the type selected. To change the cursor, click on the existing option and
265
Didger
Troubleshooting Digitizing Tablets

If you are having trouble with your digitizing tablet, you might need to contact the
tablet manufacturer.
Check the following:

1. Was your tablet powered on before booting your computer? Many tablets must be
turned on before turning on your computer. If the tablet was not on first, turn the
computer off. While the computer is off, turn on the tablet. Then, start the
computer and open Didger.
2. Open Didger, and click on Help | Wintab Info command. Click on the buttons on
your puck. You should see numbers in the Tablet Button field. In addition, you
should see numbers scroll in the Tablet X and Tablet Y fields as you move the puck
around. If you do not see the button numbers or the tablet XY coordinates, your
tablet is not properly installed.
3. Can you move your puck and see the cursor move on your monitor? You do not
have to have any program open to observe this behavior. If you cannot move your
cursor with the puck, your tablet is not properly installed.
4. Did you install a Wintab driver over an existing tablet driver? If so, this is known
to cause problems with the tablet.
If your tablet is not properly installed, contact the tablet manufacturer for assistance.
Connectivity between the digitizing tablet and the Wintab driver often requires certain
information that can only be obtained from the tablet manufacturer. In our experience,
tablet manufacturers can quickly and easily get you up and running with your digitizer
connectivity.
266
Chapter 8
Map Properties
Map Menu Commands
The Map menu contains commands to create Surfer base maps and grid data using
Surfer, convert project coordinates, change project limits and scale, set a default
projection or change the existing projection, add graticules and grid lines, make
reporting about objects, layers, and project settings, and edit attribute information.
Create Surfer Base Map

Click the Map | Surfer | Create Base Map command or the button to create a
georeferenced base map of your Didger project in Golden Software's Surfer program.
The Create Base Map command opens the Surfer Map dialog.
Select the type of base map to create and

click OK to open Surfer with the file loaded.
In the Surfer Map dialog, select the type of base map to create. Available options are
Creating a single raster base map or Exporting individual objects.
Single Raster Base Map

When Creating a single raster base map is selected, Didger exports the entire project
to an image file and imports it as a georeferenced base map in Surfer. After clicking
OK in the Surfer Map dialog, the Export Options dialog appears. The Size and
Color, TIFF Options, and Spatial References tabs are available, allowing output
parameters of the image to be defined. Once the parameters are set in the dialog,
277
Didger
click OK. Golden Software's Surfer program opens and a single image base map of
the Didger project appears.
Individual Objects
When Exporting individual objects is selected, Didger creates separate objects in a
base map for each individual image, polyline, and polygon in the Didger project and
creates one separate post map for all the points in the project. All the map layers are
overlaid into a single map object in Surfer. The images will be exported from Didger
in 300 DPI resolution (using the physical size under Map | Project Limits to
determine the pixel count) and polylines and polygons will be exported as DXF files.
Points are exported to a DAT file. If points exist in the project, the Data Export Options
dialog is displayed. Click OK and the map is created in Surfer.
Due to the current nature of export formats, some objects may not appear exactly as
they do in Didger. This command is compatible with Surfer 7 or later versions. If you
do not currently own Surfer version 7 or higher, you can contact Golden Software for
upgrade information.
Create Surfer Grid

Grid files are necessary to create many different map types in Surfer, including
contour, image, and shaded relief maps. Data files are typically randomly spaced files,
and this data must be converted into an evenly spaced grid before using many of
Surfer's features. Grid files are produced in Didger by clicking the Map | Surfer |
Grid Data command or by clicking the button. The Grid Data command requires
data points with defined Z values.
Note: Log axes are not supported with the Grid Data command. Didger requires that
the X and Y minimum values are less than the X and Y maximum values for the
project limits.
Gridding Method
There are several gridding parameters you can set when producing a grid file. Refer to
Gridding Methods for more information on specific parameters. All gridding methods
require at least three non-collinear data points with Z data entered in the Z level field.
Available gridding methods include Inverse Distance to a Power, Minimum Curvature,
Nearest Neighbor, Radial Basis Function, and Triangulation with Linear Interpolation.
To change the Gridding Method, click on the down arrow next to the existing gridding
method and select the desired method from the list.
278
If the desired gridding method is not available, click the File | Export command and
export the data points to a DAT file. The DAT file can be used directly in Surfer to grid
the data.
Set the gridding options in the Grid Data dialog.
Select Data Source

The Selected Data Source option controls which data is gridded. Available options are
Selected Objects, All Objects, or only the objects on a particular Layer. Selected
Objects is not available unless several points are selected before clicking the Map |
Surfer | Grid Data command. If Layer is selected, click on the down arrow next to
the current layer name to select the desired layer from the project. All layers will be
listed.
Create Surfer Map

Check the box next to the Create Surfer Map option to automatically create one of
three Surfer map layer types from the new GRD file. After checking the box, select
the type of map layer to create. Available map layer types are Contour Map, Image
279
Didger
Map, and Shaded Relief Map. If Create Surfer Map is not checked, the map layer type
options are not available.
Select Contour Map to create a contour map from the grid file. A contour map is a
two-dimensional representation of three-dimensional data. The first two dimensions
are the XY coordinates, and the third dimension (Z) is represented by lines of equal
value. The relative spacing of the contour lines indicate the relative slope of the
surface. The area between two contour lines contains only grid nodes having Z values
within the limits defined by the two enclosing contours. The difference between two
contour lines is defined as the contour interval.
Select Image Map to create an image map from a grid file. Image maps are raster
maps based on grid files. These maps represent Z values (e.g. elevations) with user
specified colors.
Select Shaded Relief Map to create a shaded relief image map from a grid file. These
maps use colors to indicate the local orientation of the surface relative to a user-
defined light source direction. Didger determines the orientation of each grid cell and
calculates reflectance of a point light source on the grid surface. The light source can
be thought of as the sun shining on a topographic surface. Portions of the surface that
face away from the light source reflects less light toward the viewer, and thus appear
darker.
These maps were created using the Grid Data command in Didger. The map on the left is a
contour map, the middle map is an image map, and the map on the right is a shaded relief map.
Gridding Options
The Gridding Options section contains the specific Gridding Method options and the
Grid Line Geometry section. The first section identifies the properties needed to create
a grid using the specified Gridding Method. For instance, if you choose Nearest
Neighbor in the Gridding Method list, then the Nearest Neighbor options section
appears in the Gridding Options section. To see the options, click on the next to the
280
option name to expand the section. Highlight any values and type new values to
change the value or click on the option to view a list of available options.
The Grid Line Geometry section contains the grid limits and density parameters for the
grid. To see the options, click on the next to the Grid Line Geometry text to expand
the section.
The Export Units contains the units that should be used for the grid. Click on the cell
to the right of Export Units and select one of fourteen different unit options from the
list.
The X minimum, X maximum, Y minimum, and Y maximum values contain the

coordinate extents of the grid. To change a value, highlight the existing number and
type the desired coordinate value.
The Number of rows and Number of columns contain the grid density. Grid density is a
measure of the number of grid nodes in the grid. The # of nodes in the X direction is
the Number of columns, and the # of nodes in the Y direction is the Number of rows.
By default, both directions are assigned 100 grid nodes. To change a value, highlight
the existing number and type the desired coordinate value.
Output Grid File

Choose a path and file name for the grid in the Output Grid File section. Click the
button to open the Save As dialog, where you can select a new directory and enter a
new file name. The file is saved as a Surfer Grid .GRD file.
The default location for the new grid file is the user AppData temporary directory,
which is c:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Temp, by default. The default file name
is Didger.grd.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to create the grid and optional Surfer map. Click Cancel to end grid creation
without creating the grid.
281
Didger
Gridding Methods
Grid method parameters control the interpolation procedures. When you create a grid
file, you can usually accept the default gridding method and produce an acceptable
map. Different gridding methods provide different interpretations of your data because
each method calculates grid node values using a different algorithm. If you are not
satisfied with the map of your data, you might consider producing grid files using
several different gridding methods and comparing the results.
Because Surfer maps are created from gridded data, the original data in Didger are
not necessarily honored in the grid file. When you post the original data points on a
contour map, some of the contour lines might be positioned in a position relative to
the original data that appears differently than you might draw the line. This happens
because the locations of the contour lines are determined solely by the interpolated
grid node values and not directly by the original data. Some methods are better than
others in preserving your data, and sometimes some experimentation (i.e. increasing
grid density) is necessary before you can determine the best method for your data.
Gridding methods are selected in the Grid Data dialog. To open the Grid Data dialog,
click the Map | Surfer | Grid Data command or click the button. The following list
provides an overview of each gridding method and some advantages and
disadvantages in selecting one method over another.
Inverse Distance to a Power

Inverse Distance to a Power is fast but has the tendency to generate "bull's-eye"
patterns of concentric contours around the data points and does not extrapolate Z
values beyond the range of data.
282
Minimum Curvature
Minimum Curvature generates smooth surfaces and is fast for most data sets but it
can create high magnitude artifacts in areas of no data. The internal tension and
boundary tension allow you control over the amount of smoothing. Minimum Curvature
can extrapolate values beyond your data's Z range.
Nearest Neighbor
Nearest Neighbor is useful for converting regularly spaced (or almost regularly spaced)
XYZ data files to grid files. When your observations lie on a nearly complete grid with
few missing holes, this method is useful for filling in the holes, or creating a grid file
with the blanking value assigned to those locations where no data are present.
Nearest Neighbor does not extrapolate Z grid values beyond the range of data.
283
Didger
Radial Basis Function

Radial Basis Function is quite flexible. It compares to Kriging since it generates the
best overall interpretations of most data sets. This method produces a result quite
similar to Kriging.
Triangulation with Linear Interpolation

Triangulation with Linear Interpolation is fast. When you use small data sets,
Triangulation with Linear Interpolation generates distinct triangular faces between
data points. Triangulation with Linear Interpolation does not extrapolate Z values
beyond the range of data.
284
Coordinate Conversion
Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion command or click the button to open the
Coordinate Conversion dialog. A coordinate conversion adjusts the values of the
existing map coordinates and moves all objects to the new locations. Coordinate
conversions are often used to correct for off-center control points in the original
project because you can perform different math operations on the X and Y axis.
Coordinates can be adjusted with a math operation or georeferenced. Examples of
situations you would use coordinate conversions are: converting the file coordinates of
a *.DXF file to latitude/longitude coordinates, or converting a site-specific coordinate
system to a regional coordinate system.
Set the Input Data Units, the Math Operation, or pick points
using the Georeference option in the Coordinate Conversion dialog.
Input Data Units

The Input Data Units defines the data units of the project. This is most often defined
by an imported image or vector file. To change the data units, click on the existing
option and select the desired coordinate units from the list.
285
Didger
Coordinate System
Click the Destination System button to open the Assign Coordinate System dialog.
This dialog lets you define a new output coordinate system during the conversion
process, and is useful for transforming site-specific coordinate systems to regional
georeferenced projected systems.
Math Operations and Georeferencing

Didger can perform two types of coordinate conversions: Math Operation and
Georeference. Both methods convert coordinates but require that you know different
information about the data. You can select one or the other in the conversion process.
Math Operation
Use Math Operation when you want to correct a known offset in the project coordinate
system. For example, add 0.35 to all X values, or multiple 1.50 from all Y values.
To offset all values by an X or Y value, select the desired operation from the X Axis
Operation or Y Axis Operation. Available options are Add, Subtract, Mulitple, and
Divide. After selecting the operation, highlight the existing value and type the desired
value. For example, to offset all objects by 0.35 units in the X direction and multiply
all Y values by 1.5, the Math Operation would be selected and the values set to:
Set the Operation and value for the offset.
Georeference
Use Georeference when you know the exact coordinates of three or more non-linear
points and you want to recalibrate based on those values. This is useful when you
want to recalibrate a Didger project file. For example, suppose that you know that the
image is incorrectly referencing the wrong X value, but that the image is slightly
warped. You can select points on the map and type in new values in the georeference
table.
286
Click in the project to set the Source X and Source Y values. Type in the Point ID,
World X, and World Y values. The Point Error is automatically
determined when four or more points are entered.
The Georeference table contains the following information:

• Point ID lets you enter a value for each point. This is useful when several
points are added to the table.
• The Source X and Source Y columns contain the original XY locations of the
project file. Click in the project to enter values in the Source X and Source Y
columns.
• The World X and World Y columns contain the real world coordinates of the
project file. Highlight the existing value and type the desired new coordinates
into the box.
• The Point Error column displays the error value for each calibration point
between the source X and Y coordinates and referenced image.
Zooming and Panning the Project

After selecting Georeference, click on the project to activate the project window. To
zoom in, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard or scroll the mouse wheel forward. To zoom
out, hold down the CTRL key on the keyboard and click or scroll the mouse wheel backward.
Click on the image and hold the mouse wheel down. The cursor changes to to
indicate pan mode. Drag the mouse around to move the image.
Add
Click Add to add another row to the georeference table. Each row is a new calibration
point. The new row is added at the bottom of the table with the default values.
287
Didger
Remove
Click on a row in the georeference table to select it. Click Remove and the currently
selected row is deleted from the georeference table.
Load
Click Load to open the Open dialog. Select a previously defined set of calibration
points. The calibration points can be stored in any supported data file format, including
.XLS, .XLSX, .ACCDB, .TXT, and .DAT. Loading a previously defined set of calibration
points saves you the time of typing in the coordinates for a project that you have used
in the past. After selecting the new file and clicking Open, the Load Calibration Points
dialog appears. Set the columns and click OK and the points are displayed in the
georeference table.

1. Click Load. The Open dialog displays.
2. Points may be loaded from any data file format, such as a .DAT, .XLSX, or .ACCDB
file. Select the appropriate file in the Open dialog.
3. Click Open.
4. The Load Calibration Points dialog appears.
5. Set the columns to the appropriate columns in the worksheet.
6. Click OK. The values are loaded into Coordinate Conversion dialog in the
georeference table.
Save
Click Save to save the calibration points to a file for use at a later point or in another
project. After clicking Save, the Save As dialog appears. Type a file name and click
Save and the points are saved to an ASCII data file.
Georeference Method
The Georeference Method list lets you select from numerous transformation functions.
Available options are Affine Polynomial, First Order Polynomial, Thin Plate Spline,
Natural Cubic Spline, Marcov Spline, Exponential Spline, Rational Quadratic Spline,
Inverse Distance Squared, Second Order Polynomial and Third Order Polynomial. To
change the Georeference Method, click on the existing option and select the desired
option from the list. Not all options will be available every time, as the options depend
on the number of points in the georeference table. By default, the Affine Polynomial is
selected, which works well in many situations.
288
Total RMS
If you choose to use the georeference option, the Total RMS value is displayed above
the georeference table when the Recalc button is clicked. The RMS value is
recalculated with the latest set of values.
Recalc
Click Recalc to recalculate the RMS and point errors after selecting new locations for
the calibration points.
Example 1: Offsetting Value

Use the Math Operation option to offset the coordinates by a specified amount. You
can change X, Y, or both X and Y coordinates by a specified amount.
To convert coordinates with a Math Operation:

1. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion command.
2. In the Coordinate Conversion dialog, select the Math Operation option.
3. In the X Axis Operation section, click on the existing operation and select the
desired type of operation from the list.
4. In the X Axis Operation section, highlight the existing value and type a new value.
This is the magnitude of the offset.
5. If desired, set the Y Axis Operation.
6. If desired, set the amount of the Y Axis Operation.
7. Click OK and the entire project is offset by the desired amount.
Example 2: Georeferencing the Project

The Georeference option is similar to calibrating a tablet in that it applies coordinates
to the project based on a minimum of three known coordinates. The control points
cannot fall into a straight line. See Selecting Calibration Points for more information on
selecting calibration points.
To convert coordinates with Georeference:

1. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion command.
2. In the Coordinate Conversion dialog, select the Georeference option.
3. Click on the record in the table to highlight it.
289
Didger
4. Note that the pointer is a cross hair pointer . Move the pointer over the project
and click on the point where you have known coordinates. A calibration marker is
placed at the clicked location, and the values for the Source X and Source Y points
are filled into the record. The Source fields show the original coordinate system of
the project.
5. Highlight the value in the World X field and enter the X coordinate you want to
assign to that point.
6. Highlight the value in the World Y field and enter the Y coordinate you want to
assign to that point.
7. Click Add to add another record in the table.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for each reference point you want to define. The
Georeference option requires at least three points to define your coordinate
system.
9. Set the transformation method in the Georeference Method list for the RMS
calculation to be made.
10. If you create four or more calibration points, Didger calculates the RMS error. The
overall accuracy of the RMS error varies with the number of reference points, and
the selected georeference method.
11. If you are unhappy with the reported RMS values, you can highlight each record in
the table and re-digitize the points. Alternatively, you can manually change the
value in either the World X and World Y fields, or the Source X and Source Y fields.
However, you must press the Recalc button in order to update the reported RMS
values.
12. Once the georeference method is selected and you are satisfied with the reported
RMS, click OK and the entire project is converted to the new values.
290
Project Limits
Click the Map | Project Limits command or click the button to define the extent
and scale of the active project area.
Set the project extents and the size of the

project in the Project Limits and Scale dialog.
Project limits define the project area extents within Didger. Project limits are based
on calibration point limits, the imported coordinate limits, or the relative screen
coordinates if you have not calibrated the current project. There may be times when
your calibration points are not along the outside of the project area, or you are
calibrating a document that is larger than your digitizing tablet. Under these
conditions, you can set the project limits to match the limits of your document and not
the limits implied by the calibration points.
Changing the project limits is also useful when you want to concentrate on a particular
area of your project because you can adjust the limits to show only the area of
interest. Changing the project limits retains the integrity of all digitized data. When
291
Didger
you digitize objects outside the project limits, the object position is still registered
properly within the project, even if they do not appear on the screen.
Specify Project Limits

The X Axis Minimum and X Axis Maximum values define the project limits in the X
dimension. The Y Axis Minimum and Y Axis Maximum values define the project limits
in the Y dimension. To change any of these values, highlight the existing value and
type the new value.
The numbers in the Specify Project Limits group appear in the project display units.
The units used in the limits are indicated next to the Specify Project Limits option
name. In the image above, the limits are set in latitude and longitude.
Click the Lat/Long button to open the Specify Lat/Long Limits dialog, where you can
set the limits in latitude and longitude coordinates, regardless of the display units. To
set the display units, click the Tools | Project Settings command. The display units
are controlled by the Length and Area boxes on the General page.
Set Limits Based Upon

In most cases, the project limits are controlled by either the calibration points or the
project extents. To set the limits to either of these options, check the box next to the
Set limits based upon and then click the down arrow next to either Project Extents or
Calibration.
The project limits are automatically set to be ten percent larger than the limits defined
by your calibrated points. As an example, if your calibration points in one dimension
ranged from 0 to 100, the default project limits would span a range of 110 units in
that dimension, from -5 to 105. The Set limits based upon check box activates
automatic project scaling based on the Calibration points or the Project Extents. The
Calibration option sets the project extents to the calibrated coordinates. If the project
has not been calibrated, the Calibration option is unavailable. The Project Extents
option sets the extents to the entire project.
292
Before setting project limits, objects can lie outside the default project limits.
You can reset the project limits so all objects can be seen. The project
limits have been redefined for this project so the entire polygon is seen.
Specify Lat/Long Limits

Click the Lat/Long button in the Project Limits and Scale dialog to open the Specify
Lat/Long Limits dialog.
Type the limits for the project in latitude and longitude degrees.
Use this dialog to enter the project limits in latitude and longitude coordinates, instead
of in display units. The values must be input in decimal degree format.
293
Didger
X and Y Axis Scaling

The Project Limits and Scale dialog also allows you to set the scale of your project.
The X and Y axis scaling is useful to re-scale the overall size of a project for printing
on various sizes of paper. The X Axis Scaling and Y Axis Scaling sections specify the
scale along the indicated axis. Each axis direction can be scaled independently.
Map Units Per In (cm)

The 1" = __ Map Units option sets the number of map units per page unit in the
associated dimension. For example, to draw a map at a scale of 1000 map units per
inch, type the value 1000 into the box. The Length (page units) value is automatically
updated to reflect the change. For example, if the map is 8000 units in the dimension
you are setting, the map is 8 inches long in that dimension.
The units for the Map Units are in project display units. The units are indicated after
the Map Units text.
Length
The Length option sets the length of the map in the X and Y dimension. When the
Length value is changed, the 1" = __ Map Units box is automatically updated to reflect
the change. The units for the Length are in page units (either inches or centimeters).
Set Proportional XY Scaling

equally. When the box is checked and you make a change to the X or Y dimension, the
other dimension is scaled the same amount. The same number of page units are
applied to both the X and Y dimensions. If you want to scale the dimensions
differently, uncheck the box next to the Set Proportional XY Scaling.
Preserve Project Limits During Import

Check the box next to the Preserve Project Limits During Import option to maintain
the current limits and scale settings from the Project Limits and Scale dialog when
importing additional files into the active Didger project.
When the Preserve Project Limits During Import option is unchecked, importing an
image, vector file, or data file automatically changes the limits for the entire project so
that all objects are displayed.
294
Clip Map Objects During Export

Check the box next to the Clip Map Objects During Export option to clip all objects
outside the currently specified project limits when exporting the project. When this
option is not checked, the entire project is exported. Check this box to only export the
clipped objects when exporting a file.
OK and Cancel
Click OK to apply the scale and limit values to the project. The dialog closes and the
project limits and size automatically update. Click Cancel to return to the project
window without changing either the scale or limits.
Setting the Projection

Click the Map | Set Default Projection command or click the button to open the
Assign Coordinate System dialog. The Assign Coordinate System dialog is used
in new projects, before data is imported and in projects with existing projections when
changing the projection.

Click the Map | Change Projection command or click the button to open the
Assign Coordinate System dialog. The Assign Coordinate System dialog is used in
new projects, before data is imported and in projects with existing projections when
If the Map | Change Projection command is not available, a coordinate system has
not been defined for the current project. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion
command first. Set the coordinate system in the Coordinate Conversion dialog. This
is the system the project uses for the current reference. After the coordinate system is
set, click the Map | Change Projection command to change it to a new system.
295
Didger
Graticules and Grids

To place a graticule or a grid on the poject, click the Map | Graticule and Grid
command or click the button. The Graticule and Grid Designer dialog opens.
The Graticule page contains the options for displaying

and labelling the latitude and longitude lines.
Graticule lines are lines of constant longitude (X coordinate) or latitude (Y coordinate).

Longitude lines are also called meridians, and latitude lines are also called parallels.
The grid feature allows you to display the Cartesian units of the projection or the
Cartesian units if no projection is displayed.
296
For projected coordinates, the graticule lines can curve to follow the projection (for
example, on an Albers projection), or can show different spacing in the north-south
dimension (for example, on a Miller projection). For maps using a latitude/longitude
coordinate system or a Cartesian coordinate system, a rectangular graticule or grid is
drawn.
Didger plots the graticule on a layer named Graticule and the grid on a layer named
Grid. The layers can be moved, deleted, or rearranged in the Layer Manager.
Multiple graticules and grids can be created in Didger by renaming the existing
Graticule or Grid layer. Then, a new grid or graticule can be added by clicking the Map
| Graticule and Grid command.
The individual graticule or grid lines can be edited by clicking on the line in the plot
window and editing the properties in the Property Manager. If anything is added to
the Graticule or Grid layer, it is deleted if the graticule or grid is altered.
A grid can be curved if the projection is changed after the grid was initially created.
Consider that a typical USGS 7.5 topographic map shows both State Plane and UTM
grid locations on the map. You can create this same type of map in Didger by first
creating a grid for the UTM coordinates, renaming the Grid layer to Grid-UTM,
reprojecting the project to State Plane coordinates, creating a new grid for the State
Plane coordinates. Make sure to rename the initial grid layer, so Didger does not
overwrite the first UTM grid.
Graticule lines (left) follow the curves of the projection. Grid

lines (right) show the underlying Cartesian units of the projection.
The Graticule and Grid Designer dialog is organized into two pages, a Graticule
page and a Grid page. Most of the options on the two pages are the same. The
Graticule page contains options for displaying and labeling the latitude and longitude
lines. The Grid page contains options for displaying and labelling grid lines in any
units, other than latitude and longitude.
297
Didger
Display Lines
Check the box next to Longitude (X) or Latitude (Y) on the Graticule page to display
lines of constant latitude or longitude in the project. Check the box next to the Easting
(X) or Northing (Y) on the Grid page to display lines of constant X or Y in the project.
Both pages contain two columns of information. The first column it contains options for
lines of constant longitude (meridians) or X lines. The second column it contains the
same options for lines of constant latitude (parallels) or Y lines.
Display Units
On the Grid page, the Grid Units option controls the units used for the Start, End, and
Increment values. To change the units, click on the existing option and select the
desired units from the list.
Range
The Start and End options contain the range of values that the grid or graticule are
drawn. The line starts at the Start minimum value and ends at the End maximum
value. To change either the Start or End values, highlight the existing value and type
in the desired value. The values are in latitude or longitude on the Graticule page and
in Grid Units on the Grid page.
Increment
The Increment option controls how often lines are drawn. The first line is drawn at the
Start value. The second line is drawn at the Start value plus the Increment value. To
change the Increment value, highlight the existing value and type in the desired value.
The values are in latitude or longitude on the Graticule page and in Grid Units on the
Grid page. If lines should be drawn every 1000 units, change the Increment to 1000
on the Grid tab.
Line Style
Click the Line Style button to open the Line Attributes dialog. The line Style, Color,
and Width can be changed. Click OK in the Line Attributes dialog to return to the
Graticule and Grid Designer dialog.
298
Show Ticks
The Show Ticks row contains the Show X and Show Y options. Check the box next to
the Show X or Show Y option to display tick marks along the graticule or grid line.
Uncheck the box to remove tick marks along the graticule or grid.
Tick Size and Label Offset

The Tick Size/Label Offset row contains the size of the tick mark. The same size is
used for the determining how far the label is offset from the tick mark. To change the
value, highlight the existing value and type a new value. Alternatively, click the to
increase or decrease the value. The value is in page units (inches or centimeters).
Label Frequency
The Label Frequency controls how many graticule or grid lines display labels. Setting
the Label Frequency to any value other than 1 skips graticule or grid lines. For
example, if the Label Frequency is set to three, every third line contains a label. To
change the value, highlight the existing number and type a new number. Alternatively,
click the to increase or decrease the value. Setting the Label Frequency to zero
removes all labels from the graticule or grid. Setting the value to one displays labels
for every graticule or grid.
Label Font
The Label Font sets the font properties used for the graticule or grid line label. Click
the Font button to open he Font Attributes dialog where you can define the text
characteristics to use for the labels. The Face, Points, Style, Color, and Opacity can be
changed for the labels. Click OK in the Font Attributes dialog to return to the
Graticule and Grid Designer dialog.
Show Labels
The Show Labels options determines where labels are displayed along the graticule or
grid line. Check the box next to Start to display labels along the Start value lines.
These are on the left and bottom for most projects. Check the box next to End to
display labels along the End value lines. These are on the right and top for most
projects. When neither the box for Start nor End is checked, no labels are displayed.

The Numeric Display Format option determines the number of decimal places to
display on each graticule or grid. Values range between zero and nine. To change the
299
Didger
value, highlight the existing number and type a new number. Alternatively, click the
to increase or decrease the value.
Label Angle
The Label Angle option sets the angle labels are displayed. A value of zero has
horizontal labels, with the number starting on the left. A value of 90 has vertical
labels, with the number starting at the bottom. A value of -180 or 180 has values
horizontal, with the number starting on the right and displayed upside down. A value
of -90 or 270 has vertical labels, with the number starting at the top. Values are in
degrees, ranging between -360 and 360. To change the value, highlight the existing
number and type a new number. Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease
the value.
Check the box next to Use Default to set the Label Angle option back to the default
rotation. This is 90 for X values and 0 for Y values.
Label Prefix
A text string can be displayed before each label using the Label Prefix box. For
example, a "$" could be used as a prefix. Type the text exactly as you want it to
appear in the Label Prefix box.
Label Suffix
A text string can be displayed after each label using the Label Suffix box. For example,
a "°" could be used as a suffix. Type the text exactly as you want it to appear in the
Label Suffix box.
To display the degree symbol, copy the symbol from the Windows Character Map or
click in the box and press and hold the ALT key on the keyboard. Type 0176 on the
numeric keypad. Release the ALT key and the degree sign will appear.
Default Values
Click the Defaults button at the bottom of the dialog to change the numeric values
back to the program defaults.
300
OK, Cancel, and Apply

Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog. Click Cancel to close the dialog
without making changes. Click Apply to apply the settings and keep the dialog open.
Making Reports
The Map | Make Report command creates a report containing general information
about the project. The report includes Projection Parameters, Object Summary, Layer
Info, Project Settings (project limits, scale, units, etc.), Calibration Information, and
Object Information. The report opens in a text window.
To save the report, click the File | Save As command in the report window. In the
Save As dialog, set the location, file name, and report type. Click Save to save the
file. To print the report, click File | Print. Information from the report can be edited,
copied, and pasted into the Didger project window.
Editing Attribute Fields

Click the Map | Data | Edit Attribute Fields command to open the Data Attributes
dialog. This dialog lets you define new data fields (IDs) for objects. This command is
particularly useful for preserving attributes from files that have been imported from
different formats, like ESRI Shapefiles .SHP, AutoCad .DXF files, or files with Z values.
This is also a useful command for deleting unnecessary attributes.
301
Didger
Set the ID columns in the Data Attributes dialog.
Field Names
By default, the Data Attributes dialog includes the Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, and
Quaternary IDs in the Field Name column. To change any field name, slow double-click
(click once, wait a second, and click again) to edit the name. Type the new name and
press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change.
Each field is defined as either String or Number under Preferred Export Type. The
Current Field indicates whether the field is currently in use in the project. When
importing files, up to 256 data fields can be preserved.
Adding Fields
Click the Add Field button to add field names to the list. The new field name is listed
as New Field and a number. The number indicates the field name. Since there are four
fields, by default, the next field is named New Field 5.
302
Removing Fields
Click the Remove Field button to delete the selected field from the project. If no field
name is selected, Didger starts at the top of the list and removes the first item in the
list of data fields.
Loading Field Definitions

Click the Load Definitions button to open the Open dialog. Select the Didger Data
Attribute File (*.daf) that contains the field attributes and click Open. The DAF file is
an ASCII data file that contains all of the field names and properties. After selecting
the file and clicking Open, the field names appear in the Data Attributes dialog.
Saving Field Definitions

Click the Save Definitions button to open the Save As dialog. Type a File name to
save the current field attribute settings to a Didger Data Attribute File (.daf). Click
Save and the file is saved. This file can be used later to load definitions in this or
another Didger project using the Load Definitions button.
Specialty Fields
The Specialty Fields section allows mapping of field names to one of the default fields
defined in the Specialty Fields section. The Primary ID is used as the unique key for a
data set. In most files, this will be the Primary field name. However, it could be any
unique field in the project.
The Polygon Left and Polygon Right fields are used to store the left and right side IDs
of the polygon boundary. These are used with the Draw | Edit Boundaries | Create
The Z-Level field is used to store elevation or production values. This column is
primarily used with the Map | Surfer | Grid Data command. The Z-Level field must be
defined before selecting this command.
Assigning Attributes
Click the Map | Data | Assign Attributes command to set the same attributes to
selected objects, or to set incremental values for attributes to the Primary ID data field
to selected objects.
303
Didger
To assign the same attribute to all selected objects:

1. Click the Map | Data | Assign Attributes command.
2. The cursor changes to .

3. In the Property Manager, in the New Data Attributes section, click in the
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, Quaternary, or any other ID box and type the
desired attribute name or value.
4. When all attributes are defined correctly, click on the plot window to select each
object. Each object selected will automatically update to the new attribute
information.
5. Press ESC on the keyboard to end the editing mode.
To assign incremental Primary IDs to selected objects:

1. Click the Map | Data | Assign Attributes command.
2. The cursor changes to .

3. In the Property Manager, check the box next to the Auto Increment option.
4. Highlight the existing value next to Starting Increment Value and set the first
value.
5. Highlight the existing value next to Ending Increment Value and set the last value.
6. Highlight the existing value next to Increment Value and set the value to be used
between objects. If each object should have a new whole number, this value
should be 1.
7. Highlight the A next to ID Prefix and type the desired prefix, if any.
8. Highlight the Z next to ID Suffix and type the desired suffix, if any.
9. Click on an object in the plot window. The specified ID is populated.
10. Click on each additional object until editing mode is exited.
304
Assigning Elevations
Click the Map | Data | Assign Elevations command to quickly add incremental
elevation values to polyline objects, such as contour lines. At least two polylines must
exist in the project for the command to be available.
To add elevation values to a set of polylines:

1. Click the Map | Data | Assign Elevations command.
2. The pointer changes to .

3. Click just before the lowest elevation polyline.
4. Hold down the left mouse button and drag a line across the polylines you want to
increment.
5. Release the left mouse button just after the highest elevation polyline.
6. The selected polylines are highlighted in green and the Assign Elevations dialog
opens.
Set the Starting Elevation, Increment Value, and the

ID to assign the Z value in the Assign Elevations dialog.
7. Highlight the existing value in the box next to the Starting Elevation option and
type the desired first elevation value.
8. Highlight the existing value in the box next to the Increment Value option and type
the desired contour level increment. This is the elevation difference between
adjacent contours.
9. Click on the existing ID in the Assign to Data option and select the desired ID from
the list. The Z value will be written to this ID. If information already existed for
this ID, the information is overwritten by the Z value.
10. Click OK.
305
Didger
The incremental contour values are assigned to the contour lines and populated in the
selected data field. You can open the Data Manager to view the changes in the data
fields.
All contour lines that intersect the red line are assigned an elevation
value based on the values entered in the Assign Elevations dialog.
Note that the command does not work on polygons. Polygons must first be converted
to polylines to use the Assign Elevations command.
306
Chapter 9
Selecting and Arranging Objects
Edit Menu Commands
The Edit menu contains commands to undo and redo operations; cut, copy, paste, and
delete object; select or deselect objects.
Undo
Click the Edit | Undo command, click the button, or press CTRL+Z on the
keyboard to reverse the last operation performed. If the last operation cannot be
reversed, the Undo command is grayed. After you save a file, the undo operations are
cleared, so you cannot undo any operations performed before using the Save
command. After you have undone an operation, the Redo command becomes
highlighted, allowing you to reverse the just completed Undo command.
Undo Levels
Up to 25 undo levels can be set though by clicking the Tools | Project Settings
command and setting the Undo levels on the General page. If the Undo command is
not available, check the Undo levels. If the value is set to zero, undo will not be
available.
Redo
Click the Edit | Redo command, click the button, or press CTRL+Y on the
keyboard to reverse the last Undo command. After you have used the Undo
command, the Redo command indicates the operation that you have undone.
Cut
Click the Edit | Cut command, click the button, right-click and select Cut, or
press CTRL+X on the keyboard to move the selected objects to the clipboard. This
deletes the selected objects from the project after copying them to the clipboard. Cut
objects can later be pasted with the Paste command.
307
Didger
Only one set of data may be placed in the clipboard at a time. The next Cut or Copy
command replaces the contents of the clipboard.
Copy
Click the Edit | Copy command, click the button, right-click and select Copy, or
press CTRL+C on the keyboard to copy the selected objects to the clipboard. The
original objects remain in the window. Use this command to duplicate objects in a
different location in the same window, or copy the objects into a different window or
application. The copied objects can later be pasted with the Paste command.
Only one set of data may be placed in the clipboard at a time. The next Cut or Copy
command replaces the contents of the clipboard.
Paste
Click the Edit | Paste command, click the button, right-click and select Paste, or
press CTRL+V on the keyboard to copy the clipboard contents into the current
document. The objects to be copied must first be placed in the clipboard using the Cut
or Copy commands of Didger or some other application. The clipboard contents
remain on the clipboard until something new is cut or copied to the clipboard.
After selecting the Paste command, the cursor changes to . Once the cross hair
cursor is displayed, click on the location you wish to paste the object. Press ESC at any
time to cancel the operation.
Delete
Click on any object to select it. Click the Edit | Delete command, click the
button, right-click and select Delete, or press the DELETE key on the keyboard to
remove the selected object from the window. The Delete command does not affect
the contents of the clipboard. Any information in the clipboard is retained when you
choose the Delete command.
An object can sometimes be restored by clicking the Undo command.
308
Selecting Objects
To delete an object, change an object's properties, or to use some editing tools, the
object must be selected first. There are several ways to select objects in Didger.
Selecting Objects and Digitizing Tablets

A digitizing tablet cannot be activated to select an object. If the tablet is activated,
press the F9 key to return the puck to the Windows pointer mode. Then, you can use
the tablet pointer like a mouse to select objects.
Selecting Objects with the Data Manager

Objects may be selected using the Data Manager. To display the Data Manager, click
the View | Toolbars/Managers command and check the Data Manager option.
Once displayed, click on the object you wish to select in the Data Manager list. The
object is then selected in the plot window. Objects cannot be selected on uneditable
layers.
To select multiple objects in the Data Manager, press and hold the CTRL key on the
keyboard and select additional objects in the Data Manager. To select multiple
adjacent objects, click on the first object, press and hold the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and click on the last object. All objects between the first and last object are
selected. To access the plot window commands, click on the plot window title bar or in
the gray area surrounding the project to activate the plot window.
Selecting Objects in the Plot Window

To select a single object in the plot window, move the pointer over the object using
the mouse, puck, pen, or arrow keys. When the pointer is over the desired object,
click the left mouse button, click the puck or pen digitize button, or press the
SPACEBAR on the keyboard. A bounding box appears around the selected object, and
the selected object has red dots drawn on it.
If an object other than the one you want is selected, press and hold the CTRL key on
the keyboard and continue clicking with the mouse until the desired object is selected.
Any objects that were previously selected become deselected.
To select two or more objects in the plot window, press and hold the SHIFT key on the
keyboard while clicking on additional objects. This retains previously selected objects
and includes the newly selected objects. Press and hold both the CTRL and SHIFT keys
on the keyboard to select several overlapping objects in the plot window.
309
Didger
Select
Select an object by placing the cursor (or pointer) over the object and clicking the left
mouse button. Alternatively, click the button and place the cursor on objects to
select them.
Select All
Click the Edit | Select All command, right-click and select Select All, or press CTRL+A
on the keyboard to select all objects in the document. A bounding box surrounds all
selected objects.
Invert Selection
The Edit | Invert Selection command reverses the selected and deselected objects.
All previously selected objects become deselected. All previously deselected objects
become selected. A bounding box surrounds all selected objects. This command is
useful for selecting a large number of objects and leaving a few isolated objects
unselected. Select the objects you do not want selected and use the Invert Selection
command.
Block Select
Block select allows multiple items to be selected at once. To use the block select
feature:
• Click the Edit | Block Select command and drag a rectangle around the
objects to select.
• Click the button and drag a rectangle around the objects to select.
• Press CTRL+B on the keyboard and drag a rectangle around the objects to
select.
• Select one object in the plot window, hold down the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and select another object in the plot window.
• Select one object in the Data Manager, hold down the CTRL key on the
keyboard, and select another object in the Data Manager.
• Click and drag the cursor to draw a block selection around multiple objects.
To avoid accidentally moving an object when in selecting multiple objects, click the
Edit | Block Select command. If an object is selected, a bounding box surround the
object.
310
To select an object with block select:

1. Click the Edit | Block Select command.
2. Left-click outside one corner of the object.
3. Hold the left mouse button down.
4. Drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the object and release the mouse
button.
Deselect All
Click the Edit | Deselect All command, right-click in the plot window and select
Deselect All, or press CTRL+SHIFT+A on the keyboard to deselect all selected objects.
This command is useful when zoomed in on objects. Alternatively, deselect objects by
clicking in the white space outside any objects in the project.
Selected Object Appearance

An object is selected if there is a bounding box surrounding an object. The selected
object appears with red dots drawn on it. The number of selected objects appears in
the status bar, and the object is highlighted in the Data Manager.
Selecting Objects with Criteria Select

Click the Edit | Criteria Select command or right-click in the plot window and select
Criteria Select to select objects based upon the Selection Type. Different selection
types change the options in the Criteria Select dialog.
Selection Type
The Selection Type contains a list of the available criteria selection options. Objects
can be selected based upon Data Attributes, Layer, Object Type, and Measured
Properties. The Data Field option changes depending on the Selection Type. To change
the Selection Type, click on the existing option and select the desired option from the
list.
Selection Criteria
The selection criteria options change depending on the Selection Type. Available
selection criteria include Data Attributes, Layer, Object Type, and Measurement. Each
type of selection criteria has different options available. To set the selection criteria,
click on the existing option and select the desired option from the list.
311
Didger
When the Selection Type is set to

Data Attributes, the selection
criteria option changes to Data
Field. Objects are selected based
upon on a particular attribute field
name, such as the Primary,
Secondary, Tertiary, Quaternary, or
Z Level.

Layer changes the selection criteria
option changes to Layer. Objects
are selected based upon the layer
name that the objects. Options
could include Layer - 1, Layer - 2,
or specific layer names, such as
Towns, States, or WMS Image
Download layer.

Object Type, the selection criteria
option changes to Object Type.
Available object types are Point, Set the Selection Type to determine the type of
Polyline, Polygon, Text, Annotation, selection to make. Then set the other options in
Polygon Marker, and Image. the dialog.
When the Selection Type is set to Measured Properties, the selection criteria option
changes to Measurement. Available measurements are Length and Area.
Condition
The Condition option is available when the Selection Type is set to either Data
Attributes or Measured Properties. The Condition lets you set the relationship between
the type of item you are looking for and a value associated with the object. Available
options are >, >=, <, <=, =, or !=. To set a Condition, click on the existing option
and select the desired option from the list.
312
Condition Description
> Greater than the Value entered
>= Greater than or equal to the Value entered
< Less than the Value entered
<= Less than or equal to the Value entered
= Exactly equal to the Value entered
!= Not equal to the Value entered. This selects all objects that are
not the Value.
Value
The Value option is available when the Selection Type is set to either Data Attributes
or Measured Properties. The Value can be either a numeric value, text, or a
combination of numbers and text. Note that this field is case sensitive. So, entering
MW1 is not the same as entering mw 1. To change the Value, highlight any text or
numbers that may already exist and type a new set of text or numbers.
Condition Section
The selection can be further refined by adding another selection type. The Condition
section has None, And, and Or options available. To only use the existing selection, set
the Condition to None. To select objects with the first selection and another selection,
such as selecting all polylines with a length greater than 10 units, set the Condition to
And. Enter the additional selection information in the bottom of the dialog. To select
objects with either the first selection or a different type of selection, such as selecting
all symbols or all objects with the primary ID of "well", set the Condition to Or. Enter
the second selection criteria in the bottom of the dialog.
Current Number of Selected Items

The Current Number of Selected Items at the bottom of the dialog indicates how many
objects are selected, based upon the current selection options. If the value is 0, then
no objects are currently selected and the Selection Type and selection criteria need to
be altered to select any objects.
313
Didger
Example
Select all polylines that have a length greater than five feet. Units are set during
calibration or by clicking the Tools | Project Settings command.
In the Critera Select dialog,

1. Set the upper Selection Type to Measured Properties.
2. Set the Measurement to Length.
3. Set the Condition to >.
4. Set the Value to 5.
5. Set the Condition to And.
6. Set the lower Selection Type to Object Type.
7. Set the Object Type to Polyline.
8. Click Select to select all polylines with a length greater than 5 feet.
9. Click Close to close the dialog. The objects with the selection parameters are
selected.
Arranging Objects
Click the Arrange | Order Objects commands to change the order objects are drawn
in the plot window. Objects can also be moved by dragging them to a new position in
the Data Manager.
In the examples below, the red square is being moved with the selected command.
The diagrams show where the red square starts (left image) and where the red square
ends after the command is used (right image).
Click the Arrange | Order Objects | Move to
Front command, click the button, right-click

on an object and select Arrange | Move to Front, or
press SHIFT+PAGE UP on the keyboard to move
the selected object to the front. The object will
appear on top of the other objects in the layer.
Click the Arrange | Order Objects | Move to
Back command, click the button, right-click

on an object and select Arrange | Move to Back, or
press SHIFT+PAGE DOWN on the keyboard to
314
move the selected object to the back. The object will appear behind all of the other
objects in the layer.
Click the Arrange | Order Objects

| Move Forward command, click the
button, right-click on an object

and select Arrange | Move Forward,
or press CTRL+PAGE UP on the
keyboard to move the selected object
one object forward. The object will
appear on top of the next object in the layer.
Click the Arrange | Order Objects

| Move Backward command, click
the button, right-click on an

object and select Arrange | Move
Backward, or press CTRL+PAGE
DOWN on the keyboard to move the
selected object one object back. The
object will appear behind the next object in the layer.
315
Didger
Moving an Object to Another Layer

Click the Arrange | Move to Another Layer command or press CTRL+K on the
keyboard to move all selected objects from the current layer to another layer in the
project. The objects are copied to the same position in the destination layer as they
are in the existing layer. At least two layers must exist to use this command. After the
command is selected, the Select Layer dialog appears, allowing you to choose the
destination layer.
Select the new layer name and click OK.
To use the Move to Another Layer command:

1. Make sure both the original layer and the layer you want to move the objects to
are editable.
2. Select the objects to be copied or moved.
3. Click the Arrange | Move to Another Layer command.
4. The Select Layer dialog appears. Choose the layer to move the objects.
5. Click OK and the objects are moved to the selected layer.
Replicating an Object
Click the Arrange | Replicate command or right-click and select Replicate to make a
duplicate copy of the selected objects in the exact location of the original objects.
316
Aligning Objects
Click the Arrange | Align Objects commands to align selected objects relative to the
bounding box surrounding the selected objects. The objects can be aligned both
vertically and horizontally.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Left command or the button to align all
selected objects along the left side of the bounding box.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Center command or the button to center all
selected objects between the left and right sides of the bounding box.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Right command or the button to align all
selected objects along the right side of the bounding box.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Top command or the button to align all
selected objects along the top of the bounding box.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Middle command or the button to center all
selected objects between the top and bottom sides of the bounding box.
Click the Arrange | Align Objects | Bottom command or the button to align all
selected objects at the bottom of the bounding box.
317
Didger
Rotating Objects
Select an object and click the Arrange |
Rotate command to rotate the object by a
specified number of degrees. After selecting
the command, the Rotate dialog opens. Type
the number of degrees to rotate the object
into the Rotate dialog. Alternatively, you can
move the slider button to change the
rotation. Positive numbers rotate the object
in a counterclockwise direction and negative
numbers rotate the object in a clockwise
Specify the degree of Counterclockwise
direction. rotation in degrees in the Rotate
dialog.
Click on an object to select it. Click the Arrange | Free Rotate command or the
button to rotate the selected object with the mouse. After selecting the command, the
cursor changes to to indicate that the program is in free rotate mode. To rotate
an object click just inside the object’s bounding box and hold the left mouse button
while moving the cursor. As the object is rotated, the object's outline is displayed in
the rotated view. To fix the position of the rotated object, release the mouse button.
Note: images cannot be rotated.
318
Chapter 10
Changing the View
View Menu Commands
The View menu contains commands to display the full extents of the project, change
the zoom level, and change the plot window color. In addition, the View menu
contains a command to reset all windows to the default locations.
Zoom Full Extents

Click the View | Full Extents command or click the button to scale the project
so the entire project area is seen in the plot window. The project extents are defined
by the limits set in the Project Limits and Scale dialog.
Zoom In
The View | Zoom | In command increases the magnification of the area in the plot
window. The command scrolls the window to keep the point of interest centered.
Enter Zoom In Mode
To enter zoom in mode, click the View | Zoom | In command, click the button,
or right-click in the plot window and select Zoom | In. The cursor will change to a
to indicate zoom in mode. Left-click the area on which to center the magnified image.
Exit Zoom In Mode

Click on another tool button or press the ESC key on the keyboard to end zoom in
mode.
Zoom Out
The View | Zoom | Out command decreases the magnification of the image in the
plot window. The command scrolls the window to keep the point of interest centered.
319
Didger
Enter Zoom Out Mode
To enter zoom out mode, click the View | Zoom | Out command, click the
button, or right-click in the plot window and select Zoom | Out. The cursor will change
to a to indicate zoom out mode. Left-click the area on which to center the
magnified image.
Exit Zoom Out Mode

Click on another tool button or press the ESC key to end zoom out mode.
Zoom with A Wheel Mouse

You can use a wheel mouse to zoom realtime and pan in the plot window or grid node
editor. Rotate the wheel forward to zoom in, or rotate the wheel backward to zoom
out. Hold down the wheel button straight down, and the cursor will turn to a closed
hand. When the cursor is a , drag the mouse to pan the plot window. Be sure to
click straight down with the scroll wheel.
Zoom with the Keyboard

You can use keyboard commands to zoom in and out of the plot window. The default
commands are CTRL + + to zoom in, and CTRL + - to zoom out.
Zoom Selected
The View | Zoom | Selected command magnifies selected objects to the maximum
size possible in the plot window.
Select an object and use the View | Zoom | Selected command, click the
button, press CTRL+L on the keyboard, or right-click in the plot window and select
Zoom | Selected to magnify the selected object.
Zoom Rectangle
The View | Zoom | Rectangle command allows magnification by drawing a rectangle
around the area of interest in the plot window.
Enter Zoom Rectangle Mode
Click the View | Zoom | Rectangle command, click the button, or right-click in
the plot window and select Zoom | Rectangle to enter zoom rectangle mode. The
320
cursor will change to a to indicate that you are in zoom rectangle mode. Hold
down the left mouse button and drag the dotted zoom rectangle around the area of
interest to magnify it. When the left mouse button is released, the plot window will
zoom to the selected area.
Exit Zoom Mode

Click another tool button or press the ESC key to end zoom mode.
Zoom Realtime
The View | Zoom | Zoom Realtime command zooms in and out as the left mouse
button is held down and the mouse is dragged up and down in the plot window.
Enter Zoom Realtime Mode

To enter zoom realtime mode, click the View | Zoom | Zoom Realtime command, or
click the button. The cursor will change to a to indicate that you are in zoom
realtime mode. Hold down the left mouse button and then drag up or down in the
window to zoom in or out. As you drag the mouse up, the screen is zoomed in. As you
drag the mouse down, the screen is zoomed out.
Exit Zoom Mode

Click another tool or press the ESC key to end zoom mode.
Pan
The View | Pan command allows you to move your location in the plot window or grid
node editor, while retaining the current level of magnification.
Enter Pan Mode
Use the View | Pan command, or click the button to pan the current view in the
plot window or grid node editor.
To pan the current view:
1. Click the View | Pan command, or the button.

2. Click on a portion of the current view.
321
Didger
3. Hold the left mouse button down while dragging the view to a new position.
Exit Pan Mode

Click on another toolbar button or press the ESC key to end pan mode.
Redraw
Click the View | Redraw command, click the button, or press F5 on the
keyboard to redraw the window. This is used to remove unwanted leftovers or "dirt"
that occasionally results from manipulating objects.
Changing the Plot Color

Click the View | Change Plot Color command to open the Select Color dialog. In
the dialog, change the background plot window color. The background is the area
behind all objects in the plot. The background is not exported and is for display only.
The default color is white.
Select Color Dialog

In the Select Color dialog, set the color for the plot window background.
Set the background Color

Color
The Color is the color of the background. Click the existing color sample next to Color
to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the selected
background color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette to open the
Colors dialog and create custom colors.
322
User Interface Style

The Tools | User Interface Style commands control the visual appearance of the
Didger toolbars and managers. The User Interface Style options include Blue,
Black, and Silver. The User Interface Style options control the tabs, menus, and
managers appearance.
Changing the Window Layout

The windows, toolbars, managers, and menu bar display in a docked view by default;
however, they can also be displayed as floating windows. The visibility, size, and
position of each item may also be changed.
Visibility
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers commands to toggle the display of the
toolbars. Alternatively, use the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command
to open the Customize dialog. The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog displays
all of the toolbars. A check mark indicates the toolbar is currently visible. Reset
toolbars with the Customize dialog.
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers commands to toggle the display of the Layer
Manager, Coordinate Manager, Property Manager, and Data Manager.
Alternatively, you can click the button in the title bar of the Layer Manager,
Coordinate Manager, Property Manager, or Data Manager to close the manager
window. The Property Manager can also be opened by double-clicking on an object.
Auto-Hiding Managers
Click the button to hide a docked manager. The manager slides to the side or
bottom of the main Didger window and a tab appears with the window name.
The Layer Manager appears

as a tab on the side of the window.
323
Didger
Position the mouse pointer over the tab to view the manager. Move your mouse away
from the manager and the manager "hides" again. You can also click inside the
manager to anchor it at its current position. Click in another manager to release the
anchor and hide the manager. Click the button to disable the auto-hide feature.
Size
Drag the sides of floating plot window, manager, toolbar, or menu bar to change its
size. If a manager is docked, its upper and lower bounds are indicated by a or
cursor. Move the cursor to change the size.
Position
To change the position of a docked manager, click the title bar and drag it to a new
location. The entire manager appears in the location it will be displayed when the
manager is floating. To dock the manager, use the docking mechanism. You can also
double-click the manager's title bar to toggle between floating and docked modes. A
tabbed manager view is also an option.
Docking Mechanism
Left-click the title bar of a manager and drag it to a new location while holding the left
mouse button. The docking mechanism displays with arrow indicators as you move the
manager.
The docking indicator

can lock the location of
the manager windows.
When the cursor touches one of the docking indicators in the docking mechanism, a
blue rectangle shows the window docking position. Release the left mouse button to
allow the manager to be docked in the specified location.
324
This image displays the Property Manager being

docked to the right side of the Didger window.
Tabbed Managers
To create tabbed managers:
4. Drag one manager on top of another window.
5. Hover over the center section of the docking mechanism. The blue area shows
where the tabbed manager will display.
6. Release the mouse button.
To return to individual managers from the tabbed view:

1. Click on the manager's name on the tab.
2. Drag the tab to a new position.
Click on a manager's tab and drag it to a

new position to separate the managers.
325
Didger
Floating Managers
The toolbars and menu bar can also be moved or displayed in floating windows.
To dock the toolbar or menu bar in a new location, click the "grip" bar along the
toolbar or menu bar edge, hold the left mouse button, and then drag the toolbar or
menu bar to a new location. Drag the toolbar or menu bar away from the window edge
to display the toolbar as a floating window. Double-click the manager title bar to
switch between floating and docked.
Restoring the Managers and Windows to Their Original Locations

If the managers have moved or become invisible, or if they are in undesired locations,
click the View | Reset Windows command to move the managers and windows back
to the original locations. Note that you must restart Didger for the changes to take
effect.
The View | Reset Windows command will reset the project to Didger defaults.
326
Chapter 11
Importing, Exporting, Saving, and
Printing
Introduction to Importing and Exporting
Didger supports several file formats to aid in the exchange of maps and graphics with
other applications. Files from other applications can be imported into Didger as base
maps. For example, you can export files from Didger as metafiles and then import
them into other software. The clipboard provides another easy way to move maps to
other Windows applications.
Importing
Click the File | Import command, click the button, or press CTRL+I on the
keyboard to import a file into a Didger project. This command opens the Import
dialog so you can select the file to open in Didger.
Import Dialog
The Import dialog appears after clicking the File | Import command.
Look In
The Look in field shows the current directory. Click the down arrow to see the
directory structure and click on the folders to change directories.
Creating New Folders and Changing the View

The buttons to the right of the Look in field allow you to create new folders and
change the view of the file list.
File List
The file list displays files in the current directory. The current directory is listed in the
Look in field. The Files of type field controls the display of the file list. For example, if
Golden Software Boundary (*.GSB) is listed in the Files of type field only .GSB files
appear in the files list. To see all files in the directory, choose All Files (*.*) from the
327
Didger
Files of type list. Double-click on a file to open it or single-click the file and then click
the Open button.
Specify a File Name

The File name field
shows the name of
the selected file, or
type a path and file
name into the box
to import a file.
Specify a File Type

The Files of type
field shows the file
format to be
opened. To change
the file format, click
the down arrow and
select the file type
from the list.
Select a file to import in the Import dialog.
The All Common

Types (*...) format type is selected by default. This displays all the file formats that
are commonly imported with File | Import command. If a different format type is
selected, the setting will be remembered until the end of the current session. When
the program is restarted, the default format type will be used.
To see all files in the directory, choose All Files (*.*) from the Files of type list.
Double-click on a file to open it or single-click the file and then click the Open button.
The All Files (*.*) option shows all of the file formats in the current directory, even if
the file type is not appropriate for the action chosen.
328
Import Format Types

Didger supports several file formats to aid in the exchange of projects with other
applications. Files from other applications can be imported into Didger as stand-alone
graphics or as a base map that can be edited in Didger. Didger allows the
information to be stored in and recalled from several types of files.
• Access Database (*.mdb, *.accdb)

• Adobe PDF (Raster) (*.pdf)
• Arc/Info ASCII Grid (*.asc, *.aig, *.agr, *.grd)
• Arc/Info Binary Grid (*.adf)
• ASCII Data (*.dat, *.txt)
• Atlas Boundary (*.bna)
• AutoCAD Drawing (*.dxf)
• Banded Lattice (*.bil, *.bip, *.bsq)
• Comma Separated Variables (*.csv)
• CPS-3 Grid Format (*.asc, *.dat, *.grd, *.cps, *.cps3)
• Database (*.dbf)
• DDF SDTS DEM (*.ddf, *.tar, *.tar.gz, *.zip, *.tgz)
• DDF SDTS TVP (*.ddf, *.tar, *.tar.gz, *.zip, *.tgz)
• DLG USGS Digital Line Graph (*.dlg, *.lgo, *.lgs)
• DTED (*.dt?)
• ERMapper (*.ecw)
• ESRI ArcInfo Export Format (*.e00)
• ESRI Float Grid Format (*.flt)
• ESRI Shapefile (*.shp)
• Excel Spreadsheet (*.xls, *.xlsx, *.xlsm)
• GIF Image (*.gif)
• GLOBE DEM (?10g)
• Golden Software Blanking (*.bln)
• Golden Software Boundary (*.gsb)
• Golden Software Interchange (*.gsi)
• Golden Software PlotCall (*.plt)
• GPS GPX Exchange Format (*.gpx)
• Hierarchical Data Format (*.hdf)
329
Didger
• JPG Compressed Bitmap (*.jpg, *.jpeg)

• JPG-2000 Bitmap (*.jp2, *.j2k, *.jpc, *.jpt, *.jpeg2000, *.j2000)
• LizardTech MrSID Image (*.sid)
• Log ASCII Format (*.las)
• MapInfo Interchange Format (*.mif)
• PNM/PPM/PGM/PBM Image (*.pnm, *.ppm, *.pgn, *.pbm)
• Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
• Raw Binary Latice (*.raw, *.bin)
• RGB SGI-RGB Image (*.rgb, *.rgba, *.bw)
• SEG-P1 Exchange Format (*.sp1, *.seg)
• SRTM Elevation Data (*.hgt)
• STK Metamorph (*.stk)
• Sun Raster Image (*.ras, *.sun)+
• Surfer Grid Format (*.grd)
• Sylk Spreadsheet (*.slk)
• Tagged Image (*.tif, *.tiff)
• Targa (TrueVision) (*.tga)
• USGS DEM (*.dem)
• Visualization Toolkit (*.vtk)
• Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
• Windows Enhanced Metafile (*.emf)
• Windows Metafile (*.wmf)
• X AVS X-Image (*.x, *.ximg)
Import Options Dialogs

After selecting a file in the Import dialog, an Import Options dialog may appear.
Click the button in the Import Options dialog for additional help on the specific
file format options.
Import Images
When an image is imported, any projection information is automatically imported. The
Image Registration and Warping dialog appears, allowing for the reference information
to be changed, allowing for an unreferenced image to be referenced, or allowing a
coordinate system to be assigned to the image.
330
Import Data
When a data file is imported, the Import Data File dialog appears. The Import Data
File dialog allows X and Y coordinates to be selected, the attributes can be set, and
the data can be imported as separate points or as a single post map.
Limits During Import

When an image, vector file, or data file is imported, the limits will automatically
expand. The new project limits will show all objects already existing in the project and
all new objects being imported.
When the Preserve Project Limits During Import option is checked in the Project Limits
and Scale dialog, the limits will not automatically change after importing new objects.
The limits and scale will stay at the values set in the Project Limits and Scale
dialog. Click the Map | Project Limits command after importing new objects to
expand the limits.
Importing Files with Different Projections

The first file imported into Didger, or the first tablet calibration defines the initial
projection for the current Didger project. Additional imported files are automatically
converted to the initial projection parameters.
Import Data File Dialog
Click the File | Import command, click the button, or press CTRL+I on the
keyboard to import a file into a Didger project. This command opens the Import
dialog so you can select the file to open in Didger. After a data file is selected and the
Open button is clicked, the Import Data File dialog appears.
To import a data file into Didger, the data file must have at least two columns
containing X and Y locations. Additionally, you can have other columns of information
that can be used as data attributes. Data can be imported as a post map, which
creates a single object. Or each data point can be imported separately, creating a new
object for each point in the data file.
331
Didger
Set the data columns for the coordinates and attributes in the Import Data File dialog.
Data Columns
The data columns are shown in a spreadsheet format at the top of the dialog. Only the
first 50 rows of the data file will be displayed in the spreadsheet format.
Import Method
The Import Method controls how fields are assigned from the data file to existing data
attribute fields in the project. Available options are Match Fields, Append Fields, and
Replace Fields. To change the Import Method, click on the existing option and select
the desired option from the list.
When the Import Method is set to Match Fields, the available attributes from the
project are listed in the dialog below the Y Coordinate option. To match a field from
332
the data file, click in the empty box next to one of the attribute names. Select the
desired data file field name from the list.
When the Import Method is set to Append Fields, all fields in the data file (other than
the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate fields) are automatically added as new attributes in
the project. After importing the data, the project has the previous attribute fields in
addition to the newly defined attributes from the data file. The project attribute fields
are grayed out in the Import Data File dialog.
When the Import Method is set to Replace Fields, all fields in the data file (other than
the specified X Coordinate and Y Coordinate fields) replace the previously existing data
attribute fields. After importing the data, the project only has the newly defined
attributes from the data file. The project attribute fields are grayed out in the Import
Data File dialog.
Field Name from First Row

Check the box next to the Field Name from first row option to set the imported data
field names to be the same as the first row in the data file. When unchecked, the fields
are named Field1, Field2, Field3, etc.
Create Post Map

Check the box next to the Create Post Map option to import all data points from the
file into Didger as a single post map object. When unchecked, each row in the data
file is import as an individual point object. When Create Post Map is checked, the
Primary ID is preserved for each individual point in thepost map object. However the
Primary ID cannot be individually edited from within the project.
Importing the data as a single post map is useful when importing large data files
because only a single object is created. One common use for this option would be you
want to import a data file and convert from one coordinate system to another. The
data associated with each point does not need to be edited, so importing the data with
the Create Post Map option speeds the conversion and export.
Imported grid files are always imported as a post map.
Coordinate and Attribute Fields

The X Coordinate and Y Coordinate are required when importing a data file.
333
Didger
Other attribute fields are defined by the Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, and Quaternary
options, when the Import Method is set to Match Fields. Other field definitions are
optional.
To change any coordinate or attribute field to another column in the data file, click on
the existing option or the empty box next to the coordinate or attribute name. Select
the desired column from the list.
Import or Cancel
Click Import to initiate the import of the data file. Click Cancel to close the dialog
without importing.
Exporting
Click the File | Export command, click the button, or press CTRL+E on the
keyboard to export the project information in files that can be used by other
programs. The File | Export command is not available if no objects exist in the
current project. The only way to preserve all information about a project within
Didger is to save as a Didger project .PJT file by clicking the File | Save or File |
Save As commands.
Export Dialog
After clicking the File |
Export command, the
Export dialog opens.
Save In
The Save in field shows the
current directory. Click the
down arrow to see the
directory structure and click
on the folders to change
directories. The buttons to
the right of the Save in field
allow you to create new
folders and change the view
of the file list.
Type a File name and set the Save as type to the desired file
format to export the project.
334
File List
The file list displays the files using the extension specified in the Save as type box. A
file can be overwritten by selecting it from the file list.
File Name
The File name box displays the name of the selected file, or type in the path and file
name of the file to be exported.
Save As Type
The Save as type list box specifies the format of the file to be exported.
Selected Objects Only

Check the Selected objects only box to export selected objects rather than the entire
plot.
Show Options Dialog

Check the Show options dialog option to display the Export Options dialog for the
selected Save as type. If the Show options dialog option is checked, when the Save
button is clicked the appropriate Export Options dialog (if any) appears. The Size and
Color page, Spatial References page, and any file specific pages are displayed. Refer to
the Files | Import Options section of the help for additional information on specific
import options.
File Name
Export files typing a name into the File name box and then selecting the file type in
the Save as type list. For example, typing MYPLOT in the File name box and choosing
Tagged Image (*.tif, *.tiff) from the Save as type list results in MYPLOT.TIF. There is
no need to type in an extension because it is automatically added. If a file extension is
typed in the box along with the file name, the file type is determined by the typed
extension. For example, if MYPLOT.DXF is typed in the File name box, the resulting file
is in the AutoCAD DXF format, no matter what is set in the Save as type field.
Export Units
For projected projects, the exported units are always determined by the units listed in
the Coordinate Manager. To export in different units, click Cancel in the Export dialog.
Click on the Coordinate Manager and change the Display Units.
335
Didger
Export File Types

Didger supports several file formats to aid in the exchange of projects with other
applications. Files from other applications can be imported into Didger as stand-alone
graphics or as a base map that can be edited in Didger.
Didger allows the information to be stored in and recalled from several types of files.
• Adobe PDF (Raster) (*.pdf)

• Adobe PDF (Vector) (*.pdf)
• ASCII Data (*.dat, *.txt)
• Atlas Boundary (*.bna)
• AutoCAD Drawing (*.dxf)
• Comma Separated Variables (*.csv)
• Database (*.dbf)
• Encapsulated PostScript (*.eps)
• ESRI Shapefile (*.shp)
• Excel Spreadsheet (*.xls, *.xlsx, *.xlsm)
• GIF Image (*.gif)
• Golden Software Blanking (*.bln)
• Golden Software Boundary (*.gsb)
• Golden Software Interchange (*.gsi)
• Google Earth (*.kml, *.kmz)
• JPG Compressed Bitmap (*.jpg, *.jpeg)
• JPG-2000 Bitmap (*.jp2, *.j2k, *.jpc, *.jpt, *.jpeg2000, *.j2000)
• Log ASCII Format (*.las)
• MapInfo Interchange Format (*.mif)
• PNM/PPM/PGM/PBM Image (*.pnm, *.ppm, *.pgn, *.pbm)
• Portable Network Graphics (*.png)
• RGB SGI-RGB Image (*.rgb, *.rgba, *.bw)
• Scalable Vector Graphics (*.svg)
• Seismic Exchange Format (*sp1, *.seg)
• Sun Raster Image (*.ras, *.sun)+
• Surfer Grid Format (*.grd)
• Sylk Spreadsheet (*.slk)
336
• Tagged Image (*.tif, *.tiff)

• Targa (TrueVision) (*.tga)
• Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
• Windows Enhanced Metafile (*.emf)
• Windows Metafile (*.wmf)
Create Base Map

Click the Map | Surfer | Create Base Map command or the button to create a
georeferenced base map of your Didger project in Golden Software's Surfer program.
The Create Base Map command opens the Surfer Map dialog.
Select the type of base map to create and

click OK to open Surfer with the file loaded.
In the Surfer Map dialog, select the type of base map to create. Available options are
Creating a single raster base map or Exporting individual objects.
Single Raster Base Map

When Creating a single raster base map is selected, Didger exports the entire project
to an image file and imports it as a georeferenced base map in Surfer. After clicking
OK in the Surfer Map dialog, the Export Options dialog appears. The Size and
Color, TIFF Options, and Spatial References tabs are available, allowing output
parameters of the image to be defined. Once the parameters are set in the dialog,
click OK. Golden Software's Surfer program opens and a single image base map of
the Didger project appears.
337
Didger
Individual Objects
When Exporting individual objects is selected, Didger creates separate objects in a
base map for each individual image, polyline, and polygon in the Didger project and
creates one separate post map for all the points in the project. All the map layers are
overlaid into a single map object in Surfer. The images will be exported from Didger
in 300 DPI resolution (using the physical size under Map | Project Limits to
determine the pixel count) and polylines and polygons will be exported as DXF files.
Points are exported to a DAT file. If points exist in the project, the Data Export Options
dialog is displayed. Click OK and the map is created in Surfer.
Due to the current nature of export formats, some objects may not appear exactly as
they do in Didger. This command is compatible with Surfer 7 or later versions. If you
do not currently own Surfer version 7 or higher, you can contact Golden Software for
upgrade information.
Saving Didger Files

Click the File | Save command, click the button, or press CTRL+S on the
keyboard to write the project information to disk using the current file name. If the file
has not yet been saved, the Save As dialog is displayed so you can give the project a
name. If you would like to save an existing file to a new name, click the File | Save
As command instead of File | Save.
The Save command saves information in the Didger project file .PJT format that is
not recognized by other applications. When you want to use digitized information in
other applications, you can use the File | Export command to create files in several
useful formats.
Save As
Click the File | Save As command or click the button to save a new project file or
saves a modified project file to a new name. The Save As command saves information
in the Didger .PJT format that is not recognized by other applications. When you want
to use digitized information in other applications, click the File | Export command to
create files in other formats.
The Save As Dialog

After clicking the File | Save As command, or clicking the File | Save command with
a new file, The Save As dialog opens.
338
Specify the save location, file name, and file type in the Save As dialog.
Save In
The Save In field shows the current directory. Click the down arrow to see the
directory structure and click on the folders to change directories.
Creating New Folders and Changing the View

The buttons to the right of the Look in field allow you to create new folders and
change the view of the file list.
File List
The File list displays the files using the extension specified in the Save as type box. A
file can be overwritten by selecting it from the file list.
Specify a File Name

The File name field shows the name of the selected file, or type a path and file name
into the box to open a file.
339
Didger
Save As Type
Select the file format in the Save as type list.
Print Setup
Click the File | Print Setup command or the button to set printer options for the
project. The Print Setup dialog appears, where the printer, paper size, paper source,
and page orientation options can be set.
Set the printer properties in the Print Setup dialog.
Printer
Click the existing printer Name to select another printer from the list.
Printer Properties
Click the Properties button to open another dialog that changes the printer properties.
For information on specific printer settings, see the owner's manual for the printer.
340
Paper
The Paper section control the Size and Source of the paper. These options are based
on the selected printer. Only page sizes and sources that the current printer supports
will be listed. To change either the Size or Source, click the existing option. In the list,
select the new option.
Orientation
The Orientation section controls whether the page is set to Portrait or Landscape
mode. To change the Orientation, click on the desired layout. Select Portrait to have a
vertical page. Select Landscape to have a horizontal page.
Print
Click the File | Print command, click the button, or press CTRL+P on the
keyboard to print the current project.
Set the printer properties in the Print dialog.
341
Didger
Printer
Click the existing printer Name to select another printer from the list.
Printer Properties
Click the Properties button to open another dialog that changes the printer properties.
For information on specific printer settings, see the owner's manual for the printer.
Print Method
The Print Method controls how the document is printed on the page.
• Current View prints the document as it appears in the plot window. The
objects are scaled to fit within the paper and print settings.
• Scaled Current View prints the current view, as shown in the plot window, at
the scale specified in the Project Limits and Scale dialog for vector plots or
the size specified during import for an image.
• Fit to Page reduces the size of the plot so that it fits within the specified page
size.
• Tile breaks the drawing into page size pieces and generates multiple pages of
output.
Print Range
The Print Range controls which document pages are printed. Select All to print all the
pages that contain objects. Select Selection to print the selected objects only.
Copies
Copies specify the number of copies to print. If two or more copies of multiple page
documents are printed, check the Collate box to separate the copies into packets.
These options are disabled if the current printer does not support them.
Overlap
When the Print Method is set to Tile, each page overlaps adjacent pages by the
amount specified in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Overlap section.
Scale
When the Print Method is set to either Scaled Current View or Tile, the Scale option is
available. Setting the Scale to 100% prints the project at the actual size. Printing with
342
a Scale of 200% prints twice as large of the project scale. Printing with a Scale of 50%
prints half as large of the project scale.
343
Didger
344
Chapter 12
Options, Defaults, and Customizations
Introduction to Options and Defaults

Click the Tools | Project Settings command or click the button to set Didger
project defaults, such as page units, undo levels, digitizing tolerances, and tablet
settings. The Tools | Project Settings command also controls default line, fill, text,
and symbol properties. These properties are shared by all objects that use the specific
format. For example, if you change the line color, all new polygons, polylines, circles,
etc. will have the new line color.
Project Settings Dialog

Click the Tools | Project Settings command to open the Project Settings dialog.
Change any options in the dialog and click OK to save your changes. All future objects
follow the new settings.
There are seven pages in the Didger Settings dialog: General, Tolerance Settings,
Digitizing Settings, Line Properties, Fill Properties, Text Properties, and
Symbol Properties.
Project Settings - General Page

The General page sets miscellaneous Didger defaults.
Page Units
You can set the Page Units to either Inches or Centimeters.

Set the Numeric Display Format from zero to 25 decimal places. This setting affects
the number of decimal places in various parts of the program such as the number of
decimal places shown in the status bar, in calibration, and in numeric labels. To
change the value, highlight the existing value and type a new value. Alternatively,
click the to increase or decrease the value.
345
Didger
Circle Options
The Circle Options
define how circles are
digitized.
• The Vertex
Offset defines
the frequency
of the vertex
spacing along
the perimeter
of the circle in
degrees.
Decreasing
the value
increases the
number of
vertices
created along
the perimeter
of the circle.
the Vertex
Offset ranges
from 0.1 to
10. To change
the value,
highlight the
existing value Set miscellaneous project options on the
and type a General page of the Project Settings dialog.
new value.
Alternatively,
click the to increase or decrease the value.
• The Use 3 Point Method defines a drawn circle by clicking on three points. The
circle whose perimeter intersects all three points is drawn after the third point
is clicked. This option is checked, by default. If this option is unchecked,
Didger uses a center-radius method to define the circle. Under this method,
the first point clicked defines the center of the circle. The second point clicked
defines the radius from the first point. The circle is drawn automatically when
the second point is created.
Undo Levels
You can set the number of commands to undo in the Undo Levels edit box. The
maximum number of undo levels is 25. To change the undo levels, highlight the
346
existing value and type a new value. Alternatively, click the to increase or
decrease the value.
Calculated Display Units

The Calculated Display Units for Length and Area control the display units of the area
and length calculations shown in the Data Manager, the Property Manager, and in
the report.
Image Export Options

Check the box next to Export in Display Coordinates to export an image in the display
coordinates of the current project.
Printing Options
Check the box next to Simulate Stock Hatch Patterns to retain the line density when
printing or exporting projects with polygons filled with one of the stock fill patterns.
Uncheck this box to allow the printer or export filter to control the line density display.
Check For Updates

An update is a free newer version of the program. Updates include corrections to
problems that have been found. Check the Allow check for updates box to allow
Golden Software to periodically check for program updates. Additionally, if a crash
occurs while the program is running, a check for update will occur the next time the
program is started.
Check For Announcements

An announcement is a message from Golden Software regarding changes made to
Didger. It is highly recommend that you have the Allow check for announcements
option checked. No information is transferred to Golden Software with this option.
347
Didger
Project Settings - Tolerance Page

Project Settings dialog. The Tolerance Settings page controls the creation of
polylines and polygons as well as playing an important role with some editing tools.
Snap Tolerance and Vertex

(Weed) Tolerance Initial
Settings
When you calibrate a project,
the tolerance settings are
defined by the RMS error value
in RMS Calibration Settings. The
Snap Tolerance is set to the
nearest value of the RMS error.
The Vertex (Weed) Tolerance is
set to the nearest value that is
one-half the RMS error. You can
change either of the values by
typing a new value into the edit
box. The values are in project
units.
Snap Tolerance
When you create a new
polyline, the Snap Tolerance
edit box specifies the minimum Set the snap and vertex tolerance for line and symbol
distance allowed between nodes creation on the Tolerance Settings page in the
for the existing and new Project Settings dialog.
polylines. The value is specified
in project units.
The Snap Tolerance is set through Tools |

Project Settings | Tolerance Settings.
The Snap Tolerance is shown as circles
at the ends of the polylines.
348
Vertex (Weed) Tolerance

The Vertex (Weed) Tolerance edit box sets the minimum spacing for vertices along a
polygon or polyline. The values are specified in project units. The value defines the
minimum segment length for a polyline or polygon. No two adjacent vertices along the
object can be closer together than the specified length, but they can be farther apart.
Auto Snap Nodes

If the Auto Snap Nodes check box is activated, and the beginning or ending node of a
new polyline lies at less than the Snap Tolerance distance from an existing polyline,
the node is automatically joined to the existing polyline when you finish digitizing the
new polyline.
Show Line Nodes

Nodes are the beginning and ending points of a polyline. The polyline nodes are
displayed as green (beginning) and red (ending) boxes when the Show Line Nodes box
is checked. Showing nodes is useful when you need to ID left and right sides of a
polyline.
Show Vertex Tolerance Circles

When Show Vertex Tolerance Circles is checked, a circle is drawn around each vertex.
The radius of the circle reflects the Vertex (Weed) Tolerance value. If the Vertex
(Weed) Tolerance value is set to zero, you will not see any circles. The color of the
circles is set by selecting a color from the list adjacent to the Vertex (Weed) Tolerance
value. Showing vertex tolerance circles is useful when using commands such as Thin
and Smooth.
The minimum spacing between vertices is shown as circles if Show Vertex

Tolerance Circles is checked in Tools | Project Settings | Tolerance Settings.
Show Snap Tolerance Circles

When Show Snap Tolerance Circles is checked, a circle is drawn around the end of
each polyline. The radius of the circle is set in the Snap Tolerance field. If the Snap
349
Didger
Tolerance value is set to zero, you will not see any circles. The color of the circles is
set by selecting a color from the list adjacent to the Snap Tolerance value. This
command is useful when using commands such as Snap All Polyline Segments.
Since the end nodes are not within the overlapping portion
of the snap tolerance circles, the polylines would not snap
together using Draw | Edit Boundaries | Snap All Polyline Segments.
Project Settings - Digitizing Settings Page

Click the Tools | Project
Settings command or click
the button to open the
Project Settings dialog. The
Digitizing Settings page
sets tablet button behavior
on the digitizer puck. You can
define operations for up to 16
buttons. Button settings are
also available when
calibrating the tablet.
Setting Puck Buttons

To set puck buttons:
1. Click the Tools | Project
Settings command.
2. In the Project Settings
dialog, click on the
Digitizing Settings tab.
3. Click on a button name in
the Tablet Button
Settings list. For
example, click on Button Set table button options on the Digitizing
2. Settings page of the Project Settings dialog.
4. Select an action from the
Select Button list.
350
5. Make any additional adjustments to the digitizing settings and click OK to close the
NOTE: Some tablet pucks use buttons that begin numbering at zero rather than one.
For these types of pucks, Button 1 in the dialog refers to button 0 on the puck.
Button Settings
Click the existing option next to Select Button to change the function of the selected
button. The available options and the function description are listed below.
• Nothing - If this option is selected, the button does not have a function.
• Enable Tablet On/Off - This option toggles the digitizing tablet on and off. This
can also be accomplished by clicking the Draw | Tablet | Activate Tablet
command. When the tablet is disabled, the tablet pointer can then be used as
a mouse. Toggling the tablet on with this button is not supported by all tablet
drivers.
• Enable/Disable Stream Mode - When stream mode is enabled, you can hold
down this button and drag it to create a continuous stream of vertices. The
minimum vertex spacing is controlled by the vertex tolerance settings.
• Digitize - This option creates a point, node, or vertex. This option should
always be specified for one of the buttons. See digitizing points, polylines, and
polygons for more information.
• Finish - This option completes the creation of a polyline or polygon. When you
have digitized the final point in a polygon or polyline, this adds the final node
for polylines, or closes the polygon and adds the default fill.
• Cancel - This option cancels the current operation before completion.
• New Point - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Symbol command.
• New Polyline - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Polyline
command.
• New Polygon - This option is the same as clicking the Draw | Polygon
command.
• Snap Nearest Vertex - When digitizing a polyline or polygon, this option snaps
the next created vertex to the nearest vertex on an existing polyline or
polygon.
• Snap Nearest Line Segment - When digitizing a polyline or polygon, this option
snaps the next created vertex to the nearest position along an existing polyline
or polygon, even if a vertex does not exist at that point.
• Undo - This option removes the last point digitized in a polyline or polygon.
Beep on Object Completion
351
Didger
When Beep on Object Completion is checked, the system emits the "default beep"
sound each time an object is finished being digitized. This signifies that the object was
created without needing to look at the monitor. If the default beep is mapped to a
.WAV file in Windows, that sound plays instead.
Stream Mode
When Stream Mode is checked, hold down the primary mouse button or digitize button
and drag the puck to create a continuous stream of vertices. The minimum vertex
spacing is controlled by the vertex tolerance settings.
Beep on Vertex Creation

When Beep on Vertex Creation is checked, the system emits the "default beep" sound
each time a vertex in your polyline or polygon object is digitized. If the default beep is
mapped to a .WAV file in Windows, that sound plays instead. If Stream Mode is
checked, the beep sounds every few seconds.
Digitizing Cursor
The Digitizing Cursor list sets the default cursor type when digitizing. The cursor icon
changes to the type selected. To change the cursor, click on the existing option and
Project Settings - Line Properties Page

Project Settings dialog. The Line Properties page controls the default line
properties.
Style
The Style is the manner in which a line is drawn. Click on the existing line style to
open the line style palette. Click on a style to use it for the selected line. Both simple
and complex lines can be selected from the list. To create a custom simple line style,
click the Custom button at the bottom of the list. The Custom Line dialog allows you
to create new line styles.
Color
The Color is the color of the line. Click the existing color sample next to Color to open
the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the selected line. Click the
Custom button at the bottom of the palette to open the Colors dialog and create
custom color.
352
Width
The Width controls how thick
a line appears. To change the
line Width, highlight the
existing value and type a new
number. Press ENTER on the
keyboard to make the
change. Alternatively, click
the to increase or
decrease the thickness of the
line. The line Width is a value
from 0.0 to 0.5 inches (0.0 to
1.27 cm). A width of zero is
one pixel wide. Values are in
page coordinates.
Start and End Styles

The ends of the lines can
have arrowheads on them.
The Start Style is placed at
the first vertex of the line.
The End Style is placed at the Set the Line Properties for the selected
last vertex of a line. Not all object in the Property Manager.
lines can have arrowheads.
For example, the line surrounding a rectangle does not support arrowheads.
Scale
The Scale determines the size of the arrowhead. A larger Scale creates a larger arrow.
To change the scale of the arrowheads, highlight the existing value and type a new
value. Alternatively, click the to increase or decrease the scale. Press ENTER on
the keyboard to make the change.
353
Didger
Project Settings - Fill Properties Page

Project Settings dialog. The Fill Properties page controls the default fill properties.
Fill Pattern
The Fill Pattern indicates the
way that an object is filled.
To change the Fill Pattern,
click on the existing pattern
sample next to Fill Pattern.
In the list, select a new
pattern from the fill pattern
palette. There are two types
of fill patterns: Windows
stock and bitmap images.
Stock patterns and some
bitmap patterns can have
different foreground and
background colors. All
patterns can have the
foreground or background
color partially transparent.
Bitmap patterns can be
scaled.
To load a fill pattern from a

raster image file, click the
Custom button at the Set the Fill Properties for the selected
bottom of the fill pattern object in the Property Manager.
palette. An Import dialog
will appear. Click on the
image file and click Open to load the image as the fill pattern.
Foreground
The Foreground is the color of the pattern lines or pixels. Click the existing color
sample next to Foreground to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to
use it for the selected foreground fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of
the palette to open the Colors dialog and create custom colors.
354
Background
The Background is the color behind the pattern. Click the existing color sample next to
Background to open the color palette. Click on a color in the palette to use it for the
selected background fill color. Click the Custom button at the bottom of the palette to
Opacity
Change the Opacity of the pattern by entering a value from 0% (completely
transparent) to 100% (completely opaque). To change the opacity, highlight the
existing value and type a new value. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the
change. Alternatively, click the buttons to increase or decrease the opacity level.
Scale Factor
The Scale Factor controls the density of the bitmap fill Pattern. The scale factor
controls the density of the pattern. Set the Cover mode to Tile and set the Scale
Factor to a value between 0.1 and 10. The larger the Scale Factor, the larger the
resulting pattern.
Cover Mode
The Cover mode is used with bitmap patterns. The Cover mode determines how the
bitmap is used to fill the desired area. You can Stretch a bitmap to fit the fill area or
Tile the pattern in the fill area. To change the behavior, click on the existing value and
This bitmap fill has the This bitmap fill has the
Cover mode set to Stretch. Cover mode set to Tile.
355
Didger
Project Settings - Text Properties Page

Project Settings dialog. The Text Properties page controls the default text
properties.
Face
The Face is the font used for
the text. To change the font,
click on the current font
name. Select the desired
font from the list. Click the
arrow button or select a font
and use the ARROW keys on
the keyboard to scroll
through the Face list. The
selected font is displayed in
the Sample section. The font
files that are installed on
your computer are displayed
in the Face list. Didger
supports all true type fonts.
Size (Points)
Set the text size in the
Points field. Highlight the
existing value and type a
new value. Press ENTER on
the keyboard to make the Set the default text properties on the
Text Properties page in the Project Settings dialog.
change. Or, click the
buttons to increase or
decrease the size. A Points value between zero and 720 can be specified.
Style
Check the boxes next to Bold, Italic, Strikethrough, or Underline to apply a style to the
text. Note that some typefaces, such as Symbol, do not support bold or italicized text.
• Bold will increase the thickness of the text (i.e. example).
• Italic will create oblique text (i.e. example).
• Strikethrough will add a horizontal line through the center of the text (i.e.
example).
356
• Underline will add a horizontal line under the text (i.e. example).
Alignment
The Alignment controls the location of the text relative to the reference point. A
reference point is the point clicked in the plot window when the crosshair cursor is
placing the text on the screen. The text box is horizontally and vertically aligned
relative to the reference point. The default position is that the reference point is at the
upper left corner of the bounding box (left, top).
• Left horizontally aligns the text box so that the reference point is to the left of
the text box.
• Center horizontally centers the text box on the reference point.
• Right horizontally aligns the text box so that the reference point is to the right
of the text box.
• Top vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is above the text
box.
• Baseline vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is located at
the base of the text. The baseline is the imaginary line along which characters
are positioned as they are drawn. Descenders on characters (i.e. the loop on
the lower case "g") are drawn below the baseline.
• Bottom vertically aligns the text box so that the reference point is below the
text box.
• Center vertically centers the text box on the reference point.
Color
You can click the Color button to open the color palette. Click on a color to use it for
the text. You can create new colors by clicking the Custom button at the bottom of the
color palette.
Opacity
Change the Opacity of the text by entering a value from 0% (completely transparent)
to 100% (completely opaque). To change the opacity, highlight the existing value and
type a new value. Press ENTER on the keyboard to make the change. Alternatively,
click the buttons to increase or decrease the opacity level.
Sample
A sample of the selected text options appears in the Sample section.
357
Didger
Project Settings - Symbol Properties Page

Project Settings dialog. The Symbol Properties page controls the default symbol
properties.
Symbol Set
Select the Symbol Set from the list. The Symbol Set can be any TrueType font
installed on your system. To change the Symbol Set, click on the existing font name.
Select the new font from the list.
Symbol
Choose the Symbol by
clicking the existing symbol
and selecting a new symbol
from the symbol palette. The
number of the selected
symbol is indicated in the title
bar above the palette. This
number is useful when a
specific symbol is desired.
Color
The Color is the color of a
solid symbol. Click the
existing color sample next to
Color to open the color
palette. Click on a color in the
palette to use it for the
selected foreground fill color.
Click the Custom button at
Set the Symbol Properties for the selected
the bottom of the palette to object in the Property Manager.
open the Colors dialog and
create custom colors.
Size
Change the Size of the symbol by highlighting the existing value and typing a new
number into the box. Alternatively, click the buttons to increase or decrease the
358
symbol size. Symbols can be from 0 to 4.000 inches (0 to 10.160 centimeters) in size.
Sizes are reported in page units.
Customizing Toolbars and Menus

You can customize Didger toolbars and menus by clicking the View |
Toolbars/Managers | Customize command, or you can right-click on a toolbar and
select Customize from the context menu.
• Use the Commands page to add buttons to the toolbars.
• Use the Toolbars page to control the toolbar display and reset the toolbars to
the original configurations.
• Use the Menu page to control the menu display.
• Use the Options page to control the screen tips and icon display.
Customize Dialog - Commands Page

You can use the Commands page in the Customize dialog to add buttons to toolbars
and commands to menus. The Customize dialog is opened through View |
Toolbars/Managers | Customize or by right-clicking on the toolbars and selecting
Customize.
Categories
The Commands page lists
menu titles (File, Edit,
etc.) in the Categories list.
You can also show all
commands in the program
by selecting All Commands.
Click on the menu title to
display the menu's
commands in the
Commands list.
Commands
When a category is
selected, the Commands
list is updated to display
the commands within the
category.
Use the Commands page in the Customize dialog
to add buttons to toolbars and commands to menus.
359
Didger
Description
When a command is selected, an explanation of the command appears in the
Description box.
Adding Buttons and Commands to Toolbars and Menus

To add a button or command to a toolbar or menu:
1. Click the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command or right-click on
the toolbars and select Customize.
2. Click on the Commands tab.
3. Select a menu name from the Categories list.
4. Select a command name from the Commands list.
5. If you are adding a command to a toolbar, drag the command to a toolbar in the
location where the command should appear.
6. If you are adding a command to a menu, open the menu by clicking on the menu
name and then drag the command to the menu in the location where the
command should appear.
7. Click Close in the Customize dialog to make the change.
Removing Buttons and Commands

To remove a button or command,
2. Click on the Commands tab.
3. Right-click on the button or command and select Delete.
360
Customize Dialog - Toolbars Page

You can use the Toolbars page in the Customize dialog to control the toolbar display
and reset all toolbars to the default state. The Customize dialog is opened through
View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize or by right-clicking on the toolbars and
selecting Customize.
Toolbar Display
The Toolbars list displays
all the toolbars. A check
mark indicates the
toolbar is visible.
Uncheck the box to hide
a toolbar. The Menu Bar
cannot be hidden.
Resetting a Toolbar
If you would like to reset
the changes to a toolbar,
click on the toolbar name
and click the Reset
button to reset the
toolbar to the defaults.
Resetting All Toolbars

and Menus Use the Toolbars page in the Customize dialog
to display or reset toolbars.
If you would like to reset
changes to all toolbars
and menus, click the Reset All button.
Creating New Toolbars

You can create a new toolbar by clicking the New button. Enter a name for the new
toolbar into the Toolbar Name dialog. The new toolbar is created without any
buttons. Open the Commands page and drag commands into the new toolbar to add
buttons. There is a limit of 10 custom toolbars.
Renaming Toolbars
To rename a toolbar, click on the existing toolbar name and then click the Rename
button. Enter a new name into the Toolbar Name dialog. Only custom toolbars
created with the New button can be renamed.
361
Didger
Deleting Toolbars
To delete a toolbar, click on the existing toolbar name and click the Delete button. In
the warning message, click Yes to delete the custom toolbar. Click No to keep the
custom toolbar. Only custom toolbars created with the New button can be deleted.
Show Text Labels

To add labels to toolbars, select a toolbar and check the Show text labels box.
Resetting All Toolbars and Managers to Default Location

Click the View | Reset Windows command to reset all toolbars and managers to the
default position and size. The program must be closed and reopened for the change to
be made.
Resetting Toolbars and Menus to the Defaults

To reset all toolbars and menus to the default settings,
2. Click on the Toolbars tab.
3. Click the Reset All button.
362
Customize Dialog - Menu Page

You can use the Menu page in the Customize dialog to control the menu display. The
Customize dialog is opened through View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize or by
right-clicking on the toolbars and selecting Customize.
Show Menus For

You can choose to display
the Plot or Default Menu
menus. Click the Reset
button to reset the menu
to the original menu.
Menu Animations
When clicking on a menu,
you can choose to have
the menu Unfold, Slide,
or Fade. Select None if
you do not want any
menu animation. Select
Default to return to the
default animation.
Menu Shadows
Check the Menu shadows Use the Menu page in the Customize dialog
to display menus.
box to display a drop
shadow around open
menus.
Context Menus
Context menus are the menus displayed when right-clicking in the window. You can
customize these menus in Didger. Select a menu from the Select context menu list.
Add or remove items from the selected menu. Click the Reset button to restore the
default context menus.
To add commands to a context menu:

1. Click on a context menu name in the Select context menu list.
2. While the context menu is open, click on the Commands tab in the Customize
dialog.
363
Didger
3. On the Commands page, select a command in the Commands list and drag it into
the open context menu.
To remove commands from a context menu:

1. Click on a context menu name in the Select context menu list.
2. In the context menu, right-click on the name of the command you wish to remove
and select Delete.
Customize Dialog - Options Page

You can use the Options page in the Customize dialog to control the screen tips and
icon display. The Customize dialog is opened through View | Toolbars/Managers |
Customize or by right-clicking on the toolbars and selecting Customize.
Screen Tips
Check the Show ScreenTips on
toolbars option to show what a
button does when you place
the cursor over the button. To
display shortcut keys in the
screen tip, check the Show
shortcut keys in ScreenTips.
Large Icons
Check the Large Icons box to
display large icons.
Use the Menu page in the Customize dialog

to display menus.
364
Customize Dialog - Button Appearance Dialog

You can customize Didger button images in the Button Appearance dialog.
Click the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize command to open the

Customize dialog. Once the Customize dialog is open, right-click on the menu
command or toolbar button you want to change the appearance of, and select Button
Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog.
The Button Appearance dialog allows you to use a predefined image or create a new
image.
Image Only
Select Image only if you would
like the button appearance to
only display an image.
Text Only
Select Text only if you would
like the button appearance to
only display a text description.
Image and Text

Select Image and text if you
would like the button
appearance to have an image Customize buttons for commands in the Button
and text description. Appearance dialog.
Button Text
Specify the text description in the Button text area.
Select User-defined Image

The Select User-defined Image area displays current button images available for use
or editing.
Edit
Click the Edit button to open the Edit Button Image dialog. The Edit Button Image
dialog allows you to create a new image or edit a current image.
365
Didger
Picture
Change the color of the pixels in
the Picture area to create a new
image or edit a current image.
Preview
The image created in the Picture
area is displayed at full size in the
Preview area. This is a preview of
what the image will look like when
used in the program.
Colors
Use the Colors area to specify a
color to change the pixels of the
Picture area and create or edit a
button image.
Tools
Choose from one of the preset Create new or edit current button images
Tools to help create or edit a in the Edit Button Image dialog.
button image. The tools available
include:Pencil, Fill, Select Color,
Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, Copy, Paste, and Clear.
Additional Customization
When the Customize dialog is open, you can right-click on an existing toolbar button
or menu item to set various options. Right-click on an actual toolbar or menu item to
see these commands. Do not in the Customize dialog.
• Select Reset to Default to set the toolbar button or menu item to the default.
• Select Copy Button Image to copy the button or menu item graphic. This
command is disabled if the menu item does not contain a graphic.
• Select Delete to remove a menu command or toolbar button.
• Select Button Appearance to set the button text and graphic display.
• There are three settings for graphic and text appearance, Image, Text, and
Image and Text. To display the graphic only, click Image. To display text only,
click Text. To display both the graphic and text, click Image and Text. Some of
366
these display options may be disabled, depending on the selected menu

command or button.
• Select Start Group to add a section dividing line to the left of horizontal
toolbars and menu titles or above vertical toolbars and menu commands. Click
the command a second time to switch off the section divider.
Also, when the Customize dialog is open, you can rearrange the menus, menu
commands, and toolbar buttons. To move a menu, menu command, or tool button,
click on the menu name, menu command, or tool button and then drag it to a new
location.
367
Didger
368
Chapter 13
Coordinate Systems and Map Projections
Introduction to Coordinate Systems
A coordinate system is a method of defining how a file's point locations display on a
map. Different types of coordinate systems exist that control how the coordinates are
shown on the map. In Didger, a project can be unreferenced in Cartesian
Coordinates, referenced to a geographic lat/long coordinate system, or referenced to a
known projection and datum.
A Cartesian coordinate system is considered unreferenced. A local system has a

location that begins numbering at an arbitrary location and increments numbers from
this location.
A Geographic coordinate system uses a spherical surface to define locations on the

earth. Geographic coordinate systems are commonly called unprojected lat/long.
Didger has several predefined geographic coordinate systems available. Each system
has a different datum. The same latitude and longitude value will plot in different
locations depending on the datum.
A Projected coordinate system consists of a projection and a datum. Each projection

distorts some portion of the map, based on the ellipsoid and datum specified.
Coordinates can be lat/long, meters, feet, or other units. Different projections cause
different types of distortion. It is recommended that you do not use projected
coordinate systems if you do not need to convert between coordinate systems or if all
your data are in the same coordinate system.
Map Coordinate System Overview

In Didger, data from data files, grids, image files, and vector files can have an
associated coordinate system. All coordinate systems defined by the source are
converted "on the fly" to the project's target coordinate system. This allows files with
different coordinate systems to be easily combined in Didger.
The standard procedure for creating maps in a specific coordinate system are:
1. Create the map by importing the file.
369
Didger
2. Click the Map | Set Default Projection command to set the target coordinate
system.
Didger does not require a map projection be defined. Maps can be created from non-
referenced data, grid, and imported image and vector maps. If you do not specify a
coordinate system for each imported file, it is highly recommended that you do not
change the target coordinate system for the project. Changes to the target coordinate
system for the map can cause the unreferenced map layers to appear incorrectly.
Projecting Maps in Didger

Use the following procedure to apply a projection to the project.
To use a projection:
1. Once you have a map in the plot window, select Map | Change Projection. The
Assign Coordinate System dialog opens.
2. Select a Coordinate Space Type.
3. Select the Geographic (lat/lon) or Projected System you would like to use in the
Select a Projected Coordinate System list.
4. If any parameters need to be changed, click the Modify button. Set the options in
the Define Coordinate System dialog. Specify the parameters for the selected
projection by entering the appropriate values into the dialog. The variables in this
dialog vary according to the projection selected in the previous step. Please see
the projection type for a description of the variables. If you do not understand
projections refer to one of the many books on mapping. See also Projection
References.
5. Click the OK button.
Didger modifies the coordinates of the drawing for the new projection. This may take
a few minutes if the drawing is large.

Click the Map | Change Projection command or click the button to open the
Assign Coordinate System dialog. The Assign Coordinate System dialog is used in
new projects, before data is imported and in projects with existing projections when
If the Map | Change Projection command is not available, a coordinate system has
not been defined for the current project. Click the Map | Coordinate Conversion
370
command first. Set the coordinate system in the Coordinate Conversion dialog. This
is the system the project uses for the current reference. After the coordinate system is
set, click the Map | Change Projection command to change it to a new system.
Displaying Data with Different Coordinate Systems in a Single

Project
Didger allows you to display multiple files in a single project, where each file contains
information from a different coordinate system. To do so, you need to assign the
coordinate system for each imported file. Then, change the desired target coordinate
system for the entire project.
The standard procedure for creating maps in a specific coordinate system are:
1. Import the first file by clicking the File | Import command.
2. If the Assign Coordinate System dialog appears, select Projected Coordinates.
3. In the Select a Projected Coordinate System section, select the coordinate system
that the file is currently projected. This is the existing coordinate system for the
file. When finished making changes, click OK.
4. Import the second file by clicking the File | Import command.
5. If the Assign Coordinate System dialog appears, select Projected Coordinates.
6. In the Select a Projected Coordinate System section, select the coordinate system
that the file is currently projected. This is the existing coordinate system for the
second file. This coordinate system can be different from the first file's coordinate
system and has no effect on the first imported file. When finished making changes,
click OK.
7. To change the coordinate system for the project, click the Map | Change
Projection command.
8. If the Coordinate System is not correct, change the Select a Projected Coordinate
System to show the desired target coordinate system. When finished, click OK.
The entire map is now displayed in the desired target coordinate system.
371
Didger
Assign Coordinate System Dialog

The Assign Coordinate System dialog is accessed from several locations. It links a
file or the project to a specific coordinate system. Once a coordinate system is defined
for a file, a Golden Software Georeference .GSR2 file is created. This file contains all
the relevant coordinate system information that Didger needs to load the file in the
proper coordinate system in the future.
When a .GSR2 file is created for a data file, it is read when creating grids or maps
from the data file. The resulting grid or map layer has the same coordinate system as
the original data file.
Assign a projection to your file or project in the Assign Coordinate System dialog.
Coordinate Space Type

Choose either Cartesian Coordinates or Projected Coordinates as the project
Coordinate Space Type. Typically, Cartesian Coordinates are used for well logs,
graphs, or documents with an arbitrary coordinate system (i.e. not real world XY
372
coordinates). Projected Coordinates are typically used with maps that have known
coordinates (i.e. latitude/longitude), projections, and datums.
Cartesian Settings
X Axis Type and Y Axis Type are used with Cartesian Coordinates only. The Axis Type
is either Linear or Logarithmic. The data must be greater than zero when using a
Logarithmic axis. Values equal to and less than zero are ignored in the plot when the
logarithmic type is selected. Well logs use both logarithmic and linear scales. The
linear option is more common with real world maps.
Calibration Units
Calibration Units are defined when specifying the coordinate system for an image file
that needs control points defined.
Projection Categories
Click the button to expand the options in the Coordinate System dialog. Click the
button to collapse the options.
Predefined
Expand the Predefined section by clicking the + button. The Predefined section
includes all coordinate systems that have been predefined for Didger.
Geographic (lat/lon)
Expand Geographic (lat/lon) to select a Latitude/Longitude coordinate system and
datum that fits your needs. Detailed information about each projection is listed at the
bottom of the dialog when the system is selected. If your data are currently in a form
of lat/lon, you would want to select one of the options in Geographic (lat/lon).
Projected Systems
Expand Projected Systems to select a predefined Polar/Arctic/Antarctic,
Regional/National, State Plane, UTM, or World coordinate system. Detailed information
about each projection is listed to the right when the datum is selected.
Templates
Expand the Templates section to select a predefined template. Click the desired
template and press the Modify button to change the properties. Once modified, the
new coordinate system is added to the Custom section.
373
Didger
Favorites
Select a coordinate system and click the Add to Favorites button to add a coordinate
system to your Favorites list. Alternatively, right-click on a selected coordinate system
and choose Add to Favorites from the menu. Select a coordinate system and click the
Remove from Favorites button to remove a coordinate system from your Favorites list.
By default, no favorite coordinate systems are specified. It is recommended that
systems that you use frequently and Custom systems that you intend to use more
than once be added to the Favorites section for ease of navigation.
Custom
Expand Custom to see the custom coordinate system you have defined for the current
file. Custom systems can be defined by clicking the New button. By default, no custom
coordinate systems are specified. Custom coordinate systems are only listed in the
dialog when the file using the custom coordinate system is open.
If a Custom coordinate system is defined and intended to be used more than once, it
is highly recommended that the system be added to the Favorites section by clicking
the Add to Favorites button.
Modify Coordinate System

Select any coordinate system from the Select a coordinate system list. Click the Modify
button to open the Define Coordinate System dialog. Alternatively, right-click on the
coordinate system and choose Modify from the menu. Modify any properties and click
OK. The modified coordinate system is added to the Custom list.
If the Modify button is unavailable, make sure that a specific coordinate system is
selected. If a category of systems, such as Predefined or Geographic (lat/lon) is
selected, the Modify button is unavailable.
New Custom Coordinate System

Click the New button to open the Define Coordinate System dialog and define a
custom projection and datum. Alternatively, right-click on an existing coordinate
system and choose New to create a new projection based off the selected projection.
The new custom projection and datum will be listed in the Custom section with the
name you defined.
374
Add to Favorites
Click the Add to Favorites button to add a projection to your Favorites list.
Alternatively, right-click on a coordinate system and choose Add to Favorites. This is
very useful if you frequently use the same projection, such as World Geodetic System
1984. This is also useful for Custom systems that will be used on multiple project
files. Adding the projection to the Favorites list makes selecting the projection easier
in the future.
If the Add to Favorites button is unavailable, make sure that a specific coordinate
system is selected. If a category of systems, such as Predefined or Geographic
(lat/lon) is selected, the Add to Favorites button is unavailable.
Remove
Select a coordinate system in the Favorites list and click the Remove from Favorites
button to delete the system. Alternatively, right-click on a coordinate system in the
Favorites section and choose Remove. The coordinate system is removed from the
Favorites section.
If the Remove from Favorites button is unavailable, make sure that a specific
coordinate system is selected in the Favorites list. If a category of systems, such as
Predefined or Geographic (lat/lon) is selected or if a coordinate system is selected in a
category other than Favorites, the Remove from Favorites button is unavailable.
Example 1: Select a Predefined Coordinate System (i.e. UTM)

1. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, click the button to the left of
Predefined.
2. Click the button to the left of Projected Systems.
3. Click the button to the left of UTM.
4. Click the button to the left of WGS84.
5. Select WGS84 UTM zone 13N.
6. Click OK. The projection for this data is now set to WGS84 UTM zone 13N.
Example 2: Create and Select a Custom Coordinate System (i.e.

Lambert Conformal Conic)
1. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, click the New button to open the
Define Coordinate System dialog.
2. Change the Name to Lambert Conformal Conic Custom.
375
Didger
3. From the Projection list, select Lambert Conformal Conic.

4. Make any necessary changes to the Parameter or Values in the Projection section.
5. Make any necessary changes to the Datum section.
6. Click OK and the Lambert Conformal Conic Custom projection is added to the
Custom section.
7. Click the custom projection and click OK to apply the projection to the data.
Example 3: Saving a Custom Coordinate System

Custom.
2. Select the coordinate system in the Custom section and click the Add to Favorites
button.
3. Click the button to the left of Favorites to open the Favorites section. The
custom projection is saved here.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Define Coordinate System Dialog

Click the New or Modify buttons in the Assign Coordinate System dialog to open the
Define Coordinate System dialog. The Define Coordinate System dialog allows
you to create a Custom coordinate system. Select a Projection, enter the projection
Parameters, and specify a Datum. Click OK and the new coordinate system will be
added to the Coordinate System dialog Custom list for future use.
Name
Specify a custom name for the new coordinate system in the Name box.
Projection
Select a projection from the Projection list. Specify custom Parameter and Value
options. Unprojected Lat/Long does not have Parameter and Value options to specify.
The projection options include: Unprojected Lat/Long, Albers Equal Area Conic,
Azimuthal Equidistant, Bonne, Cassini, Eckert IV, Eckert VI, Equidistant Conic,
Equidistant Cylindrical, Gnomonic, Hotine Oblique Mercator, Lambert Azimuthal Equal
Area, Lambert Conformal Conic, Mercator, Miller Cylindrical, Mollweide, New Zealand
Map Grid, Oblique Mercator, Orthographic, Polyconic, Robinson, Robinson-Sterling,
Sinusoidal, Stereographic, Transverse Mercator, Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM),
and Van Der Grinten.
376
Define a custom coordinate system in the Define Coordinate System dialog.
Datum
Select a datum from the Datum list. Specify custom Parameter and Value options to fit
your needs.
OK or Cancel
Click OK to create your new custom coordinate system. The coordinate system will be
listed in the Custom section of the Assign Coordinate System dialog for this file. If
you want to save the custom coordinate system for future use, add the custom
coordinate system to the Favorites section. Click Cancel to return to the Assign
Coordinate System dialog without creating a custom coordinate system.
Example 1: Defining a Custom Coordinate System

1. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, click the New button to open the
Define Coordinate System dialog.
2. Change the Name to Lambert Conformal Conic Custom.
3. From the Projection list, select Lambert Conformal Conic.
4. Make any necessary changes to the Parameter or Values.
377
Didger
5. Make any necessary changes to the Datum section.

6. Click OK and the Lambert Conformal Conic Custom projection is added to the
Custom section.
7. In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, select the custom projection and click
OK.
Example 2: Saving a Custom Coordinate System

Custom.
2. Select the coordinate system in the Custom section and click the Add to Favorites
button.
3. Click the button to the left of Favorites to open the Favorites section. The
custom projection is saved here.
4. Click OK to close the dialog.
Introduction to Map Projections

Maps are usually seen in a flat, two-dimensional medium such as a drawing on paper
or an image on a computer screen. Since the surface of the Earth is curved, or three-
dimensional, the surface must somehow be transformed from three dimensions to two
in order to display a map of the Earth's surface. Projections are a mathematical
process by which the surface is transformed from three dimensions to two.
One of the simplest forms of projection is analogous to shining a light through a

translucent globe onto a piece of paper and tracing the outlines. Other forms of
projection may involve dozens of complex mathematical equations. Since no two-
dimensional representation of a three-dimensional surface can be accurate in every
regard, different projections have been developed to suit different purposes. Some
projections are accurate in terms of area but not in scale, some are accurate in terms
of scale but not in shape, and so on. The selection of an appropriate projection for a
map depends on which characteristics of a map are most important or most desirable
for a given project or audience. Didger supports several of the projections that are
used most often in modern cartography and related fields.
There are many excellent textbooks and publications on this subject, and we will not
attempt to explain projections in full detail here. If you need or want more
information, you might consider reading the references that provide good introductory
discussions of map projections.
378
When you do not use projections, land areas can become distorted in shape and size,
so some areas might appear relatively larger or smaller than they actually are in
relation to other land areas and visual representation of data can become somewhat
misleading. However, these problems only become significant when you are plotting
large land masses, such as an entire continent. For most Didger applications, such as
plotting a single state or a group of states, this problem is minimal.
Geometric Forms of Projections

Most forms of projection operate by projecting Earth coordinates onto a geometric
shape that can be easily flattened to a two-dimensional image. This mathematical
transformation is commonly referred to as a map projection. A map projection
systematically projects locations from the surface of the spheroid to represent
positions on the geometric shape.
Three geometric shapes are frequently used:

Type of Characteristics of Examples of
How it works
Shape Projection Projection
Cylinder Earth coordinates may Lines of longitude are parallel Cassini,
be projected onto a to each other. Equidistant
cylinder. The cylinder is Cylindrical,
cut lengthwise and Hotine Oblique
unrolled to make a two- Lines of latitude are parallel Mercator,
dimensional map. This to each other. Mercator, Miller
type of projection is Cylindrical, New
called a cylindrical Zealand Map
Lines of longitude are at right
projection. Grid, Oblique
angles to lines of latitude.
Mercator,
Transverse
Regions near the equator or Mercator, and
selected standard parallels Universal
are minimally distorted. Transverse
Mercator
Regions near the poles are

highly distorted.
379
Didger

How it works
Cone Earth coordinates may Lines of latitude form Albers Equal
be projected onto a concentric arcs. Area, Equidistant
cone. The point of the Conic, Lambert
cone is usually directly Conformal Conic,
above the pole and the Lines of longitude are Polyconic, and
sides of the cone pass straight and radiate outward Bonne
through the globe at two from the tip of the imaginary
user-defined latitudes, cone.
called the Standard
Parallels. At the
standard parallels, there
is no difference between
the east-west and north-
south scales. The cone is
cut from tip to base and
unrolled to make a two-
dimensional map. This
type of projection is
called a conic projection.
Plane Earth coordinates may The side of the Earth that is Azimuthal
be projected directly facing away from the center Equidistant,
onto a flat plane. This of the projection is not Gnomonic,
type of projection is visible. Orthographic,
called an azimuthal Stereographic,
projection. Projections of and Lambert
this type are Azimuthal Equal
recommended for maps Area
of polar regions because
cylindrical and conic
projections generally
either have severe
distortion in polar
regions or are unable to
project coordinates in
polar regions.
380

How it works
Other Projections in this Eckert IV, Eckert
category are VI, Mollweide,
pseudocylindrical, Robinson,
pseudoconic, or based Robinson-
on some other Sterling,
mathematical projection Sinusoidal, State
or mathematical tables. Plane*,
Unprojected
Lat/Long, and
Van der Grinten
* The State Plane Coordinate System uses Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal
Conic, or Hotine Oblique Mercator, depending on the zone.
Characteristics of Projections
Some projections are imbued with characteristics that tell us if certain types of
measurements (e.g. measurements of distance, area, etc.) are accurate on the
projected map. Due to the nature of projecting a three-dimensional surface onto a
two-dimensional surface, a projection cannot have all four characteristics at one time.
Therefore, the purpose of the map must be considered when selecting a projection.
381
Didger
Some of these characteristics include the following:

Type of Characteristic of Projection Drawbacks Example
Projection Projections
Equal Area A equal area projection is when the In order for a Albers Equal
area of any given part of the map is projection to be Area, Bonne,
preserved. This means that the any equal area, however, Eckert IV,
object that covers the same area consistency in the Eckert VI,
on the Earth as any other part of shapes, scales, Lambert
the map will be the same size. and/or angles across Azimuthal
the map must be Equal Area,
sacrificed. Mollweide, and
For example, if a one inch diameter Sinusoidal
circle on the map covers a 100 mile
diameter circle on the Earth's Meridians and
surface, then we know that a one parallels may not
inch diameter circle anywhere else intersect at right
on the map is known to cover angles.
another 100 mile diameter circle on
the Earth.
In maps of smaller regions, shapes

may not be obviously distorted.
Conformal A conformal projection preserves In order for a Hotine Oblique
local shapes. This means that when projection to be Mercator,
the local angles for points on the conformal, however, Lambert
map are represented accurately. consistency in the Conformal
This means that the angles surface areas, Conic,
between any given point and any shapes, and/or Mercator,
nearby points are accurate, but are scales across the Oblique
not necessarily accurate for widely map must be Mercator,
separated points on the map. sacrificed. An area State Plane
enclosed by a series Coordinate
of arcs may be System,
A side effect is that conformal greatly distorted. Transverse
projections preserve the precise Mercator, and
perpendicular intersections between Universal
parallels and meridians on the map. Transverse
When mapping smaller areas, Mercator
relative shape is preserved.
382
Type of Characteristic of Projection Drawbacks Example

Projection Projections
Equidistant A equidistant projection is when the In order for a Azimuthal
scale between at least one specific projection to be Equidistant,
origin point on the map with equidistant, Equidistant
respect to every other point on the however, Cylindrical,
map is represented accurately. consistency in the Equidistant
surface areas, Conic, and
shapes, and/or Cassini
angles across the
map must be
sacrificed.
Azimuthal A azimuthal projection is when the In order for a Azimuthal
direction of (or angle to) all points projection to be Equidistant,
on the map are accurate with azimuthal, areas, Gnomonic,
respect to the center point of the shapes, and angles Lambert
projection. may be sacrificed at Azimuthal
areas not close to Equal Area,
the center of the Orthographic,
map. and
Stereographic
Other Some projections try to minimize Polyconic,
the effects of all distortions and as Robinson and
a result do not minimize any one Robinson-
distortion in particular. Sterling,
Unprojected
Lat/Long, and
Van der
Grinten
In addition to the characteristics described above, some projections have highly

specialized characteristics that may be useful in certain applications. For example, on
maps made with a Mercator projection, all lines of constant direction (rhumb lines) are
known to be straight, thereby making such maps very desirable as navigational charts.
Some projections are not strong in any one of the four characteristics and are not
listed above.
If your map has a projection to it, it is very important to specify the appropriate
projection settings to get accurate length/area results.
383
Didger
Ellipsoids
For maps of the Earth where accuracy is not of particular concern, we can safely
assume that the Earth is perfectly spherical in shape. However, the Earth is actually
somewhat ellipsoidal (or egg-shaped), approximately 1/300 wider than it is tall,
assuming a vertical orientation with respect to the axis of rotation. This shape needs
to be taken into account to produce maps of any significant accuracy.
This diagram shows the difference between an

ellipsoid (solid line) and a sphere (dashed line).
While an ellipsoid is a closer approximation of the Earth's shape than a sphere, the
Earth's surface is not uniform in curvature, so any ellipsoidal representation of the
Earth is still only an approximation. This being the case, cartographers have
historically used a number of slightly different ellipsoidal representations in attempts
to produce more accurate maps of different regions of the Earth.
You can define the ellipsoids with Map | Change Projection .
To access the ellipsoid options:

5. Click on one of the Predefined systems in the Select a Projected Coordinate
System list.
1. Click the Modify button.
2. In the Define Coordinate System dialog, select one of the predefined or
<custom> datum.
3. Set the Ellipsoid options and click OK in both dialogs.
Ellipsoid Definition
You can choose an ellipsoid type from the Ellipsoid drop-down list. If you select
<custom>, set the next parameters in the Ellipsoid section. The Semimajor Axis
should be set in meters. Next, set either the Semiminor Axis in meters or the Inverse
Flattening (1/f) ratio value. If you do not understand ellipsoids and datum definitions,
384
please use the defaults. For more information on these subjects, see the references
provided.
Datums
Since coordinates on the Earth's surface can be recorded under widely varying
assumptions about the shape and size of the Earth and the locations of the poles and
prime meridian, cartographers have developed a standard for identifying the frame of
reference for a coordinate system. This standard is called the datum. Because the
frames of reference differ, a coordinate recorded in one datum usually has slightly
different latitude and longitude values from the same point recorded in any other
datum.
Some datums are designed to provide a marginally accurate representation of

coordinates spanning the entire Earth, while other datums are designed to provide
more accurate results in a particular region at the expense of lesser accuracy in other
parts of the world. For example, the South American Datum of 1969 (SA69) is tailored
to provide good results for maps of the South American continent and surrounding
areas, but, consequently, provides poor results for the rest of the world.
When combining data from multiple sources into a single map, it is important that all
of the coordinates being combined use the same datum. Since each datum has slightly
different latitude and longitude values for the same coordinates, mixing coordinates
from multiple datums together introduces inaccuracies into the map. To address this
problem, a datum conversion procedure is available to convert coordinates from one
datum to another.
Different methods may be used for converting coordinates from one datum to another:
Method Description
Molodensky The Molodensky method is the most widely used method of datum
conversion. It adjusts latitude and longitude coordinates by taking
into account the displacement between two datum's ellipsoids on
all three axes. It does not take into account any rotational
differences between the two ellipsoids.
385
Didger
Method Description
Bursa-Wolfe The Bursa-Wolfe method is similar to the Molodensky method, but
in some instances it produces results that are more accurate
because it takes into account both displacement and rotational
differences between two ellipsoids. Didger supports the Bursa-
Wolfe method for conversions from the WGS84 datum to the
following datums: World Geodetic System 1972, DHDN-1, DHDN,
Australian Geodetic 1984, ANS84, MRT - Everest Modified,
Switzerland - CH1903, NTF France - Paris Meridian, and Pulkovo
1942 - Hungary.
If your map includes a NADCON or MRE datum, it is converted to the existing datum in
the plot window. If you open a new plot window and import a NADCON or MRE map,
the map is converted to WGS 84.
Didger supports conversions for over 200 different predefined datums, as well as
user-defined datum conversions based on the Molodensky, NADCON, or Inverse
NADCON methods.
Custom Datum Definition

Click the New button in the Assign Coordinate System dialog to open the Define
Coordinate System dialog. Use the Datum group to define a custom datum and
specify the exact datum parameters and values.
386
Datum
The Datum list contains predefined datums. Select a datum to populate the Parameter
and Value columns. Customize the parameters and values as needed.
Conversion Method
The Conversion Method controls the method of datum conversion and the conversion
parameters. The conversion methods include Molodensky, Bursa-Wolfe, and None.
• The Molodensky method is the most widely used method of datum conversion.
It adjusts latitude and longitude coordinates by taking into account the
displacement between two datum's ellipsoids on all three axes. It does not
take into account any rotational differences between the two ellipsoids.
• The Bursa-Wolfe method is similar to the Molodensky method, but in some
instances it produces more accurate results because it takes into account both
displacement and rotational differences between two ellipsoids.
• Choose None if the predefined methods do not suite your purpose. If you
select <custom> from the Ellipsoid Name list, you can specify your own
ellipsoid model parameters.
Conversion Parameter and Values

You can edit the conversion parameter and values directly by selecting the value you
want to edit and typing a new value over it. Parameters vary depending on the
selected Conversion Method.
Ellipsoid
The Ellipsoid group contains options for defining the ellipsoid. Use these settings to
define the ellipsoid model that best approximates the curvature of the Earth's shape in
the map region. If you do not understand ellipsoids and datum definitions, it is
recommended you use the defaults.
• The Name list contains a collection of ellipsoid models that cartographers have
historically used in attempts to produce more accurate maps of different
regions of the Earth. The Name list also contains the option to create a
<custom> ellipsoid.
• The Semimajor Axis box can be edited to define the major axis.
• The Semiminor Axis box can be edited to define the minor axis.
• The Inverse Flattening (1/f) can be edited to define the flattening ratio.
• The X Displacement, Y Displacement, and Z Displacement are the axis
displacements in meters.
387
Didger
Prime Meridian
The Prime Meridian section contains options for defining the prime meridian Name and
Prime Meridian Shift. A meridian is a line of constant longitude running north-south on
a map. The zero meridian or prime meridian is used as a reference line from which
longitude east and west is measured. The prime meridian passes through Greenwich,
England. The Prime Meridian Shift is the shift from the prime meridian, typically 0
degrees, in decimal degrees.
Understanding Local Datums

To understand how local datum transforms affect data, you need to understand the
ellipsoid, the spheroid, and how both relate to the datum. The spheroid is the a perfect
circular object, located at mean sea level. This is constant everywhere. Because of
local variations in the gravitational field, the shape actually has local variations.
The image from Verhoogan, shows the variation in the

geoid, ellipsoid, and actual topographic surface.
The ellipsoid is used to approximate the global differences. But additional differences
exist because of the actual topographic surface. Local datums were created to locally
account for these differences. The datum includes the ellipsoid, the prime meridian
shift, and any offsets in the X or Y direction. Because local datums align the ellipsoid
with a particular location on the earth's surface, local datums are not suitable for use
outside the designed area.
In the Define Coordinate System dialog, you can choose how datums are converted
from one datum to another. This is the Conversion Method. The Molodensky method is
the most widely used method of datum conversion. It adjusts latitude and longitude
coordinates by taking into account the displacement between two datum's ellipsoids on
all three axes. It does not take into account any rotational differences between the
388
two ellipsoids. The Bursa-Wolfe method is similar to the Molodensky method, but in
some instances it produces more accurate results because it takes into account both
displacement and rotational differences between two ellipsoids. Didger supports the
Bursa-Wolfe method for conversions from the WGS84 datum to the following datums:
World Geodetic System 1972, DHDN-1, DHDN, Australian Geodetic 1984, ANS84, MRT
- Everest Modified, Switzerland - CH1903, NTF France - Paris Meridian, and Pulkovo
1942 - Hungary.
Changing the datum incorrectly can cause maps to appear wrong or not appear at all.
It is advised that changing the datum be done with caution and a basic understanding
of the local datums is advised.
Types of Predefined Coordinate Systems

In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, the coordinate systems are under
predefined are separated into different categories.
Geographic (lat/long) Coordinate Systems

In the Assign Coordinate System dialog, the Geographic (lat/long) category
contains unprojected latitude and longitude coordinate systems. Coordinates are
always in latitude and longitude. Each coordinate system has a different datum.
Datums are defined for specific regions. Properties for each coordinate system and
datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on the desired system.
Polar/Arctic/Antarctic Projection Systems

The Polar/Arctic/Antarctic category contains different projections that can be used
near the north and south poles. Several different projections fit into this category:
Lambert Conformal Conic, Orthographic, and Stereographic. Coordinates are always in
latitude and longitude. The difference between the projections are in the definition of
the false easting, northing, central longitude, central latitude, standard parallel or
datum. Projections are defined for specific regions. Properties for each coordinate
system and datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on the desired system.
Regional/National Projection Systems

The Regional/National category contains different projections that can be used for
specific regions or countries of the world. Several different projections fit into this
category: Albers Equal Area Conic, Azimuthal Equidistant, Cassini, Gnomonic, Hotine
Oblique Mercator, Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area, Lambert Conformal Conic, Mercator,
New Zealand Map Grid, Polyconic, Stereographic, Transverse Mercator, and UTM.
Coordinates are in latitude and longitude, feet, meters, or occasionally other units. The
389
Didger
difference between the projections are in the definition of the false easting, northing,
central longitude, central latitude, standard parallel or datum. Projections are defined
for specific countries or specific regions. Properties for each coordinate system and
datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on the desired system.
State Plane Coordinate Systems

The State Plane category contains both 1927 and 1983 systems. Coordinates are in
either feet or meters. The difference between the 1927 and 1983 systems are in the
definition of the false easting, northing, central longitude, central latitude, standard
parallel or datum. Settings are defined for specific regions of individual states.
Properties for each coordinate system and datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on
the desired system.
UTM Coordinate Systems

The UTM category contains different systems separated by country, region, or type.
Coordinates are in meters. The difference between the systems are in the definition of
the false easting, northing, central longitude, central latitude, standard parallel or
datum. Settings are defined for specific regions or individual countries. Properties for
each coordinate system and datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on the desired
system.
World Projection Systems

The World category contains different projections that can be used to display the map
in a particular way. Several different projections fit into this category: Bonne, Eckert
IV, Eckert VI, EPSG 3395 – Mercator, EPSG 3785 – Popular Visualisation CRS /
Mercator, Equidistant Conic , Equidistant Cylindrical, Miller, Mollweide, Orthographic
Western Hemisphere, Robinson and Robinson-Sterling, Sinusoidal, and Van Der
Grinten. Coordinates are in latitude and longitude. The difference between the
projections are in the definition of the false easting, northing, central longitude,
central latitude, standard parallel or datum. Projections can be used for multiple
countries or specific regions, depending on the projection type. Properties for each
coordinate system and datum are listed in the dialog by clicking on the desired
system.
Templates
The Templates section is an easy way to modify one of the predefined systems without
needing to find the system in one of the other Predefined lists. To modify a coordinate
system, click on the desired template coordinate system and click the Modify button.
390
Supported Projections
In this section the supported projections and different parameters of each projection,
are discussed in detail.
Albers Equal Area Conic Projection
The Albers Equal Area Conic

projection scale is constant along
any given parallel and accurate
along the two specified standard
parallels. This projection is used in
the National Atlas of the United
States. The Albers Equal Area
Conic projection is useful for equal
area maps of low-aspect regions
(regions that are wider than they World Map
are tall). Albers Equal Area Conic Projection
Central Longitude: 0 Central Latitude: 0
Standard Parallel: 45 2nd Standard Parallel: 0
Projection Parameters
Parameter Description
Name Specifies the units used in the map.
Scale Specifies the unit scale of the projected map, relative to
meters. For example, a scale of one means one unit in the
projected map equals one meter; a scale of two means two
units in the projected map equal one meter; etc.
False Easting Specifies the false easting, or horizontal offset, of the
projected coordinates, in meters. False Eastings and False
Northings are added to the underlying "projected" coordinates
as a way to arbitrarily offset their internal XY coordinates
after the projection. Unless you have a reason for using these
offset values, do not use them. These values do not affect the
latitude/longitude coordinates for the map, only the internal
coordinates used to plot the map on the screen. If you use
False Easting and False Northing offsets for a map, any
subsequent boundaries you append to the map must also use
these same offsets if you want the imported boundaries to be
drawn in the correct relative position to the existing
boundaries.
False Northing Specifies the false northing, or vertical offset, of the projected
coordinates, in meters. See above.
391
Didger
Central Longitude Specifies the central longitude of the projection in degrees.
The Central Longitude value typically should be defined as the
longitudinal center of the map you are going to produce. For
example, the value -95.5 represents the geographic center of
the United States, so the map of the U.S. is drawn upright.
Central Latitude Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees. The
Central Latitude value should be defined as the latitudinal
center of the map you are going to produce. This value is only
significant when you define False Easting and False Northing
values.
Standard Parallel Specifies the latitude of the first of two standard parallels, in
degrees. The standard parallels typically are defined at
approximately one-sixth of the distance inside the north and
south limits of the map. For example, if your map latitude
ranges from 30° to 36°, you could place your Standard
Parallels at 31° and 35°. There are alternative methods for
determining the best position of the standard parallels. Please
see Snyder for more information.
2nd Standard Specifies the latitude of the second of two standard parallels,
Parallel in degrees. See above.
Azimuthal Equidistant Projection

The Azimuthal Equidistant projection is a planar
projection. Directions and scale are true from the
center point of the map. Shapes are true at the center
of the map, but are distorted the further you move
from the center. When using a polar view of this
projection, all meridians are straight lines. When using
an equatorial view, the central longitude and equator
are straight lines, otherwise, only the central
longitude is a straight line. This projection is typically
used in polar hemispheric maps.
World Map
Azimuthal Equidistant Projection
Standard Parallel: 0 Central
Longitude: 0
392
Northings are added to the underlying "projected"
coordinates as a way to arbitrarily offset their internal XY
coordinates after the projection. Unless you have a reason
for using these offset values, do not use them. These values
do not affect the latitude/longitude coordinates for the map,
only the internal coordinates used to plot the map on the
screen. If you use False Easting and False Northing offsets
for a map, any subsequent boundaries you append to the
map must also use these same offsets if you want the
imported boundaries to be drawn in the correct relative
position to the existing boundaries.
False Northing Specifies the false northing, or vertical offset, of the
projected coordinates, in meters. See above.
The Central Longitude value typically should be defined as
the longitudinal center of the map you are going to produce.
Standard Parallel Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees.
The Standard Parallel value typically should be defined as
the latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce.
393
Didger
Bonne Projection
The Bonne projection is a pseudo-
conical, equal area projection. The
scale is constant along any given
parallel, and accurate along the
specified standard parallels. The
Bonne projection is distortion-free
along the central longitude and the
parallels. This projection is used for
continental and topographic
mapping.
North America Map
Bonne Projection Central Longitude: -100
Projection Parameters Standard Parallel: 40
394
Cassini Projection
The Cassini projection is a cylindrical projection.
The scale is accurate along the central longitude
and along latitude lines perpendicular to the
central longitude. This projection is useful for
high-aspect regions (regions taller than they are
wide).
Map of North America

Cassini Projection
Central Longitude = -100 Central
Projection Parameters Latitude = 40
395
Didger
Central Latitude Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees.
The Central Latitude value typically should be defined as the
latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce.
Eckert IV Projection
The scale is constant along any given parallel
and accurate along the parallels 40°30' north
and south in the Eckert IV projection. This is
a pseudo-cylindrical, equal area projection
with the central longitude half the length of
the equator. The poles are represented by
lines half the distance of the equator as well.
The meridians are semi-ellipses. Eckert IV is
designed to produce aesthetically pleasing
world maps.
World Map Eckert IV Projection
Central Longitude: 0
396
Eckert VI Projection
The scale is constant along any given
parallel, and accurate along the
parallels 49°16' north and south in
the Eckert VI projection. This is a
pseudo-cylindrical, equal area
projection with the central longitude
half the length of the equator. The
poles are represented by lines half the
distance of the equator as well. The
meridians are sinusoidal. The Eckert
VI projection is useful for world maps. World Map Eckert VI Projection
397
Didger
Equidistant Conic Projection

There is no distortion in scale, shape, or
area along the standard parallels in an
Equidistant Conic projection. Scale is true
along all longitudes and along the
standard parallels. Direction is locally true
along the standard parallels. This
projection is useful for maps of low-
aspect regions (regions that are wider
than they are tall).
World Map Equidistant Conic Projection
Central Longitude: 0 Central Latitude: 0
Projection Parameters Standard Parallel: 45 2nd Standard Parallel: 0
398
For example, the value -95.5 represents the geographic
center of the United States, so the map of the U.S. is drawn
upright.
The Central Latitude value should be defined as the
latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce. This
value is only significant when you define False Easting and
False Northing values.
degrees. The standard parallels typically are defined at
determining the best position of the standard parallels.
Please see Snyder for more information.
2nd Standard Parallel Specifies the latitude of the second of two standard parallels,
in degrees. See above.
399
Didger
Equidistant Cylindrical Projection

The coordinates are equidistant with respect to
the center of the Equidistant Cylindrical
projection. Distortion is minimal at the
specified standard parallel and increases
dramatically with distance north or south from
this parallel. Typically, this projection is used
with maps covering small areas.
World Map Equidistant Cylindrical Projection
Projection Parameters Central Longitude: 0 Standard Parallel: 0
This value is only significant when you define False Easting
and False Northing values, and has no apparent effect on the
map.
400
Geographic Coordinate System

This is a simplistic cylindrical
projection. If the coordinates in a
Surfer map layer are stored in a
geographic coordinate system (also
known as Unprojected Lat/Long or
latitude/longitude), the map is
displayed on the screen by simply
treating the longitudes as horizontal
offsets and the latitudes as vertical
offsets.
World Map
When plotting latitude/longitude Unprojected Lat/Long
coordinates, Surfer constructs the
map coordinate system by first determining the latitude for the center of the map.
Then the appropriate scale is determined for the east-west (longitude) relative to the
north-south (latitude) dimension of the map. See latitude/longitude and Using Scaling
to Minimize Distortion on Latitude/Longitude Maps for more information on relative
scaling of latitude versus longitude.
The features of a geographic coordinate system (Unprojected Lat/Long) map are:

• Meridians (lines of constant longitude) are equally spaced and are drawn
perpendicular to the parallels.
• Parallels (lines of constant latitude) are equally spaced over the entire map
and are drawn perpendicular to the meridians. The further your map area is
from the equator, the further apart the parallels are spaced.
• The spacing between meridians is different than the spacing between parallels
except when the equator is at the north-south center of the map.
• At the center of the map, the scale is accurate in both the north-south and
east-west direction.
• Scale is accurate in the north-south direction over the extent of the map.
• East-west scale increases towards the poles, and decreases towards the
equator.
There are no parameters for this projection.
401
Didger
Gnomonic Projection
The Gnomonic projection is an azimuthal
projection. It is represented as a plane tangent
to the globe. At this point of tangency, which is
called the standard parallel, all major
characteristics are retained. When you move
away from the standard parallel in any direction
the map is not conformal, not equal-area, and
distances are not true to scale. Only areas of
less than a hemisphere can be shown and
distortion increases noticeably as you move
further from the standard parallel.
Antarctica Gnomonic Projection

False Easting: 0 False Northing: 0
Central Longitude: 19.0 Standard Parallel: 2.4
402
This value is only significant when you define False Easting
and False Northing values, and has no apparent effect on the
map.
Hotine Oblique Mercator Projection

The Hotine Oblique Mercator projection
is a cylindrical, conformal projection.
The scale is accurate along the chosen
central line by the longitude/latitude
settings below. This projection is useful
for oblique areas (areas that do not
follow lines of latitude and longitude),
such as the Alaska panhandle because
the central line does not have to follow
a line of constant longitude. This
projection is typically used with areas
that are state or province sized and it is
not suitable for maps of the
world. There are two forms of Alaska Panhandle Hotine Oblique Mercator Projection
Scale = 1
the Hotine projection equation.
False Easting = 818676.73440112
The Hotine Oblique Mercator False Northing = 575097.68887519
projection is defined by a point Central Scale Factor = .9999
and an azimuth that defines a Azimuth (Alpha) = -36.8698976
line (Alternate B, Snyder). Central Latitude = 57
403
Didger
for using these offset values, do not use them. These
values do not affect the latitude/longitude coordinates for
the map, only the internal coordinates used to plot the map
on the screen. If you use False Easting and False Northing
offsets for a map, any subsequent boundaries you append
to the map must also use these same offsets if you want
the imported boundaries to be drawn in the correct relative
Central Scale Factor Specifies the central scaling factor for the projection. This
(KO) value is often set to 1.0, but may be set to another value
for specific applications.
Azimuth (Alpha) The angle in degrees in which to rotate the central line.
Zero is north, and rotation is clockwise. This value cannot
equal zero or a multiple of 90 degrees.
The Central Latitude value typically should be defined as
the latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce,
and should typically be defined as the center of the map.
1st Meridian Defines one end of the X extent for the central line.
Rotate U/V to X/Y u,v are unrectified coordinates that follow the central line of
the projection. x,y are rectified rectangular coordinates.
When True, u,v are rotated to x,y. See Snyder page 70.
Offset by U When True, u coordinates are offset to remove the Us
center component, to normalize the origin of the u axis.
This is typically required for State Plane coordinate
systems that use the Hotine Oblique Mercator projection
method.
404
Hotine Oblique Mercator 2-Point Projection

The Hotine Oblique Mercator 2-Point
projection is a cylindrical, conformal
projection. The scale is accurate along the
chosen central line by the longitude/latitude
settings below. This projection is useful for
oblique areas (areas that do not follow lines
of latitude and longitude), such as the
Alaska panhandle because the central line
does not have to follow a line of constant
longitude. This projection is typically used
with areas that are state or province sized
and it is not suitable for maps of the world.
There are two forms of the Hotine projection
equation. The Hotine Oblique Mercator 2-
Point projection is defined by selecting two
points to form a line (Alternate A, Snyder).
Aleutian Islands, Alaska
Hotine Oblique Mercator Projection
Scale = 1 False Easting = 0 False Northing = 0
Central Scale Factor = 1 Central Latitude = 0
Standard Parallel = 56 2nd Standard Parallel = 58
1st Meridian = -133 2nd Meridian = -135
Rotate U/V to X/Y = True
Offset by U = True
405
Didger
for using these offset values, do not use them. These
Central Scale Factor Specifies the central scaling factor for the projection. This
(KO) value is often set to 1.0, but may be set to another value
for specific applications.
The Central Latitude value typically should be defined as
the latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce,
and should typically be defined as the center of the map.
Standard Parallel Defines one end of the Y extent for the central line.
2nd Standard Parallel Defines the other end of the Y extent for the central line.
2nd Meridian Defines the other end of the X extent for the central line.
Rotate U/V to X/Y u,v are unrectified coordinates that follow the central line of
the projection. x,y are rectified rectangular coordinates.
When True, u,v are rotated to x,y. See Snyder page 70.
Offset by U When True, u coordinates are offset to remove the Us
center component, to normalize the origin of the u axis.
This is typically required for State Plane coordinate
systems that use the Hotine Oblique Mercator projection
method.
406
Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area

Projection
Scale on a Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area
projected map is accurate only from the center
to any other point on the map. Distortion is
minimal near the center and increases with
distance from the center. This projection is
useful for continents, polar regions
(hemispheres), or smaller regions. The
Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area projection is not
generally used for world maps due to extreme
distortion outside the center of the map. World Map

Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Projection
Projection Parameters Central Longitude: -90
Standard Parallel: 45
407
Didger
Lambert Conformal Conic Projection

In a Lambert Conformal Conic
projection, scale is constant along any
given parallel and accurate along the
specified standard parallels. Scale is the
same in all directions at any given
point. This projection is useful for equal
area maps of low-aspect regions
(regions that are wider than they are
tall). The pole is a point in the
hemisphere containing the standard
parallels and the graticules stretch to
infinity in the other hemisphere. The
Lambert Conformal Conic projection World Map
is used for many of the zones in the Lambert Conformal Conic Projection
State Plane Coordinate System. Central Longitude: 0 Central Latitude: 0
Standard Parallel: 45 2nd Standard Parallel: 0
408
For example, the value -95.5 represents the geographic
center of the United States, so the map of the U.S. is drawn
upright.
The Central Latitude value should be defined as the
latitudinal center of the map you are going to produce. This
value is only significant when you define False Easting and
False Northing values.
degrees. The Standard Parallels typically are defined at
determining the best position of the standard parallels.
Please see Snyder for more information.
2nd Standard Parallel Specifies the latitude of the second of two standard parallels,
in degrees. See above.
409
Didger
Mercator Projection
The Mercator projection is a cylindrical
projection and it is conformal. In a
Mercator projection, scale is constant along
any given parallel and accurate along the
specified center latitude. Scale is the same
in all directions near any given point.
Distortion is minimal near the center
parallel, but becomes extreme toward the
poles. All lines of constant direction (rhumb
lines) are known to be straight, thereby
making this projection very desirable for
producing navigational charts. A limitation
of this projection is that coordinates at or
near the poles cannot be projected due to
constraints of the mathematical formulas
World Map Mercator Projection
used. Central Longitude: 0 Central Latitude: 0
410
Miller Cylindrical Projection

Scale is constant along any given
parallel and accurate along the
equator in a Miller Cylindrical
projection. Scale is the same in
all directions near any given
point. Miller Cylindrical
projection maps use variable
latitudinal scale as a way to
minimize distortion as you move
north or south from the equator.
The method effectively corrects
for the relative distances covered
by one degree of longitude
relative to one degree of latitude
as you move away from the
equator. Distortion is minimal
near the equator, but becomes
World Map Miller Cylindrical Projection
extreme toward the poles. Miller
Cylindrical maps do not represent
relative land areas accurately, but do
approximate the relative shapes of
individual land areas. Miller Cylindrical projection maps are useful for displaying the
entire world.
411
Didger
This value should be defined as the longitudinal center of the
map you are going to produce. This value is only significant
when you define False Easting and False Northing values and
it has no apparent effect on the map.
Mollweide Projection
The Mollweide projection is a pseudo-
cylindrical, equal area projection.
Scale is constant along any given
parallel, and true along 40°44' north
and south. The central longitude is
half the length of the equator. This
projection was designed to produce
aesthetically pleasing world maps.
World Map
Mollweide Projection
412
413
Didger
New Zealand Map Grid

The New Zealand Map Grid projection is a modified cylindrical
projection and is conformal. It is a sixth-order conformal
modification of the Mercator projection using the International
spheroid. Scale is constant along any given parallel and is
highly accurate for New Zealand. Scale is the same in all
directions near any given point. Distortion is minimal near 173°
East, 41° South, and becomes more distorted the further from
this location. This projection should only be used for large-scale
maps of New Zealand and is not useful outside of New Zealand.
New Zealand Map Grid Projection

False Easting: 2510000
Projection Parameters False Northing: 6023150
Scale = 1
for using these offset values, do not change them. These
414
Oblique Mercator Projection

The Oblique Mercator projection is a
cylindrical, conformal projection. The scale is
accurate along the chosen central line by the
longitude and latitude settings below (1st Point
and 2nd Point). This projection is used for
oblique areas which are areas that do not
follow lines of latitude and longitude, such as
the Alaska panhandle. This projection is
usually used with areas that are state or
province sized. This projection is not suitable
for maps of the world.
State of Alaska Oblique Mercator Projection

Scale = 1
Central Scale Factor (KO) = 1
1st Meridian = -132.27
Projection Parameters Standard Parallel = 55.95
Scale Specifies the unit scale of the projected map, relative to meters. For
example, a scale of one means one unit in the projected map equals
one meter; a scale of two means two units in the projected map
equal one meter; etc.
False Easting Specifies the false easting, or horizontal offset, of the projected
coordinates, in meters. False Eastings and False Northings are added
to the underlying "projected" coordinates as a way to arbitrarily
offset their internal XY coordinates after the projection. Unless you
have a reason for using these offset values, do not use them. These
values do not affect the latitude/longitude coordinates for the map,
only the internal coordinates used to plot the map on the screen. If
you use False Easting and False Northing offsets for a map, any
subsequent boundaries you append to the map must also use these
same offsets if you want the imported boundaries to be drawn in the
correct relative position to the existing boundaries.
False Specifies the false northing, or vertical offset, of the projected
Northing coordinates, in meters. See above.
Standard Defines one end of the Y extent for the central line.
Parallel
2nd Meridian Defines the other end of the X extent for the central line.
415
Didger
2nd Standard Defines the other end of the Y extent for the central line.
Parallel
Central Scale Specifies the central scaling factor for the projection. This value is
Factor (KO) often set to 1.0, but may be set to another value for specific
applications.
Orthographic Projection
The Orthographic projection is an azimuthal
projection. In an Orthographic projection, scale is
accurate at the center and along any circle
circumscribed around the center. Distortion is nil at
the center, and increasingly extreme with
increasing distance from the center. This projection
is useful for "view of globe" or "view from space"
pictures of the Earth. A limitation of this projection
is that the hemisphere facing away from the center
of the projection is not visible. Objects near the
edge of the visible hemisphere may be clipped.
Projection Parameters World Map Orthographic Projection

Central Longitude: -90
Central Latitude: 45
416
Polyconic Projection
The Polyconic projection is useful for maps of
continental or smaller regions. Generally, this
projection is not used for world maps due to
extreme distortion at any significant distance from
the center of the projection. Only the central
meridian is distortion-free. Notice in the sample
map shown above that Africa is relatively
undistorted, but the rest of the world is barely
recognizable. Scale is true along the central
longitude and along each parallel.
World Map
Polyconic Projection
Central Latitude: 0
417
Didger

418
Robinson and Robinson-Sterling Projections

These projections
are pseudo-
cylindrical. Scale and
area are always
distorted by the
Robinson and
Robinson-Sterling
projections. These
projections are
designed to produce
aesthetically
pleasing world
maps.
The Robinson and World Map Robinson-Sterling Projection

Robinson-Sterling Central Longitude:0
projections produce
visually similar results, but use two entirely different mathematical processes. As a
result, the numeric values of the projected coordinates produced by these two
methods are slightly different. For most applications, these differences are not
significant.
419
Didger
This option is only available for the Robinson-Sterling
projection.
Sinusoidal Projection
The Sinusoidal projection is a
pseudo-cylindrical, equal area
projection. Scale is accurate
along any given parallel and
along the specified central
longitude. This projection is
useful for continental or world
maps, particularly for high-aspect
regions (regions taller than they
are wide). To get good results
with the Sinusoidal projection,
the map must have coordinates
World Map
between +/-180 degrees longitude
Sinusoidal Projection
and +/- 90 degrees latitude. Central Longitude: 0
420
State Plane Coordinate System Projections

The State Plane Coordinate System
(SPCS) divides the United States into a
number of zones, and defines a different
projection for each zone such that a
suitable map of any given zone is
plotted. SPCS is used mainly for
intrastate views such as county or parish
maps.
Unlike most forms of projection where

the datum may be specified separately,
the SPCS is tied to a specific datum.
There are two State Plane Coordinate
Systems commonly used. The State Plane State of Oregon
State Plane Coordinate System of 1983
Projection for Oregon North Zone
421
Didger
Coordinate System of 1927 uses the North American Datum 1927 (NAD27), while the
State Plane Coordinate System of 1983 uses the North American Datum 1983
(NAD83).
Zone Specifies which one of the predefined zone projections to
use for this coordinate system.
Feet or Meters Most SPCS have both a meters and feet option available in
the predefined list.
Stereographic Projection
The Stereographic projection is
an azimuthal, conformal
projection. In a Stereographic
projection, scale is constant
along any circle circumscribed
around the center of the
projection. Distortion is minimal
at the center and becomes
extreme with distance from the
center. Generally, this
projection is not used for
regions larger than a continent
or a hemisphere due to
distortion effects. The
Stereographic projection is
often used for maps of the
poles.
North America
(Other continents included to show distortion of
objects far away from projection center)
Stereographic Projection
Central Longitude: -90 Central Latitude: 45
422
applications.
Central Specifies the central longitude of the projection in degrees. The
Longitude Central Longitude value typically should be defined as the
longitudinal center of the map you are going to produce.
Central Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees. The
Latitude Central Latitude value typically should be defined as the latitudinal
center of the map you are going to produce.
423
Didger
Transverse Mercator Projection

The Transverse Mercator projection is also known
as the Gauss-Kruger projection or the Gauss
Conformal projection. This projection is cylindrical
and conformal. In this projection, scale is constant
along any straight line that is parallel to the
specified central meridian. Scale increases with
distance from the central meridian. Distortion is
minimal near the center of the projection and
increases dramatically with distance from the
center. Distortion is considerable when projecting
coordinates that fall within a few degrees of the State of Oregon
poles. This projection is useful primarily for Transverse Mercator Projection
mapping small regions no more than a few Central Latitude: 41.75
degrees across, particularly high-aspect regions Central Longitude: -120.5
(regions taller than they are wide). A limitation of
this projection is that coordinates at or near the
poles cannot be projected. An additional limitation is that regions larger than a
quadrant (e.g. having greater than 90 degrees extent either vertically or horizontally)
result in portions of the projected image folding over each other due to constraints of
the mathematical formulas used. The projection is best used with areas that are no
greater than 30 degrees wide or tall, and preferably with areas that are much smaller.
424
applications.
longitudinal center of the map you are going to produce.
Central Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees. The
Latitude Central Latitude value typically should be defined as the latitudinal
center of the map you are going to produce.
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) Projections

The Universal Transverse Mercator system, commonly
known as UTM, divides the Earth into sixty discrete
zones, each representing a vertical slice of the globe
spanning six degrees of longitude. A Transverse
Mercator projection is applied to each zone with the
central meridian of the projection at the center of the
given zone and the central latitude of the projection at
the equator. This coordinate system is the basis for
many standardized regional maps, such as tract or
neighborhood maps by the US Census Bureau
and topographic quadrangles by the US State of Oregon Universal Transverse
Geological Survey. UTM is not generally used Mercator Projection
for coordinates outside the range of -80 to Central Latitude: 41.75
Central Longitude: -120.5
+84 degrees latitude due to the distortion
inherent in Transverse Mercator projections
near the poles.
Scale Specifies the unit scale of the projected map, relative to meters.
For example, a scale of one means one unit in the projected map
equals one meter; a scale of two means two units in the projected
map equal one meter; etc.
425
Didger
applications.
longitudinal center of the map you are going to produce. For
example, the value -95.5 represents the geographic center of the
United States, so the map of the U.S. is drawn upright.
Central Latitude Specifies the central latitude of the projection in degrees. The
Central Latitude value should be defined as the latitudinal center
of the map you are going to produce.
Projection in Choose True if your map is in the southern hemisphere. Choose
Southern False if your map is in the northern hemisphere.
Hemisphere
Van der Grinten Projection

This projection is typically used for maps of the world and
the scale is accurate along the equator. This projection was
used by the National Geographic for world maps. The
central longitude and the equator are straight lines and the
poles are greatly distorted.
To get good results with the Van der Grinten projection, the
map must have coordinates between +/-180 degrees World Map
longitude and +/- 90 degrees latitude. Surfer does Van der Grinten Projection
not wrap around +/-180 degrees longitude. The Central Longitude: 0
example map is using world-proj.gsb as the base
map. If you are using world-scale maps, the central
longitude generally cannot be set far from 0 degrees since there is no wrap around in
Surfer.
426
Golden Software Reference Files

If you have looked in a folder that contains a boundary file exported from Didger, you
may have noticed files with a .GSR2 extension in the folder. These Golden Software
Reference files are created when you export a projected boundary from Didger in any
of the vector or image formats that do not carry projection information in it. For
example, if you export a projected boundary as an Atlas Boundary file, and check the
GS Reference (Version 1) file or GS Reference (Versions 2) file check boxes in the
Spatial References export options page, FILENAME.BNA is created and
FILENAME.BNA.GSR or FILENAME.BNA.GSR2 are also created. You can also choose to
create a Golden Software Reference file when you export a georeferenced file.
Golden Software Reference files contain the projection settings used to project the
boundary in Didger. Projection, datum, and georeference information are stored in
the .GSR2 file. When you import a boundary that has an associated .GSR2 file into
427
Didger
Didger, the projection information is used when displaying the map even though the
file format does not support projections. If the Golden Software Reference file is
deleted, the boundary can be imported but you must supply the projection information
during import.
Latitude/Longitude Coordinates
Latitude and longitude are spherical coordinates used to locate a point on the earth.
Many maps do not need to take the curvature of the earth into account. For maps
covering relatively small land areas, such as a state or small group of states, the earth
can be assumed to be flat. In these cases, the latitude/longitude coordinates can be
plotted on a simple grid system. Maps plotted in this way can use different scaling in
the two dimensions to minimize distortion on the map. For more information on
scaling Unprojected Lat/Long maps, see Using Scaling to Minimize Distortion in
Latitude/Longitude Projects.
Graticule lines reflect the project’s coordinate system.
For larger areas, the curvature of the earth should be taken into account. For these
purposes, the map can be plotted using a projection.
Didger only plots latitude/longitude coordinates in decimal degrees. You can see
Latitude/Longitude Coordinates in Decimal Degrees for information on converting
degrees-minutes-seconds to decimal degrees.
Latitude
Latitude is the Y coordinate and defines north-south global position measured from the
equator. Lines of constant latitude are called parallels because they define a series of
rings parallel to the equator. Parallels run east-west, but define north-south position
428
on the globe. Parallels are designated in degrees from 0° at the equator to 90° at the
poles. Didger uses the convention that parallels are positive north of the equator
(north latitudes), and negative south of the equator (south latitudes). Designations
such as 45° indicate a position 45° north of the equator, while -65° indicates a position
65° south of the equator. At any position on the globe, the distance covered by a
degree of latitude remains nearly constant.
Longitude
Longitude is the X coordinate and indicates east-west position on the globe. Lines of
constant longitude are called meridians. Meridians lie at right angles to the parallels
and are half-circles drawn from the North Pole to the South Pole. One meridian is
designated as the prime meridian. The prime meridian most commonly in use in the
United States runs through Greenwich, England, although there are several other
prime meridians in use throughout the world. Longitude is measured 180° east and
180° west from the prime meridian. In Didger, longitude is positive east (east
longitude) of the prime meridian, and negative west of the prime meridian (west
longitude). A designation such as -105° is used to indicate a location 105° west of the
prime meridian. Meridians converge at the poles so the distance covered by one
degree of longitude decreases as you move north or south from the equator.
Latitude/Longitude in Decimal Degrees

Latitude/Longitude coordinates are often presented in degrees, minutes, and seconds,
such as 39°45’30" (39 degrees, 45 minutes, 30 seconds). However, Didger can only
plot values in decimal degrees. So, for example, 39°45’ is referred to as 39.75° in
Didger.
Converting from degrees, minutes, and seconds is actually quite easy. Consider the
latitude value 39°25’30". This value needs to be converted to use it in Didger. There
are 60 minutes in one degree and 3600 seconds in one degree. To convert minutes
and seconds to decimal degrees, divide minutes by 60, divide seconds by 3600, and
then add the results to obtain the decimal equivalent.
Conversion Equation:
Decimal Degrees = Degrees + (Minutes / 60) + (Seconds / 3600)
Example
Consider the latitude value 39°25'30". To convert 39°25’30" to decimal degrees:
429
Didger
1. First, convert minutes (25') and seconds (30") to their degree equivalents and add
the results.
25'/60 = 0.4167
30"/3600 = 0.0083
0.4167 + 0.0083 = 0.425
2. Then, add this number to the number of degrees.
39 + 0.425 = 39.425
3. The final result is the decimal degree value.
39°25'30" = 39.425°
Using Scaling to Minimize Distortion in Latitude/Longitude Projects

As an approximation, the distance covered by one degree of latitude at the equator is
equal to the distance covered by one degree of latitude at the poles, and is
approximately 69 miles. This distance between degrees of latitude remains nearly
constant over the globe, although it does vary slightly because the earth is not a
perfect sphere. However, the distance between a degree of longitude decreases from
the equator to the poles. For any latitudinal position, you can determine the length, in
miles, between degrees of longitude based on the formula
Distance covered by 1° of longitude (in miles) = cosine (latitude) x 69.172.
This equation assumes a 1866 Clarke reference ellipsoid.
This table illustrates the change as you move from the equator to the poles.
Latitude Distance Covered by

One Degree of
Longitude
0° (equator) 69.172 miles
30° 59.904 miles
60° 34.586 miles
90° (poles) 0 miles
430
Substitutions for units other than miles:

• For kilometers, you can substitute the number 111.321 for 69.172 in the
formula above.
• For meters, you can substitute the number 111,321 for 69.172 in the formula
above.
• For feet, you can substitute the number 365,228 for 69.172 in the formula
above.
So, how can you put this information to use? Remember that you are plotting degrees
of unprojected latitude and longitude, but what you really want to show on the map
are the correct distances. You must scale the longitude values correctly for the correct
distances to be represented on the map. The scaling factor to apply for maps is based
on the cosine of the latitude for the area you are working on.
To determine the scaling factors:

1. Find the latitude for the parallel through the center of the map, and determine the
cosine corresponding to this latitude value. The easiest way to determine the
latitude is to move the pointer to the center of the map, and read the latitude
value from Coordinates section of the status bar.
2. Choose the Map | Project Limits command and set the X Axis Scaling you want to
use on the map. You can set either the Length value or the Map Units value.
3. Uncheck the Set Proportional XY Scaling check box.
4. Multiply the X Axis Scaling - Map Units value by the cosine of the latitude
determined in step 1, and enter this number into the Y Axis Scaling - Map Units
field.
5. Click OK and the map is drawn with the scaling you want to use.
Consider a map of the state of Montana. When you plot the map on a one to one
scale, the map appears stretched in the east-west direction. To understand this
problem, consider that for Montana the latitude ranges from 44.36° to 49°. The
latitude for the center of the map is determined from this to be 46.68°. The cosine of
46.68° is 0.686. The distance covered by one degree of longitude at this latitude is
only 0.686 times the distance covered by one degree of latitude. To reduce the
distortion on this map, you can correct for this difference.
Let’s say you are plotting the map at an X scale of 1" = 2 map units (longitude). For
the map to be scaled appropriately, you would plot the Y scale at 1" = 1.372 map
units (latitude, 2 x 0.686 = 1.372). This effectively stretches the map in the latitude
(N-S) direction. Now the map distances are nearly the same in the longitude and
latitude directions.
431
Didger
For more information on converting units, refer to Dent, Appendix A.
World Reference File

World files contain the affine relationship between source image coordinates (pixel
locations) and real-world reference coordinates (lat/long or other real-world coordinate
units). World files contain a computed relationship between source image coordinates
and reference coordinates and not the complete reference point information.
Reference points cannot be reloaded from a world file because they do not exist in the
file. When a world file is loaded into the reference point list the 4 corners of the source
image are recalculated using the world file parameters and are displayed as reference
points.
GeoTIFF File (*.tif, *.tiff)

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF or TIF) is one of the most common geospatial image
formats. Many images from a variety of GIS systems are stored in this format. A
GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information identifying its position
and scale in world coordinates. It uses an ASCII header that contains all of the
referencing information. These headers are automatically loaded into Didger when the
source image is opened. Didger immediately recognizes that the image is
georeferenced. Unlike other world files, GeoTIFFs do not require a separate reference
file.
Blue Marble Reference File (*.rsf)

The Blue Marble Reference Settings File saves the complete reference point list
information so that it can be loaded again in the future. Within a Blue Marble
Reference File, the first line contains the version of the file format (not to be confused
with the version of the software) and the total number of points in the file. The
remaining lines contain the point ID, the x (row) pixel, the y (column) pixel, the z
(elevation) value which is usually 0.00 followed by the ground coordinates expressed
as Latitude or Northing (Y), Longitude or Easting (X) and Elevation (Z). The last value
indicates whether the point described on that line is included in the solution, 0 = not
included and 1 = included. It is recommended that a Blue Marble Reference file also be
saved when saving a world file so that the raw reference point information can be
recalled at a later date. Coordinate system information may be stored in an rsf file.
432
ESRI World File (*.tfw)

ESRI World files are text-based files containing spatial reference information. Various
Environmental Sciences Research Institute (ESRI) programs and other programs
import the information in this file. The first and third characters of the image file
extension, plus a final "w," are used as the world file extension. For example,
IMAGE.TIF would have an associated world file called IMAGE.TFW.
ESRI Projection File (.prj)

ESRI .prj files are text files associated with an ArcInfo coverage, GRID, or TIN. The
PRJ file contains the coordinate system information for the data. In a more general
sense, PRJ can refer to the coordinate system of data even if the information is not
stored in a PRJ file. For example, the PRJ of a shapefile could be WGS 1984 UTM zone
15 north.
Golden Software Reference File (.gsr2)

Golden Software Reference files contain the projection settings used to project the
boundary in Didger. Projection, datum, and georeference information are stored in
the .GSR2 file. When you import a boundary that has an associated .GSR2 file into
Didger, the projection information is used when displaying the map even though the
file format does not support projections. If the Golden Software Reference file is
deleted, the boundary can be imported but you must supply the projection information
during import.
Projection References
Dent, Borden D., Cartography, Thematic Map Design, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,
Dubuque, 1990.
Greenhood, David, Mapping, The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1964, pp. 113-
171.
Robinson, A.H., et al., Elements of Cartography, Fifth Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1984, pp. 75-105.
Snyder, John P., Map Projections - A Working Manual, U.S. Geological Survey
Professional Paper 1395, Washington D.C., Department of the Interior, 1987.
Coordinate Systems Overview,
http://www.colorado.edu/geography/gcraft/notes/coordsys/coordsys_f.html,
July 2, 2001.
Map Projection Overview,
http://www.colorado.edu/geography/gcraft/notes/mapproj/mapproj_f.html,
July 2, 2001.
433
Didger
Map Projections Home Page, http://everest.hunter.cuny.edu/mp/index.html, July 2,

2001.
Datums, Ellipsoids, Grids, and Grid Reference Systems, Defense Mapping Agency
Technical Manual 8358.1, http://earth-
info.nga.mil/GandG/publications/tm8358.1/pdf/8358_1c.pdf, July 2, 2001.
Mapping the Projection to the Need,
http://www3.deasy.psu.edu/projection/index.html, July 2, 2001.
Coordinate System Frequently Asked Questions

Q: Do I need to specify a coordinate system for every imported file in Didger?
A: You do not need to specify a coordinate system for imported files in Didger if you
are not going to be converting between different coordinate system or displaying maps
from different coordinate systems. If all your maps are in the same system, you do
not need to specify the coordinate system.
Q: Why would I want to set the coordinate system?

A: If your files are in different coordinate systems, you will want to set the coordinate
system for each imported file. You can then change the projection of the entire project
with the Map | Change Projection command.
Q: How do I set the coordinate system for a data file?

A: When importing a data file, the Assign Coordinate System dialog appears, if an
external georeferenced file is not found.
Q: When I import a map from another program, does it import the projection
information?
A: If the map contained a reference file, Didger will automatically read the reference
file and apply any information it finds to the map layer.
Q: When I change the target coordinate system, my map limits change.

Didger retains the map size, but the limits change when the target coordinate system
changes.
Q: I need additional information about coordinate systems. Do you have any

references that can help?
434
A: A good starting place is the references on the Projection References page. Many
other good resources are available either online or in printed documentation.
435
Didger
Index
align center...317
align left...317
# align middle...317
align right...317
1st order polynomial...90, 92, 251 align top...317
2nd order polynomial...90, 93, 251 allowable RMS error...87, 89, 90
3 minute tour...10 alter projection...56
3rd order polynomial...90, 93, 251 And/Or...311
5 median...223 angle symbol...318
8 median...223 appearance...323
apply datum conversion...295, 370
area...133, 143, 160, 253, 301, 345,
A 381
area to download...182
acceptable error...83, 87 arrange...77, 314, 315, 316
acceptable error on the ground...87 arrange toolbar...15
acceptable RMS error...87, 89, 90 assign attributes...303
accuracy...83 assign coordinate system...390
activate tablet...82, 244 assign coordinate system dialog...372
active layer...22, 77 assign data attributes...303
add...285 assign elevations...62, 305
add data source...188 assign labels...49
add labels...49, 156 assign projection...53
add layer...22, 77 assigning and changing projection...53
add new mapping server...188 assigning elevations...60, 62, 305
add point...37, 247 assigning labels...49
add server...188 assigning the projection...53, 55
add web mapping server...188 auto increment...45
add WMS...188 auto increment IDs...136, 145
adjust brightness...221 auto snap nodes...253, 348
adjust contrast...220 auto-increment...45
adjust coordinates...285 automatic digitizing...196
adjust limits...291 automatic image extents...201
adjust saturation...222 automatically create vector lines...61,
adjust scale...291 196
adjust values...285 automatically digitize contours from an
Aerial photo...42 image...60
affine polynomial...90, 91, 251 available fields...156
albers...391 available projections...378
albers conic...391 average rate...163
albers equal area...391 axis maximum...291
align...317 axis minimum...291
align bottom...317 axis scale...291
axis scaling...245
436
Index
azimuthal...381, 392 calibrating an image...42

azimuthal equidistant...392 calibrating large documents...261
azimuthal projection...392 calibration...80, 83, 201, 244, 245,
247, 251, 253, 255, 261
calibration button...201
B calibration marker...82, 201, 257
calibration point...201
background color...18, 322 calibration point ID...201, 247
base information...11, 75 calibration points...35, 36, 42, 43, 83,
base map...277, 337 201, 244, 245, 247
beep on object completion...263, 350 calibration report...201
beep on vertex creation...263, 350 calibration settings...40, 245, 253
bilinear...91 calibration symbol...201
bilinear interpolation...201 calibration units...36
bilinear transformation...92 cancel digitizing...117, 119, 122
BLN...334 cartesian...29
block select...309, 310 Cartesian coordinates...36, 295, 370,
Blue Marble RSF file...334, 432 372
BMP...334 cascaded...195
BNA...334 cassini...395
bonne...394 cassini projection...395
bonne projection...394 category...295, 370
bore hole logs...242 cell...25
boundaries...176 center...317
boundary tools...15 centimeters...345
boundary tools toolbar...15 CGM...334
bounding box...310, 317 change calibration...201
break polyline...168 change calibration marker...201
break polylines at intersections...170 change calibration point...201, 247
brightness...221 change calibration symbol...201
brightness threshold...227 change color...237
Bursa-Wolfe...385 change color format...236
button settings...253, 263, 350 change coordinates...285
change object properties...309
change output limits...210
change plot color...18, 322
C change projection...53, 56, 295, 370
change units...17
calculated display units...253, 345 change values...285
calculating allowable or acceptable changing the layout...18, 323
RMS error...87 changing the managers...18, 323
calibrate...201, 245, 260 changing the menu bar...18, 323
calibrate image...201 changing the plot window...18, 323
calibrate tablet...36, 245 changing the projection...53, 56
calibrating a digitizing tablet...36 changing the toolbars...18, 323
calibrating a tablet...35 characteristics of projections...381
437
Didger
check for update...345 correct distances...430

circle...125, 134, 139 cosine...430
circle options...345 create calibration points...37, 201,
Clarke reference ellipsoid...430 245, 247
clip image...229, 231 create colors...158
clip map objects during export...291 create intersection points...179
clipping images...229 create labels...49, 156
CLP...334 create layers...22, 77
collar...230 create line intersections...170
color...158 create new project...57
color palette...158 create point...45
color reduction...223 create polygons by IDs...173
colors...158 create polygons by locator...133, 172
combine islands/lakes...180 create several...45, 48, 134, 135, 136,
command...323 145
common identifier...78 create Surfer base map...277, 337
complex polygon...133, 180, 229 create symbol...45
complex polygons...180 create template (text)...106
computed X and Y...251 creating polygons with shared
conditional selection...64 sides...72
confidence...83 criteria select...64, 309, 311
conformal...381, 408 crop...232
connect polylines...168 crop image...229, 232
contact information...31 crop polyline...169
contour...278, 305 CTRL+A...309
contours...50 current map extents...182
contrast...220 current polygon...229
control points...181 cursor...310
convert coordinates...52, 285 curve...119
convert projection...56, 295, 370 custom...158
convert to black and white...227 custom colors...158
convert to grayscale...229 custom datum definition...386
convert to polygon...172, 173 custom line style...150
convert values...285 customize...359
converting to decimal degrees...429 customize commands...359
converting units...430 customize toolbars...361
convex hull...179 cut...307
convolve...196 cut polyline...168
coordinate conversion...52, 285
coordinate manager...13, 29, 52
coordinate space type...245, 295, 370 D
coordinate system...201, 372
coordinates...17, 233, 293, 428 DAT...334
copies...340 data attributes...143, 145, 160, 301,
copy...308, 316 311
copy layers...22, 77
438
Index
data attributes - object digitize polylines...50, 51, 119

properties...160, 301 digitize several objects with sequential
data field...78, 311 IDs...136
data files...11, 75 digitize symbol...122
data ID attributes...145 digitize text...101
data manager...13, 25, 309 digitized locations...85
datum...181, 385 digitizing...2, 242
datum conversion...385 digitizing a large document...261
datum transformation...295, 370 digitizing accuracy...83
datums...386 digitizing accuracy and acceptable
DCX...334 error - RMS values...83
decimal degrees...429 digitizing circles...125
decimal places...253, 345 digitizing errors...85
default settings...326 digitizing monitoring wells...46
defaults...345 digitizing objects tutorial...66
define coordinate space...295, 370 digitizing points...45, 48, 122
define the projection...55 digitizing polygons...51, 117
degrees...429 digitizing polylines...50, 51, 68, 119
degrees minutes seconds...429 digitizing recovery wells...48
delete...308 digitizing rectangles...123
delete duplicates...166 digitizing settings...263, 350
delete layers...22, 77 digitizing several objects with different
delete point...247 IDs...135
delete polyline by length...166 digitizing several objects with
deleting objects...309 sequential IDs...136
deselect all...311 digitizing tablets...12, 35, 80, 83, 241,
deviation distance...163 266
deviation value...163 digitizing text...101
Didger...31 Digitizing the Non-Shared
Didger help...29 Polylines...68
Didger project file...64 digitizing the shared polylines...70
difference of polygons...178 digitizing toolbar...15
different IDs...135 digitizing with a puck...242
digitize...2, 242 direction...381
digitize button...263, 350 display units...17, 29, 253, 295, 345,
digitize contours...50, 60 370
digitize documents larger than distance...381
tablet...261 divide...285
digitize menu...80, 82, 101, 119, 123, divide polygons...178
125, 133, 244, 245, 257 dlwonlad maps...182
digitize multiple points...48, 134, 135, docked...25, 26, 143
136 docked modes...25
digitize objects...101, 117, 119, 122, docking controls...323
123, 125 docking windows...323, 326
digitize points...45, 46, 48, 122 document larger than tablet...261
digitize polygons...51, 117 download...182
439
Didger
download data...182 editing toolbar...15

download images...57 ellipsoid...384
download maps...57, 182 EMF...334
download online map...58 enable tablet on/off button...263, 350
download online maps...182 enable/disable stream mode
download worldwide data...182 button...263, 350
downloading areas...66 ending value...145
downloading online maps...57, 58 enter data after creation...45, 48, 134,
draw menu...101 135, 145
draw polygon...117 enter object data...48
draw polyline...119 entering calibration points...247
draw symbol...122 entering reference information...42
draw text...101 entire data source extents...182
draw toolbar...15 equal area...381, 407
drawing...101, 126, 128 equidistant...381, 398, 400
drawing options...143 equidistant conic...398
drawing polygons...117 equidistant cylindrical...400
drawing polylines...119 error values...83
drawing properties...143 ESRI PRJ...432
drawing text...101 ESRI TFW...334, 432
duplicate...316 ESRI world file...334, 432
DXF...334 example of allowable error based on a
percentage value...90
example of allowable error based on
E map scale...89
expand view...319
earth...384 expected locations...85
easting...296 exponential spline...90, 96, 251
eckert...396, 397 export...64, 334
eckert IV...396 extents...319
eckert VI...397 extract...232
edge...196 extract image region...232
edge detection...212
edit...26, 143
edit menu...77, 307, 308, 310, 311, F
314, 315, 316
edit polygon...162 F1...29
edit polyline...149, 162, 166, 168, 170, F9...82, 244
171, 352 FAQ...29
edit reference information...42 favorite coordinate system...372
edit template (text)...106 features...3
edit text...102 feedback...32
editable layers...22, 77 file format chart...336
editing point properties...140 file list...327
editing polygons and polylines...51
440
Index
file menu...277, 301, 327, 334, 337, GIF...334

338, 340, 345 gnomonic...402
Files of type field...327 gnomonic projection...402
fill color...153, 354 Golden Software...31
fill palette...153 Golden Software reference files...334,
fill pattern...153, 354 427
fill properties...143, 153, 345, 354 GPS unit...12, 80, 241
filters...211 graphic...181
finish button...263, 350 graticule...296
first order polynomial...90, 92, 251 grayscale...229
fit to page...341 grid...296
fixedheight...195 grid data...278
fixedwidth...195 gridding method...278
flatting ratio...384 gridding methods...282
floated...25 gridding parameters...278
font...296 group polygons...180
format...78 GSB...334
forum...29 GSI...334
free rotate...318 GSR...334, 427
full extents...319
H
G
heads up digitizing...45, 50, 101, 126,
gaps...224 128
gauss conformal projection...424 help...29
gaussian...196, 212 help - technical support...31
gaussian filter...196, 212 help menu...32, 262
gaussian standard deviation...196, 212 hide image display...61
gauss-kruger projection...424 holes...224
GCS...401 hotine...403, 405
general...345 hotine oblique mercator...403
generate points...163 hotine projection...405
geode...182 hue...222
geographic coordinate system...401 hysteresis...196, 212
georeference...52, 201, 285
georeference coordinate
conversion...285 I
georeference method...251
georeferenced images...181 ID prefix...145
georeferencing information...181 ID suffix...145
georeferencing method...38, 98 identifier...78, 145
GeoTIFF...334, 432 identify edges...212
getting base information into IDs...145, 247
didger...11, 75
441
Didger
image...11, 75, 139, 181, 196, 217, initial file paths...345

218, 223 input data units...295, 370
image brightness...221 input fields...26, 143
image calibration...42, 43, 44, 201 intensity threshold...227
image clipping...229 interface...13
image collar...230 internet maps...182
image contrast...220 interpolation...126
image display...61 interpolation procedures...282
image download...57 intersect polygons...177
image erosion and dilation...224 intersection...179
image files...11, 75 introduction...1
image filtering...217 introduction to complex polygons...133
image location...195 introduction to digitizing...2, 242
image map...278 introduction to Layers...24, 76
image menu...182, 196, 211, 212, introduction to map projections...378
215, 217, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, inverse distance squared...90, 98, 251
229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 237 inverse distance to a power...282
image pre-processing...63 invert selection...309, 310
image processing...211 island...176, 180
image referencing...181 item properties...143
image registration and warping...42,
44, 201
image resolution to download...182 J
image saturation...222
image thinning...215 join polylines...168
image to vector...61, 196 join undershoot polylines...171
image toolbar...15 JPG...334
image vectorization...196
image visibility...211
image x...201
image y...201
K
imagery...58, 182
import...327 keep every nth point...163
import base layer...57 keyword...78
import file...35 keyword properties...78
import image...42 knowledge base...29
import SHP...57
importing files with different
projections...331 L
inches...345
increment settings...135, 145 label...101, 156
increment value...45, 145 label alignment on...156
incremental settings to primary label angle...296
ID...136, 145, 303 label field name...156
info for server...194 label font...296
initial calibration settings...36, 245 label frequency...296
442
Index
label layout...143, 156 log axes...83

label position along...156 logarithmic axes...295, 370
label properties...49, 156 longitude...293, 296, 401, 428
labels...49 Look in field...327
lake...176, 180
lambert...407, 408
lambert azimuthal...407 M
lambert conformal conic...408
lambert equal area...407 magnify...319
Laplacian...217 main toolbar...15
lat/long...401 major axis...384
latitude...293, 296, 401, 428 make report...301
latitude/longitude...429 managers...323
latitude/longitude coordinates...428 map collar...230
layer...160, 301 map commands...277
layer formatter...78 map larger than tablet...261
layer information...195 map menu...277
layer manager...13, 22, 77, 78 map projection dialog...295, 370
layer order...22, 77 map projection overview...378
layer title...195 map projection parameters...245
layer view...22, 77 map servers...182
layer visibility...22, 77 Marcov spline...90, 95, 251
layers...22, 24, 76, 77, 311 math operation...52, 285
layout visibility...18, 323 math text...102
left right tutorial...72 maximum...291
left right values...70 measured properties...311
length...143, 253, 291, 345 median filter...219
library...108 menu bar...13
lighting...221, 222 mercator...410, 415
limits...291, 319 mercator projection...410
line...119 merge polylines...168
line palette...149 meridian...296
line properties...119, 143, 149, 150, MIF...334
345, 352 miller...411
line segment image filters...217 miller cylindrical...411
line styles...150 minimum...291
linear axes...295, 370 minimum curvature...282
linear axis...36 minor axis...384
linear transformation...92 minutes...429
lines...50 modify coordinate system...372
load calibration points...201, 247, 258 modify coordinates...29
load coordinate system...295, 370 modify image colors...237
load datum...295, 370 mollweide...412
load projection...295, 370 mollweide projection...412
local distortions...95, 96 Molodensky...385
locating the calibration points...43
443
Didger
monitoring wells...45 object ID...145

mosaic...235 object properties...143, 160, 301
move backward...315 object type...26, 139, 143, 311
move calibration points...43 object types...139
move coordinates...29 objects...119, 123, 125, 139, 310
move forward...315 oblique mercator...415
move layers...22, 77 offset coordinates...285
move to another layer...77, 316 online map...58
move to back...314 online map servers...182
move to front...314 online maps...182
MRE...385 onscreen digitizing...45, 50, 101, 126,
multiple regression equations...385 128
multiply...285 opaque...195
open an existing project...53
open existing...53
N open file...60
open project...53
NADCON...385 opening and printing the tutorial
NAIP...58 map...35
NAIP data...182 orthogonality...91
name of image...195 orthographic...416
natural cubic spline...90, 95, 251 orthographic projection...416
nearest neighbor...201, 282 output map extents...210
new coordinate system...372 overshoot...171
new features...3 overview of calibrating a tablet...245
new layer...22, 77
new plot window...34
new point button...263, 350 P
new polygon button...263, 350
new polyline button...263, 350 page units...345
new project...57 pan...321
new zealand map grid...414 pan realtime...321
nodes...176, 348 paper documents...11, 35, 75
noise spikes...224 paper source document...12, 80, 241
normal distribution...85 parallels...296
northing...296 paste...308
nosubsets...195 pattern...153, 354
numeric display format...253, 345 PCT...334
nzmg...414 PCX...334
pdf...336
perimeter length...143
O pixel...233, 237
pixel color...237
object...26, 143, 310, 318 pixel values...237
object editing...143 PJT...64, 338
444
Index
plot color...18, 322 primary ID...145, 160, 301

plot window...25 prime meridian...385
PNG...334 print...340, 341
point...122, 134, 139, 145 print method...341
point error...251 print range...341
point ID...37, 42, 251 print tutorial map...35
point labels...156 processing filters...63, 211, 215
point properties...140 program overview...13
pointer...82, 244 project extents...291
points...45, 46, 122 project files...338
points as symbols...45 project limits...255, 291
points to polyline...167 project settings...263, 345, 348, 350
polyconic...417 projected coordinates...295, 370, 372
polyconic projection...417 projecting maps...370
polygon...117, 133, 134, 139, 145, projection...56, 295, 370, 378, 428
162, 167, 172, 173, 176, 177, 180 projection - tutorial...55
polygon area...143 projection characteristics...381
polygon direction...160, 301 projection dialog...295, 370
polygon labels...156 projection information...427
polygon length...143 projection overview...378
polygon marker...133 projection references...433
polygon to polyline...167 projection transformation...295, 370
polygons by IDs...173 projection type...391, 392, 394, 395,
polygons by locator...172 396, 397, 398, 400, 401, 402, 403,
polyline...119, 126, 134, 139, 145, 405, 407, 408, 410, 411, 412, 415,
162, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 416, 417, 419, 420, 421, 422, 424,
173 425, 426
polyline labels...156 projections...331
polyline length...143 properties...140, 145, 160, 301
polyline to points...167 properties for selected objects...26,
polyline to polygon...167 143
polyline to polygon with shared property access...26, 143
border...176 property inspector...26, 143
polylines...50, 51 property manager...13
polylines to polygons tutorial...72 property sections...26, 143
polynomial transformation...92 property type...26, 143
popularity...223 property's value...26, 143
popularity method...223 proportional XY scaling...291
position along line...156 puck...12, 80, 82, 241, 242, 244
position from line extent...156
position the layout...18, 323
precision...83 Q
predicted X and Y...251
prefix...145, 195 quantization...223
pre-processing images...211 queryable...195
Prewitt...217
445
Didger
quick tour...10 resample method...44, 201

quick tutorial...10 resample polyline...165
reset windows...326
reshape...29, 162
R resize dialog...201
resize image...233
radial basis function...282 resize the layout...18, 323
radial basis functions...94, 95, 96, 97 reverse direction...180
ragged edges...224 reverse selection...310
range...78 RMS...44, 83, 85, 87, 89, 90, 201, 260
range properties...78 RMS calibration settings...38, 245, 251
raster calibration...201 RMS error value...85, 251, 348
raster digitizing...201 robinson...419
rational quadratic spline...90, 97, 251 robinson projection...419
realtime...321 robinson sterling projection...419
rearrange layers...22, 77 robinson-sterling...419
recalibrate...52, 201 root mean square...83
recalibrating an existing didger project rotate...318
with a tablet...260 rotate dialog...318
recovery wells...45 rotation...80, 245
rectangle...123, 134, 139 rotation in paper document...245
rectangle zoom...320 RSF...334, 432
redo...307
redraw...322
reestablish the tablet calibration...260 S
reference x...201
reference X...42 sample...10
reference y...201 saturation...222
reference Y...42 save...64, 338
references...98, 432, 433 save as...338
register Didger...32 save calibration points...201, 247
register serial number...32 save coordinate system...295, 370
removal rate...163 save datum...295, 370
remove all clipping...231 save projection...295, 370
remove calibration point...247 scale...255, 291, 381
remove clipping...231 scaling...430
remove duplicate objects...166 scanner...12, 80, 241
remove linked polylines...166 second order polynomial...90, 93, 251
remove polyline by length...166 secondary ID...145, 160, 301
rename layers...22, 77 seconds...429
replicate layers...22, 77 select...309, 310, 318
replicate objects...316 select a calibration point...201
report...301 select all...309, 310
requirements...1 select aread to download...182
resample line...165 select button...263, 350
446
Index
select data source...182 source X and Y...251

select image resolution to spatial filters...217
download...182 spatial transformation methods
select objects on layer...22, 77 references...98
select overlapping objects...309 spatial transformations...90, 98
select specific objects...64 SPCS...390
selecting calibration points...244 specify Lat/Long limits...293
selecting objects...309 specify project limits and scale...41,
selection type...311 245, 255
serial number...32, 34 sphere...384
server information...194 spline...95, 126, 128
set attributes...303 spline polygon...128
set default projection...295 spline polyline...126
set project limits...291 spline smooth...163
set proportional XY scaling...291 split islands/lakes...180
set the projection...55 standard...158
setting object properties...345 standard deviation...85
setting the snap tolerance...67 standard toolbar...15
settings...345 starting Didger...34
shaded relief map...278 starting value...145
shape...381 state plane...390, 421
sharpen image...218 state plane coordinates...421
SHIFT+F1...29 status bar...13, 17
shift-difference image filters...217 step 1...245
show line nodes...348 step one...245
show snap tolerance circles...348 stereographic...422
show vertex tolerance circles...348 stereographic projection...422
SHP...334 stream mode...50, 263, 350
simple polygon...229 stream mode button...263, 350
single pixel noise spikes...224 subtract...285
single pixel object anomalies...224 suffix...145
sinusoidal...420 suggestions...32
sinusoidal projection...420 support forum...29
slider button...318 Surfer...277, 278, 337
smaller image...232 Surfer 7...278
small-image object features...224 Surfer contour map...278
snap...170 Surfer image map...278
snap all polyline segments...170 Surfer shaded relief map...278
snap nearest line segment symbol...45, 122
button...263, 350 symbol - calibration...82, 257
snap nearest vertex button...263, 350 symbol properties...140, 143, 147,
snap polyline segments...170 345, 358
snap tolerance...40, 67, 170, 253, 348 system...295, 370
snap undershoot polylines...171 system requirements...1
snapped...176
Sobel...217
447
Didger
tolerance field...196, 237

T tolerance number...196, 237
tolerance settings...196, 237, 253,
tablet...35 345, 348
tablet button settings...40, 253, 263, tolerance slide bar...196, 237
350 toolbar...15
tablet calibration...35, 36, 37, 38, 40, toolbars...13, 15
41, 64, 80, 244, 245, 247, 251, 253, tools menu...162, 163, 165, 166, 167,
255, 261 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 180,
tablet calibration overview...245 285
tablet calibration wizard...245 tools toolbar...15
tablet coordinates...35 total RMS...44
tablet digitizing...242, 245 tracing...50
tablet driver info...262 transformation methods...98
tablet overview...245 transformations...91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
tablet settings...345 96, 97, 98
tablet X...37 transparent...237
tablet X and Y...247 transparent field...237
tablet Y...37 transverse mercator...424
technical support...31 transverse mercator projection...424
template coordinate systems...390 triangulation with linear
template library (text)...106, 108 interpolation...282
template projections...390 trim overshoot polylines...171
templates...390 trim polyline...169
test template (text)...113 troubleshooting digitizing tablets...83,
text...101, 102, 139 266
text button...156 truncate objects...291
text editor...102, 106, 108, 113 turning off the image display...61
text editor template library...108 tutorial...34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41,
text properties...102, 143, 345, 356 42, 44, 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52,
text template editor example...113 53, 55, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 63,
TFW...432 64, 67
TGA...334 tutorial - changing the projection...56
thematic mapping tool...78 tutorial - polylines...68
thin and smooth...163 tutorial - shared polylines...70
thin plate spline...90, 94, 251 tutorial assign projection...55
third order polynomial...90, 93, 251 tutorial download online maps...66
three minute tour...10 tutorial projection...55
three-minute tour...10 tutorial snap tolerance...67
threshold...196, 212, 227 TWAIN...12, 80, 241
TIF...334
TIFF...334
tile...340
tips on using layers...24, 76
title bar...13
toggle...25
448
Index
vectorize image...60, 61, 196

U vertex averaging...163
vertex count...160, 301
u.s. data...182 vertex offset...345
underlying electronic detection vertex tolerance...40, 253, 348
system...242 view data source...192
undershoot...171 view menu...17, 18, 22, 25, 26, 29,
undo...307 77, 143, 291, 296, 319, 320, 321,
undo button...263, 350 322, 323, 326
undo levels...345 view redraw...322
ungroup polygons...180 view toolbar...15
union polygons...176 visible...61
units...17 visible layers...22, 77
universal transverse mercator...425
universal transverse mercator
coordinate system...390 W
universal transverse mercator
projection...425
unmatched projections...331 warp...201
unprojected lat/long...401 warp method...44, 201
unprojected latitude/longitude...401 warping methods...98
unselect...311 web map servers...182
update...345 web mapping servers...182
us data...182 web maps...182
use 3 point method...125, 345 web servers...182
use calibration point...251 welcome...29
user defined ellipsoid...384 welcome to Didger...1
user interface...13, 323 well log longer than tablet...261
User interface style...323 well log resampling...165
USGS...153 what is digitizing...2, 242
USGS fill pattern...153 WINTAB...12, 80, 241
using didger...10 wintab driver...12, 80, 241
using help...29 wintab info...262
using scaling to minimize distortion in wintab23.dll...262
latitude/longitude projects...430 wireframe...278
utm...390, 425 wizard...245, 247, 253
WMF...334
WMS...182
world coordinate systems...390
V world projection...390
world reference file...432
van der grinten...426 world X...37
van der grinten projection...426 world X and Y...247, 251
vector...196 world Y...37
vector files...11, 75 world/continental projections...295,
vectorization pre-processing...63, 211 370
vectorization scheme...196
449
Didger
worldwide data...182 Y axis operation...285

WPG...334 Y axis scaling...291
wrapped polyline...130 Y axis type...36
Y output image extents...210
Y pos...156
X
X axis minimum...291 Z
X axis operation...285
X axis scaling...291 z value...278
X axis type...36 zoom...319, 320, 321
X output image extents...210 zoom in...319
X pos...156 zoom in and out...321
zoom out...319
zoom realtime...321
Y zoom rectangle...320
zoom selected...320
Y axis minimum...291
450
Customer Service Resources
Before calling, please check the following available resources as your question may
already be answered.
Registration:
Register online at www.GoldenSoftware.com or fax or mail the Registration
Form.PDF, located in the main directory on the CD
Knowledge Base:
www.GoldenSoftware.com/activekb or in the Didger program using the
Help | Golden Software on the Web | Knowledge Base command
Forums:
www.GoldenSoftware.com/forum or in the Didger program using the
Help | Help Contents command and click on Forums
Frequently Asked Questions:
In the Didger program using the Help | Golden Software on the Web |
Frequently Asked Questions command
Tutorial:
Complete the tutorial section in this quick start guide or in the Didger
program using the Help | Tutorial command
Online Help:
In the Didger program using the Help | Help Contents command
Support Videos:
Business Hours
Technical Support:
Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM, Mountain Time
Product Sales:
Online orders available 24 hours, 7 days a week with 2 business hour delivery
Golden Software Contact Information

DidgerSupport@GoldenSoftware.com
phone: 303-279-1021
fax: 303-279-0909
Full User’s Guide

Golden Software Didger v5.x - User's Guide (Didger5FullGuide-eBook)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Golden Software Didger v5.x - User's Guide (Didger5FullGuide-eBook)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Full User’s Guide

The Ultimate Digitizing, Coordinate

Your Didger serial number is located on the CD cover or in the email

Register your Didger serial number online at

Registration entitles you to free technical support, free minor updates,

The Ultimate Digitizing, Coordinate

Golden Software, Inc.

Copyright Golden Software, Inc. 2013

Status Bar ............................................................................................... 17

Next Steps ............................................................................................... 41

Downloading an Image Outlining the Areas ................................................... 66

Chapter 3 - Managing the Project

Chapter 4 - Drawing Objects

Drawing Tips .......................................................................................... 124

Chapter 5 - Editing Objects

Spline Smooth ........................................................................................ 164

Chapter 6 - Downloading and Processing Images

Minimum Pixel Length ............................................................................. 200

Edge Detection ....................................................................................... 212

Modifying Image Colors .............................................................................. 237

Chapter 7 - Tablet Digitizing

Skip Rows.............................................................................................. 259

Chapter 8 - Map Properties

Inverse Distance to a Power ..................................................................... 282

Line Style .............................................................................................. 298

Chapter 9 - Selecting and Arranging Objects

Selecting Objects ....................................................................................... 309

Chapter 10 - Changing the View

Changing the Window Layout....................................................................... 323

Chapter 11 - Importing, Exporting, Saving, and Printing

Overlap ................................................................................................. 342

Chapter 12 - Options, Defaults, and Customizations

Chapter 13 - Coordinate Systems and Map Projections

Modify Coordinate System........................................................................ 374

Eckert VI Projection ................................................................................ 397

GeoTIFF File (*.tif, *.tiff) ......................................................................... 432

Index ....................................................................................................... 436

Data transformation and coordinate conversion capabilities, in addition to Golden

With Didger, you can easily draw objects

Examples of Didger Uses

Image Registration and Processing

Projections and Coordinate Systems

• Make datum transformations using Molodensky, NADCON, or Inverse NADCON

• Irish Transverse Mercator (ITM)

Import and Export Improvements

• Import Banded Lattice Files

• At least 500 MB of free disk space, 10 GB for advanced image processing

To install Didger from a CD:

To install Didger from a download:

A Note about the Documentation

Sample Didger Files

USGS DRG Contour Extraction.PJT

Getting Base Information into Didger

Tablets vs. Scanners

What is a Digitizing Tablet?

Didger User Interface

The Property Manager allows you to edit any of the properties of

The Coordinate Manager contains the vertex coordinates of a

Show or Hide Toolbars

Tool Tip Display of Button Function

If tool tips do not display, click the View | Toolbars/Managers | Customize

The Standard toolbar has buttons for many of

The Drawing toolbar has buttons

GeoTIFF File (.tif, .tiff) ......................................................................... 432